fiber optic isolators
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
ALL FIBER POLARIZATION CONTROLLER
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
No intrinsic loss
No backreflection
Compact size
Easy to use
Wavelength insensitive
Low cost
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
Singlemode to Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber launching
Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements
Launching into Polarization sensitive devices
Fiber lasers
Fiber interferometers
In-Line Polarization
Controller Without Fiber
Product Description
Polarization controllers allow one to convert any input polarization
to any desired output polarization. The device combines the
compact size and ease of use of standard bulk optics systems with
low costs, low losses, and low backreflections.
The controller works by applying pressure with an adjustable
clamp. The pressure on the fiber causes a birefringence within
the fiber core, causing the fiber to act as a fractional wave plate.
Varying the pressure varies the delay between the fast and slow
polarization components. The clamp is rotatable, allowing one to
change the direction in which the stress is applied. This allows
any output polarization to be achieved. The process is simple and
quick. Output polarizations exceeding 30dB can be routinely
achieved in seconds.
In-Line Polarization
Controller With Fiber
The fiber polarization controller works with singlemode fiber of
any wavelength. The controller does not work with multimode or
Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber. For multimode and PM fiber
OZ Optics still offers their standard series of polarization rotators
and analyzers (refer to the Polarization Rotators/Controllers/
Analyzers data sheet).
All fiber polarization controllers are offered in three versions. The
in-line polarization controller can be inserted onto a customer’s
own singlemode fiber. It can be used with any wavelength
singlemode fiber. The in-line version is designed to work with only
250 micron and 400 micron jacketed fibers. Second, a pigtailed
version is also offered. This version is available with any size of
cable or fiber, and with your choice of connectors. Finally, a
connector receptacle style controller is available, using a short
section of fiber terminated with female receptacles. For further
information contact OZ Optics.
DTS0001
Receptacle Style
Polarization Controller
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
17-Nov-04
1
Ordering Example For Standard Parts
A university scientist is building a fiber interferometer and needs to manipulate the polarization of the light travelling through the fiber. He
is using standard singlemode fiber for telecommunications wavelengths, and is using a 1480 nm source. To minimize reflections in his
system he is using FC connectors with an APC finish. Based on this, a receptacle style controller will work in his application.
Bar Code
6324
Part Number
Description
HFPC-11-1300/1500-S-9/125-3A3A
All Fiber Polarization Controller for 1300/1500 nm with 9/125 singlemode fiber and FC/APC
receptacles on both ends.
Questionnaire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Which of the following options best describes your needs?
a) I want to install and remove my own fiber.
b) I want a specific fiber permanently installed.
c) I want receptacles on either side to plug devices into.
What wavelengths are you using?
For pigtail style models, what should be the fiber length and cable type?
For both pigtail and receptacle styles, what type of connector are you using?
What is the intensity of the light travelling through the fiber?
Ordering Information For Custom Parts
Pigtail Version:
PFPC-11-W-S-a/b-XY-JD-L
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device
Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and
7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber.
See Table 1 of the Standard Tables for other
standard fiber sizes
Fiber jacket type:
1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3=3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket
sizes
Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other
connectors
Receptacle Version:
HFPC-11-W-S-a/b-XY
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber.
See Table 1 of the Standard Tables for other
standard fiber sizes
Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra FC NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other
connectors
Ordering Example For Custom Parts
A fiber laser manufacturer wants to put a polarization controller in his system. His laser will operate at 1053 nm, so he needs singlemode
fiber for that wavelength. He needs 10 meters of fiber installed in the device, five meters per side. For strength and safety, he is using
3 mm OD cabling. He wants FC/APC connectors on both ends.
Part Number
PFPC-11-980-S-6/125-3A3A-3-5
Description
All Fiber Polarization Controller with 5 meter long 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cabled 980 nm
6/125 singlemode fiber pigtails with FC/APC connectors on both ends.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
ASE BROADBAND LIGHT SOURCE
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High output power from 13 dBm (20mW) to 27 dBm (500mW)
Wide spectral bandwidth
Covers C-band, L-band, or both
Pre
lim
High stability
ina
Multi-output option-up to 4 ports
ry
Un-polarized output light
Optional RS232 or USB interface
High performance-to-cost ratio
Optional built-in attenuator and optical power monitor
Custom design flexibility
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical component testing
Telecom system compliance testing
EDFA gain spectrum measurements
Optical fiber sensors and sensing systems
WDM by spectral slicing
Biomedical imaging
Coherent communication systems
Erbium-doped Fiber ASE Broadband Light Source
Product Description:
An ASE (Amplified Spontaneous Emission) broadband low
coherence light source is an ideal instrument for optical component
spectral measurement and system compliance testing in
manufacturing and R&D environments. The new generation of ASE
sources have no high frequency ripples, which makes them very
useful for sensor interrogation applications.
Sources are available to cover the C-band, L-band, or both the C &
L bands together. These are available with either a flattened spectral
output for demanding applications, or a non-flattened response for
less demanding or cost-sensitive applications. A range of output
powers are available.
DTS0106
The output light is accessed via a female fiber connector receptacle
on the front panel. A variety of standard connector types are
available. Custom connectors can also be accommodated. Built-in
splitters can also be provided to give multiple outputs without the
cost of purchasing multiple sources.
The basic version of the source has a simple ON/OFF operation. A
built-in attenuator is available as an option, for users who need to be
able to vary the output power. A built-in microprocessor can be
included for applications that require the source or optional
attenuator to operate under computer control. Either RS-232 or USB
interfaces are offered .
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
22-Mar-05
1
Questionnaire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
What is the required power level?
What range of wavelengths do you need?
Would you like more than one optical output? If yes, how many?
Do you need to be able to control the optical power?
Do you need to have the source controlled by a computer? If yes, with what control interface?
Do you need a flattened spectral response?
What is your preferred connector interface?
What sort of package style do you prefer?
Description
ASE Broadband Source
N
Number of Output Ports.
Specify 1, 2 or 4. The specified output
power is divided equally amongst the
output ports.
PP
Output Power in dBm:
Example – specify 13 for 13 dBm, 27
for 27 dBm. Power should be within the
range of 13 to 27 dBm.
B
Wavelength band:
C = C band
L = L band
D= C & L bands
S
Package style:
1 = Bench top
2 = Rack mountable
3 = OEM module
4 = Gain Block - No electronics
provided, user must provide pump
drivers
9 = Custom
F
Flatness:
N = Non-flattened
F = Flattened
Part Number
A S E -N -P P- B -S -F - X- O- I
I
Control interface:
R = RS232
U = USB
X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block
version or basic version
O
Options
A = Built-in attenuator with
microprocessor control
B = Basic version
M = Microprocessor controlled
X
Receptacle style:
3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
BACKREFLECTION METER
RY
INA
M
I
EL
PR
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sensitivity to -70 dB
Built-in RS-232 communications port
Wide range of available wavelengths
Built-in source
Dual wavelength source available
Rugged and compact design
High resolution
Optional insertion loss measurement capability
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Backreflection measurement of components
Insertion loss measurement
End-to-end loss measurement
Quality control
New Product development
Component or system troubleshooting
Network installation
Fiber Optic Backreflection Meter
Product Description:
The OZ Optics Limited BM-100 and BM-200 Backreflection Meters measure the total accumulated optical return loss that is reflected back
through a device or fiber under test. The measured reflections are caused by Rayleigh scattering, sudden changes in the refractive index
within the device under test (DUT), or from connector ends.
The Backreflection Meter is configured with an FC/APC connector on the output port, to minimize unwanted reflections. The meter has either
one or two built-in laser diodes for return loss measurement at specific wavelengths. An optional detector can be added to the unit for insertion
loss measurements. Reference patchcords for calibration are available. Adaptor patchcords are also available, to allow the meter to be used
with devices having different connectors.
The BM-100 and BM-200 Backreflection Meters can be operated remotely via the built-in RS-232 interface. An optional GPIB to RS-232
converter is also available. A universal AC/DC power supply, with a North American-standard power cord, is included with all units. Other types
of power cords can be purchased separately.
DTS0002
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
11/14/02
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A European fiber optic manufacturer must measure the backreflection and the insertion loss of singlemode and polarization-maintaining jumpers, at
1550 nm and at 1310 nm. The manufacturer needs to order the following parts:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
14726
BM-200-3A-1310/1550-9/125-S-IL
Singlemode Fiber Optic Backreflection Meter, with dual 1310 and 1550 nm
built-in sources and insertion loss measurement capability.
10229
SMJ-3A1-1300/1550-9/125-3-1
Reference patchcord, FC/APC to flat-polished ferrule, 9/125 micron
singlemode 1300/1550 nm fiber, 3 mm OD PVC jacket, 1 m long.
8131
SMJ-3A3U-1300/1550-9/125-3-2
Hybrid patchcord, FC/APC to FC/UPC, 9/125 micron singlemode 1300/1550
nm fiber, 3 mm OD PVC jacket, 2 m long.
2737
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
Although we strongly recommend the purchase of our standard products, OZ Optics also welcomes the opportunity to provide customdesigned products to meet your application requirements. There can be a difference in the pricing for a custom-designed device or part
compared to our standard parts list. Please consider the following points when reviewing your quotation:
•
•
•
•
Additional time is required to prepare a comprehensive quotation.
Lead times are usually longer than normal.
Non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges and lot charges may apply.
A five piece minimum order is necessary.
These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so you can make a well-informed decision.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What is your application?
What wavelengths do you plan to use?
What connector receptacle type do you need?
What fiber type are you using?
What is the minimum backreflection you want to measure?
Do you want to measure insertion losses?
Do you want a single wavelength or dual wavelength source?
Backreflection Meter:
A =Source type:
100: Single wavelength source
200: Dual wavelength source
X = Connector Code :
3= Standard, Super, Ultra NTT-FC/PC
receptacle
3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
8= AT&T-ST
BM-A-X-W-a/b - F - BL(-IL)
IL = Add -IL to the end of the part number for
insertion loss measurement capability.
BL = Backreflection range. If not specified,
then a range of 70dB is assumed for
singlemode fiber and 30dB for multimode
fiber.
F = Fiber type
S: Singlemode
M: Multimode
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber.
W = Wavelength in nm:
850, 980, 1310,1480,1550,1625 or
W1/W2 for dual source, in nm:
1310/1550, 1550/1625, 1480/1550
Notes:
1. For the multimode backreflection meter, the minimum measureable backreflection is 30 dB. Multimode backreflection meters are
configured with LED sources.
2. For singlemode backreflection meters, the minimum measureable backreflection measurement is 70 dB, with angled FC/PC connectors, at
wavelengths of 1310 nm, or higher.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
BARE FIBER ADAPTER
Bare fiber preparation
Bare fiber adapters provide a simple and effective way to use
unterminated fibers with commercial receptacles. Simply strip and
cleave your fiber and insert into the bare fiber adapter. Broken
fibers are easily removed with piano wire, allowing hundreds of
insertions. They are recommended for power meter hook-ups,
temporary system repairs or wherever a quick fiber connection is
required. Standard adapters accommodate 81 micron, 125
micron or 140 micron cladding fibers with a typical insertion loss
of less than 1dB.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Note: When using alcohol and acetone, carefully follow all
safety, health and disposal information given on the
container label, and on any material safety data sheets.
1. If you are using the bare fiber adapter with uncabled
fiber, proceed to step 2. If you are using cabled fibers, strip at
least 3 inches of the cable's outer jacket and cut away the
exposed strength members (usually Kevlar fibers near the
stripped edge).
2. Strip a sufficient amount of the buffer to allow for fiber cleaving.
The length of buffer stripped from the fiber will depend on the
type of cleaving tool used. (Usually 1" to 2" is adequate.)
3. Cleave the fiber, leaving approximately 1/2" to 5/8" of exposed
fiber. (See the illustration above).
4. Clean the exposed cladding with acetone and/or isopropyl
alcohol (reagent grade).
5. Depress the spring-loaded buffer clamping mechanism and
insert the cleaved fiber into the acceptance hole. Push the
fiber through until the cleaved fiber end is flush with the
ceramic ferrule end face. At this point release the buffer
clamping mechanism, to hold the fiber in place. Inspect the
end face with an eye loop and if necessary, adjust the fiber
until it is flush.
6. Clean the surface of the ceramic ferrule with a lint-free, alcohol
dampened cloth and blow dry with compressed air.
7. The fiber is now ready for use. Insert the adapter into the
optical test equipment's coupler.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Part Number
Description
BARE-03-b
Bare fiber adapter for FC connectors.
BARE-08-b
Bare fiber adapter for ST connectors
Where: b is the ferrule hole size, in microns Standard sizes are 81 microns, 127 microns and 144 microns.
Hole size tolerance is +1/-0 microns
Contact OZ Optics for bare fiber adapters for other adapter types, and other hole diameters.
ORDERING EXAMPLE: An FC style bare fiber adapter is needed for use with 127 micron cladded fibers. OZ Optics part
number: BARE-03-127.
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
BEAM SPLITTERS/COMBINERS
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High power handling
High extinction ratio
Highly modular and flexible design
Wide wavelength range
Bi-directional
Broadband performance
Custom designs welcomed
Mode independent behavior in multimode fiber applications.
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pigtail Style One-by-two Splitter
EDFA amplifier
Raman amplifier combiner
Polarization mode dispersion compensation
Polarization extinction ratio measurements
Fiber optic sensors
Coherent communication systems
Return loss measurement
Product Description
Fiber optic beam splitters are used to divide light from one fiber into two
or more fibers. Light from an input fiber is first collimated, then sent
through a beam splitting optic to divide it into two. The resultant output
beams are then focused back into the output fibers. Both 1XN and 2XN
splitters can be constructed in this fashion with both low return losses
and low insertion losses. This design is extremely flexible, allowing one
to use different fiber types on different ports, and different beam splitter
optics inside. Splitters can also be made with either fibers permanently
attached to each port (pigtail style) or with receptacles on each port that
one can plug your fiber into (receptacle style). We can also build source
to fiber couplers with built-in beamsplitters for either laser or laser diode
sources. Contact OZ for details.
Pigtail Style Two-by-two Splitter
Please note that we strongly recommend using pigtail style devices
whenever possible.
Mechanical tolerances on connectors and
receptacles mean receptacle style devices suffer from higher losses and
poorer polarization extinction ratios than pigtail style devices. This is
especially true for singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber
devices.
Laser To Fiber Coupler
With Built-in Beam Splitter
If size is a concern, we recommend that you consider our miniature line
of splitters. Please refer to our data sheet titled Miniature Inline
Polarization Maintaining Splitters/Taps/Combiners.
The two most common types of splitters offered are polarizing beam
splitters and polarization maintaining beam splitters. Their operating
principles are as follows:
Polarization Maintaining Splitters: These splitters use a partially
reflecting mirror to transmit a portion of the light from the input fiber to
the main output fiber, and reflect the remainder of the light to the second
output fiber. All ports made using polarization maintaining fiber are
DTS0095
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Laser Diode
Polarization Beam Combiner
03-Mar-05
1
aligned so that polarized light aligned parallel to the stress rods on
the input fiber emerges from the output fibers in the same manner,
maintaining the polarization state to a high degree.
Polarization maintaining splitters use a multi-layer coating to split the
light by a specific ratio regardless of the incoming polarization.
Because of the nature of these coatings, their behavior will vary
somewhat with respect to wavelength, and so are recommended for
an operating wavelength range of about ±10nm. Broadband beam
splitters are offered, but with greater variation in the split ratio with
respect to input polarization.
Splitters that only split off a small portion of the input light are
commonly known as taps. These splitters are often used for power
monitoring applications. The small signal, typically between one and
ten percent, is sent to a monitoring photodiode, while the majority of
the signal goes on to the main destination. For a very low cost
alternative configuration, combining the functions of a tap and
monitor photodiode in a single unit, we invite you to review our Inline
Optical Taps and Monitors data sheet.
Polarizing Splitters: Polarizing Beam Splitters split incoming light
into two orthogonal states. They can also be used to combine the
light from two fibers into a single output fiber. When used as a beam
combiner, each input signal will transmit along a different output
polarization axis. It is important when using these splitters with
polarization maintaining fiber that one understands how the
polarization axes are aligned on each port. Figure 1 one shows the
standard configuration. With this configuration, the following
behavior will be observed:
1) Light launched along the slow axis of input port T will be
transmitted along the slow axis of output port 1
2) Light launched along the fast axis of input port T will be
transmitted along the slow axis of output port 2
3) Light launched along the slow axis of input port R will be
transmitted along the fast axis of output port 1
4) Light launched along the fast axis of input port R will be
transmitted along the fast axis of output port 2
This configuration can be changed based on a customer’s
requirements.
Please note that with polarizing splitters there are two
considerations: The ability of the splitter to prevent polarized light
intended for port 1 from reaching port 2 or vice versa (polarization
crosstalk), and the output polarization extinction ratio of the light
emerging from polarization maintaining fibers attached to each port.
The crosstalk level will always be equal to or greater than the
polarization extinction ratio. For example, a splitter can be produced
with a high cross talk ratio, but if the output fibers have mediocre
performance, then the output polarization extinction ratio would be
low. Please be sure to specify both of these values if your system
has special requirements.
PORT R
Input
Port R
Two 4-40 Tapped holes,
0.50 inches apart,
0.34 inches deep
(On the bottom)
Output
Port 1
Input
Port T
Output
Port 2
Figure 1: Standard orientation of polarization maintaining
fibers on polarizing beamsplitters
0.39
(TYP)
0.87
PORT T
PORT 2
PORT 1
0.87
Figure 2: Dimensions of standard two-by-two splitter
2
Part Number
Description
Pigtail Style
One-by-two Splitter
FOBS-12P-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L
Pigtail Style
Two-by-two Splitter
FOBS-22P-1111-a/b-ADBC-W-S/R-LB-XTYZ-JD-L
a/b =
Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber.
8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber
7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber
See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables
data sheet for other standard fiber sizes
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
S/R =
Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5
50/50 Standard
Use PBS for polarizing splitters
Fiber length, in meters
JD =
Fiber jacket type
0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
X,T, = Connector codes for each port
Y,Z
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
LC = LC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other connectors
A,D, = Fiber Types on each port
B,C
(Input T, Input R, Output 1 and Output 2)
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
W=
L=
LB =
Backreflection level:
30, 40, 50, or 60 dB
50, 60 dB are standard for 1300 nm to
1550 nm only
40 dB standard for other wavelengths
30 dB is standard for multimode
Note: Add “-ER=25” or “-ER=30” to the end of the part number for products with output polarization greater than 25 dB and 30 dB, respectively.
Description
Receptacle Style
One-by-two Splitter
FOBS-12-XYZ-ABC-W-S/R
Receptacle Style
Two-by-two Splitter
FOBS-22-XTYZ-ADBC-W-S/R
X,T, = Connector codes for each port
Y,Z
3 = FC, Super FC/PC and Ultra FC/PC
3AF = Angled Flat NTT-FC
SC = SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for
other connectors
Part Number
S/R =
Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5
50/50 Standard
Use PBS for polarizing splitters
W=
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
A,D, = Fiber Types on each port
B,C
(Input T, Input R, Output 1and Output 2)
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
5
Description
Pigtail Style Laser Diode
to Fiber Splitter
Pigtail Style Laser
to Fiber Splitter
Part Number
LDBS-12P-a/b-AB-W-S/R-LB-XY-JD-L-C
ULBS-12P-a/b-AB-W-S/R-f-LH-LB-XY-JD-L
Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber.
8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber
7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber
See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables
data sheet for other standard fiber sizes
C=
Coupling Efficiency1:
30 = 30%
45 = 45%
75 = 75%
L=
Fiber length, in meters
JD =
Fiber jacket type
0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
a/b =
A,B = Fiber Types on each port
(Output 1, Output 2)
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
W=
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
S/R =
Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5
50/50 Standard
Use PBS for polarizing splitters
f=
Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3
for Non-Contact couplers with
receptacles in the Laser to Fiber
Coupler Application Notes
X,Y = Connector codes for each port
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
LC = LC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other connectors
LB =
LH =
Laser Head Adapter
1 for 1” -32TPI Male Threaded Adapter
2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1”
square
11 for Post Mount Adapter
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other connectors
Backreflection level:
30, 40, 50, or 60 dB
50, 60 dB are standard for 1300 nm to
1550 nm only
40 dB standard for other wavelengths
30 dB is standard for multimode
1
Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser diode for every
fiber type.
Description
Receptacle Style Laser Diode
to Fiber Splitter
Receptacle Style Laser
to Fiber Splitter
X,Y = Connector codes for each port
3 = FC, Super FC/PC and Ultra FC/PC
3AF = Angled Flat NTT-FC
SC = SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for
other connectors
Part Number
LDBS-1XY-AB-W-S/R-C
ULBS-1XY-AB-W-S/R-f-LH
C=
Coupling Efficiency1:
30 = 30%
45 = 45%
75 = 75%
LH =
A,B = Fiber Types on each port
(Output 1, Output 2)
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
Laser Head Adapter
1 for 1” -32TPI Male Threaded Adapter
2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1”
square
11 for Post Mount Adapter
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables data sheet for
other connectors
W=
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
f=
S/R =
Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5
50/50 Standard
Use PBS for polarizing splitters
Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3
for Non-Contact couplers with
receptacles in the Laser to Fiber
Coupler Application Notes
1
Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser diode for every
fiber type.
6
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
COLLIMATORS AND FOCUSERS – RECEPTACLE STYLE
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PR
High power handling
EL
Rugged and compact design
IMI
NA
Low insertion loss
RY
Wide wavelength range
Wide range of beam diameters
GRIN, aspheric, achromatic, plano-convex, and
biconvex lenses available
Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining
fiber versions
Diffraction limited optics
LOW COST!
APPLICATIONS:
•
•
•
Fiber optic device packaging, including WDM’s
Splitters, and integrated optics
Source to fiber coupling
Fiber to detector coupling
Collimators/Focusers With 20mm and 33mm Flanges
SPECIFICATIONS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available Wavelengths:
Polarization
Extinction ratios:
Beam Diameters:
Spot size:
Wavefront distortion:
Insertion Loss:
180nm - 2000nm
20, 25, or 30dB
0.2 to 22mm
As small as <5 microns
λ/4 to λ/10
≤0.6 dB for 60mm separation
≤0.3 dB for 10mm separation
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
OZ Optics offers a complete line of fiber collimators and focusers with low
backreflection, designed to collimate or focus light exiting a fiber to a
desired beam diameter or spot size. By utilizing diffraction limited lenses,
spot sizes of a few microns can be achieved. These devices can be used
with laser diodes, photodiodes, acousto-optic modulators and other fiber
optic devices. Collimators and focusers can be used as matched pairs to
couple light in and out of optical devices. This makes them ideal for fiber
packaging of devices.
12mm OD Collimator/Focuser
For collimators, the collimated beam diameter (BD) and full divergence
angle (DA) depends upon the focal length of the lens (f), the core diameter
(a), and the fiber numerical aperture (NA). The collimated beam
characteristics are given by:
BD(mm) = 2 x f(mm) x NA
DA(mrad) = a(µm) / f(mm)
When using the above formulae, please exercise caution. Different
definitions for the numerical aperture are used by fiber manufacturers. For
instance, definitions based on 50 percent, 13.5 percent (1/e 2), 5 percent,
and 1 percent intensity levels are all used.
OZ Optics standard tables list the definitions used for each fiber type, as
well as conversion factors to convert values to 1/e 2 values. OZ Optics uses
1/e2 definitions for its calculations of the beam diameter wherever possible.
11mm OD Collimator/Focuser
DTS0094
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
For fiber focusers, the exact calculation of the spot diameter (SD),
magnification factor (M), and working distance (WD) is more
difficult and depends on the properties of the lenses being used.
As a first approximation, one can calculate the desired focuser
characteristics using the geometric optics lens formulae:
1 +1 1
i o=f
FIBER
FIBER FOCUSER
LENS
FIBER
LENS
DA/2
a
M=- i
o
WD ~
=i
SD = M × a
FIBER COLLIMATOR
NA
BD
f
Where o, i are the object and image distances respectively. Use
the above formulae to determine what focal lens you require.
Standard focal lengths and lenses are listed in the Standard
Tables data sheet.
a
SD
o
DA/2
BD = 2×f×NA
DA = a/f
i
1/i + 1/o = 1/f
M = -i/o, SD = M×a
Figure 2: Operating Principle
Specifications:
Note: The following specifications are typical values, and may vary, depending on the exact model selected.
specifications for your exact model.
Contact OZ for detailed
Temperature Range:
Operating: -15°C to 55°C with 0.2dB deviation in loss.
Storage: -45°C to +75°C with less than 0.05dB residual loss.
Vibration and Shock Test: Vibration tests were performed, consisting of a 0.05 inch peak to peak displacement, sweeping from 10 to 55 Hz
over 15 minutes dwell at worst resonance of 55 Hz (.02g). Each device was tested for twenty-five minutes per axis
for a total of 75 minutes of vibration. Tests were conducted in each of the three major axes of the test unit. Shock
tests consisting on 100g, 11 msec duration half-sine shocks, three times on each face for a total of 18 shocks,
were also performed. Coupling loss deviation was 0.05dB with no hysteresis.
Power Handling:
GRIN lenses: Up to 1 Watt.
Achromat lenses: 5 to 10 Watts
Aspheric lenses:Up to 10 Watts
Plano- and Bi-convex lenses: Up to 100 Watts
Available Wavelengths:
GRIN lenses: 450-1700nm
Achromat lenses: 400/700nm and 700-1600nm
Aspheric lenses:390-2000nm
Plano- and Bi-convex lenses: 180-2000nm
Polarization Extinction Ratios:
Typically >30dB for Aspheric lenses, >20dB for others.
Dimensions:
The dimensions given below are representative of typical products manufactured by OZ Optics. Actual dimensions will depend on the actual
model ordered. In particular, the lengths of focusers may vary considerably from the lengths of a collimator for a given lens. The choice of
receptacle will also affect the overall length. However, unless noted otherwise the dimensions for the clear holes, tapped holes and outer
diameters of the flanges are accurate, and do not vary within product families regardless of which specific model collimator or focuser is
purchased.
The lens codes for which each version is designed for is listed below each drawing. Use the lens code to find the dimensions for your assembly.
0.200
0.313
0.515
2AS
3.9AS
0.320
0.433
0.645
0.350
0.463
0.675
0.100
0.582
0.784
0.260
0.727
0.929
2.7AS
3.5AC
6AC
6.2AS
10AC
5BQ
10BQ
0.240
1.343
1.545
Three 0-80 tapped holes
120° apart on a 1.125"
diameter bolt circle
25AC
Hole
Pattern
HPUCO-23 Dimensions
Note: All units are in inches
Three Ø0.096 thru holes
120° apart on a 1.125"
diameter bolt circle
ø0.472 ø0.590
ø0.791
1.97
0.240
0.353
0.555
3.5AC
4.5AC
6AC
2AS
2.7AS
2.19
Three 0-80 tapped holes
120° apart on a 1.125"
diameter bolt circle
Hole
Pattern
HPUCO-33 Dimensions
2.38
3.5AC
4.5AC
6AC
10AC
16AC
2AS 11AS
2.7AS 13.9AS
3.9AS 18AC
6.2AS 5BQ
8AS
HPUCO-83 Dimensions
2
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In
particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be
carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard
products.
Questionairre For Custom Parts
1. Do you require a fiber optic collimator, or a fiber optic focuser instead?
2a. For fiber collimator users only:
What is the desired collimated beam diameter (in mm)?
What is the desired collimated divergence angle (mRad)?
2b. For fiber focuser users only:
What is the desired spot diameter (in microns)?
What is the desired working distance (in mm)?
3. What is your operating wavelength range, in nanometers?
4. Will you be using singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining fibers?
5. What type of connector is on your fiber?
6. What is the output power through your fiber?
7. What is the desired flange size? 33mm, 20mm, 12mm, 11mm, or something else?
Description
Non-Contact Receptacle Style Collimator:
Part Number
HPUCO-AX-W-F-f
A = Collimator Size
2 for 33mm OD flange
3 for 20mm OD flange
8 for 12mm diameter by 50mm long housing
T for 11mm diameter housing
f = Lens focal length and type:
See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data
sheet for a list of available lenses and the
collimator housings they fit.
X = Connector code:
3 = FC (Compatible with Flat, Super PC
and Ultra PC finishes
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
3AF = Angled Flat FC
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors.
Description
Non-Contact Receptacle Style Focuser:
A = Collimator Size
2 for 33mm OD flange
3 for 20mm OD flange
8 for 12mm diameter by 50mm long housing
T for 11mm diameter housing
X = Connector code:
3 = FC (Compatible with Flat, Super PC
and Ultra PC finishes
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
3AF = Angled Flat FC
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors.
F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
W = Wavelength in nm:
(Example: Specify 633 for 633nm)
For achromat lenses at visible
wavelengths specify 400/700
Part Number
HPUFO-AX-W-F-M-WD-f
f = Lens focal length and type:
See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data
sheet for a list of available lenses and the
collimator housings they fit.
WD = Working Distance, in mm
M = Magnification Factor
F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
W = Wavelength in nm:
(Example: Specify 633 for 633nm)
For achromat lenses at visible
wavelengths specify 400/700
5
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
COLLIMATORS AND FOCUSERS – PIGTAIL STYLE
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PR
High power handling
EL
Rugged and compact design
IMI
NA
Low insertion loss
RY
Low backreflection
Wide wavelength range
Wide range of beam diameters
GRIN, aspheric, achromatic, plano-convex, and
biconvex lenses available
Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining
Fiber versions
Diffraction limited optics
LOW COST!
APPLICATIONS:
•
•
•
Fiber optic device packaging, including WDM’s
Splitters, and integrated optics
Source to fiber coupling
Fiber to detector coupling
2.5mm, 4mm, and 8mm OD Collimators/Focusers
SPECIFICATIONS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wavelength:
Backreflection:
Polarization
Extinction ratios:
Beam Diameters:
Spot size:
Wavefront distortion:
Insertion Loss:
180nm - 2000nm
-35, -40, -50, and -60dB
20, 25, or 30dB
0.2 to 22mm
As small as <5 microns
λ/4 to λ/10
≤0.6 dB for 60mm separation
≤0.3 dB for 10mm separation
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
OZ Optics offers a complete line of fiber collimators and focusers with low
backreflection, designed to collimate or focus light exiting a fiber to a
desired beam diameter or spot size. By utilizing diffraction limited lenses,
spot sizes of a few microns can be achieved. These devices can be used
with laser diodes, photodiodes, acousto-optic modulators and other fiber
optic devices. Collimators and focusers can be used as matched pairs to
couple light in and out of optical devices. This makes them ideal for fiber
packaging of devices.
1.6mm OD Collimator/Focuser
For collimators, the collimated beam diameter (BD) and full divergence
angle (DA) depends upon the focal length of the lens (f), the core diameter
(a), and the fiber numerical aperture (NA).The collimated beam
characteristics are given by:
BD(mm) = 2 x f(mm) x NA
DA(mrad) = a(µm) / f(mm)
When using the above formulae, please exercise caution. Different
definitions for the numerical aperture are used by fiber manufacturers. For
instance, definitions based on 50 percent, 13.5 percent (1/e 2), 5 percent,
and 1 percent intensity levels are all used.
Oz Optics standard tables list the definitions used for each fiber type, as
well as conversion factors to convert values to 1/e2 values. Oz Optics uses
1/e2 definitions for its calculations of the beam diameter wherever possible.
DTS0060
12mm OD Collimator/Focuser
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Strain Relief Tubing
(Optional)
Lens
Fiber: 250 micron acrylate coating,
or 900 micron hytrel jacket
18.5mm
FIBER COLLIMATOR
2.39/2.44mm
11.7mm
FIBER
5.0mm
Heat Shrink Tubing (Optional)
0.5mm
FIBER FOCUSER
LENS
FIBER
LENS
DA/2
STANDARD VERSION
a
Lens
BD
a
SD
Epoxy bead
10.4mm
f
2.39/2.44mm
0.5mm
NA
Fiber: 250 micron acrylate coating,
or 900 micron hytrel jacket
9.00mm
Ferrule
BD = 2×f×NA
DA = a/f
SHORT VERSION
Figure 1: Miniature pigtail style collimators
dimensions
o
DA/2
i
1/i + 1/o = 1/f
M = -i/o, SD = M×a
Figure 2: Operating Principle
For fiber focusers, the exact calculation of the spot diameter (SD), magnification factor (M), and working distance (WD) is more difficult
and depends on the properties of the lenses being used. As a first approximation, one can calculate the desired focuser characteristics
using the geometric optics lens formulae:
1 +1 1
i o=f
SD = M × a
M=- i
o
WD ~
=i
Where o, i are the object and image distances respectively. Use the above formulae to determine what focal lens you require.
Standard focal lengths and lenses are listed in the Standard Tables data sheet.
TEST RESULTS:
The following tests were conducted on a pigtail style collimator pair attached to a fixture providing a separation of 60mm. The pair was
adjusted for maximum coupling efficiency.
Temperature Range:
Humidity Test:
Operating: -15°C to 55°C with 0.2dB deviation in loss.
Storage: -45°C to +75°C with less than 0.05dB residual loss.
97% humidity for 48 hours with 0.2dB deviation and less than
(with the gap between the collimating lenses sealed against the environment).
0.05dB
residual
loss
Vibration and Shock Test: Vibration tests were performed, consisting of a 0.05 inch peak to peak displacement, sweeping from 10 to 55
Hz over 15 minutes dwell at worst resonance of 55 Hz (.02g). Each device was tested for twenty-five minutes
per axis for a total of 75 minutes of vibration. Tests were conducted in each of the three major axes of the
test unit. Shock tests consisting on 100g, 11 msec duration half-sine shocks, three times on each face for a
total of 18 shocks, were also performed. Coupling loss deviation was 0.05dB with no hysteresis.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1. What wavelength of light will you be transmitting through the fiber?
2. Do you need multimode, singlemode, or polarization maintaining fiber?
3. What fiber core/cladding size do you prefer?
4. If you need a collimator, what size collimated beam do you need?
5. If you need a focuser, what spot size and working distance do you need?
6. What is the maximum diameter collimator housing that you can use?
7. Do you prefer GRIN lenses, aspheric lenses achromat lenses, or plano convex / biconvex lenses?
8. How low a return loss do you require?
9. How long should the patchcord be, in meters?
10. Do you need a connector on the other end of the fiber? If so, what type?
11. What type of cabling do you need?
2
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we
will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be carefully explained
in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Description
Part Number
Pigtail Style Collimator:
LPC-0A-W-a/b-F-BD-f-BL-X-JD-L
A = Collimator Size
1 for 4.0mm OD, no flange
2 for 33mm OD removable flange1
3 for 20mm OD removable flange1
4
5
6
7
8
for
for
for
for
for
L = Fiber length, in meters
JD = Jacket Diameter
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD PVC loose tube with Kevlar
3A = 3mm OD armored
3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored
5A = 5mm OD armored
5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored
See table 7 of the standard tables for drawings
8.0mm OD no flange
2.5mm OD, standard length
2.5mm OD, short length2
1.6mm OD, no flange
12mm OD x 50mm long
W = Wavelength in nm:
(Example: Specify 633 for 633nm)
a/b = Fiber core and cladding diameters, in
microns: (Example: 9/125)
See tables 1 to 5 of the standard tables
data sheet for standard fiber sizes.
F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
BD = Beam Diameter, in mm
f = Lens focal length and type:
X = Connector code:
X = No connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC/PC
LCA = Angled LC
See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors.
See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data
sheet for a list of available lenses and the
collimator housings they fit.
Pigtail Style Focuser:
BL = Backreflection level:
25 or 35dB for multimode assemblies
25, 40, 50, or 60dB for singlemode or
polarization maintaining assemblies.
60dB versions are available for 1300nm and
1550nm wavelengths only
LPF-0A-W-a/b-F-M-WD-f-BL-X-JD-L
A = Collimator Size
1 for 4.0mm OD, no flange
2 for 33mm OD removable flange1
3 for 20mm OD removable flange1
4 for 8.0mm OD no flange
5 for 2.5mm OD, standard length
6 for 2.5mm OD, short length 2
7 for 1.6mm OD, no flange
8 for 12mm OD x 50mm long
W = Wavelength in nm:
(Example: Specify 633 for 633nm)
a/b = Fiber core and cladding diameters, in
microns: (Example: 9/125)
See tables 1 to 5 of the standard tables
data sheet for standard fiber sizes.
F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
M = Magnification Factor
WD = Working Distance, in mm
f = Lens focal length and type:
See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data
sheet for a list of available lenses and the
collimator housings they fit.
L = Fiber length, in meters
JD = Jacket Diameter
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD PVC loose tube with Kevlar
3A = 3mm OD armored
3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored
5A = 5mm OD armored
5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored
See table 7 of the standard tables for drawings
X = Connector code:
X = No connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC/PC
LCA = Angled LC
See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors.
BL = Backreflection level:
25 or 35dB for multimode assemblies
25, 40, 50, or 60dB for singlemode or
polarization maintaining assemblies.
60dB versions are available for 1300nm and 3
1550nm wavelengths only
1 Smaller diameter removable flanges (11.5mm to 15mm diameters) are available on request.
2 2.5mm and 1.6mm OD short length collimators are available with 0.25mm, or 0.9mm OD jacketed fibers only.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
CONNECTORS, PATCHCORDS, BULKHEAD RECEPTACLES & SLEEVE THRU ADAPTORS
Patchcords can be terminated with NTT-FC, SC, AT&T-ST,
LC, and SMA connectors, as well as other connector
types. FC connectors are highly recommended for both
singlemode and multimode use. They offer the highest
precision and repeatability. SMA connectors are used
mainly for very large core fibers and High Power
applications.
OZ Optics produces high quality fiber optic patchcords using a
variety of commercially available connectors and fibers. These
patchcords offer low insertion losses, and excellent repeatability.
Patchcords can be manufactured to any specified length. An
array of cable materials are available, including unjacketed fiber,
0.9mm outside diameter (O.D) loose tube buffer, 3mm O.D
kevlar reinforced PVC jacketing, 3mm armored cabling, and
5.0mm heavy duty armored cabling.
OZ Optics offers a variety of multimode (MM) fiber types,
including telecommunication standard Graded Index (GI) fibers
(50/125, 62.5/125 and 100/140 fiber sizes), and step index (SI)
fused silica core fibers for high power applications (10 to 1000
micron core sizes). Multimode fibers are designed to operate
well over a wide wavelength range. Their transmission range
depends on the dopants used. There are low OH- fibers, which
are optimized to either transmit well from 380nm to over
1600nm (IRVIS type), or high OH- fibers that transmit well from
280nm to 900nm (UVVIS type). Fibers that work at wavelengths
below 280nm and above 1600nm are available on request.
Singlemode (SM) fibers are available for a variety of
wavelengths, ranging from 320nm to 1550nm as well as
standard telecommunication fibers. They typically have a 99%
numerical aperture (NA) of about 0.13. Higher NA singlemode
fibers are available for certain special applications. When
ordering singlemode fibers please specify the wavelength it will
be used for. Singlemode fiber designed for 1300nm will not be
singlemode at 633nm. Singlemode fiber designed for 488nm
will work at 633nm with only slightly higher losses, but at 700nm
the losses are too high.
A large assortment of fiber types are available from stock. OZ
Optics also offers custom cabling services for customer
provided fibers. Please read our Standard Tables data sheet for
available fiber types.
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specification without prior notice.
FC connectors with Super PC and angle polished (APC)
endfaces are available to minimize back-reflection. Typical
backreflection levels are 45dB for Super PC connectors,
and 60dB for APC connectors. FC connectors for SM
fibers with ferrule hole sizes of 79, 80, 81, 82, and 83
microns are available to accommodate small cladding size
fibers. FC compatible connectors are also the connector
of choice for polarization maintaining fibers. Extinction
ratios of 30dB are achievable. See the data sheet entitled
Polarization Maintaining Connectors and Patchcords for
more information.
Bulkhead sleeve-thru adapters are also available.
These devices allow you to connect two patchcords
together, or to convert a male connector to a female
receptacle. Flanged bulkhead female receptacles are
also available for attaching angled or flat connectors to
other optical devices.
OZ Optics can also provide you with a variety of male
connectors, housings, and ferrules, to perform your own
terminations. A termination kit is available for this purpose.
It contains all the tools necessary to make your own
terminations in the field. If you only want a way to make a
quick, temporary connection, then a bare fiber adapter can
be used.
NOTE: Multimode does not mean a bundle of fibers.
Singlemode does not mean a single strand of fiber.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
MMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L
QMMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L
SMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L
QSMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L
PMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A
QPMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A
SMPC-03
PMPC-03
BULK-0X-F
HPLC-NTT/FC-SM (or PM)
HPLC-NTT/FC-PM-SL3.7
HPLC-ATT/ST-SM
HPLC-25-SMA/M
HPLC-SMA/M
PMPC-2X-b-JD
SMPC-2X-b-JD
MMPC-2X-b-JD
BARE-0X-b
OFOC-01-X
HEAT-0X-V
HEGU-01-V
Where:
Description
Multimode fiber optic patchcord.
High power fused silica multimode fiber optic patchcord.
Singlemode fiber optic patchcord.
High power fused silica singlemode fiber optic patchcord.
Polarization maintaining fiber optic patchcord.
High power fused silica polarization maintaining fiber optic patchcord.
FC style sleeve-thru adapters with 2.14mm wide keyway.
Polarization maintaining FC style sleeve-thru adapters with 2.06mm keyway.
Sleeve-thru connector adapters.
Flanged bulkhead FC receptacle. Write SM for singlemode and multimode applications,
PM for polarization maintaining applications.
Flanged bulkhead receptacle for Angled NTT-FC/PC connectors
Flanged bulkhead ST receptacle.
Flanged bulkhead SMA receptacle without stopper.
Flanged bulkhead SMA receptacle with stopper.
FC compatible PM connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 3S for Super FC).
SM male connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 3S for Super FC and 8 for ST).
MM male connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905 and 8 for ST).
Bare fiber adapter (Use X=3 for FC, and 8 for ST).
Connector termination kit. (Use X=3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for ST, and SC for SC).
Fiber optic connector heater. V indicates the input AC line voltage (120V or 240V)
Fiber optic heat gun. V indicates the input AC line voltage (120V or 240V)
X,Y are the input and output male connector types (1 for a 2mm diameter ferrule, 1A for an angled polished
ferrule, 2 for Biconic, 3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC/PC, 3A for Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 6 for
SMA 906, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, X for unterminated fiber ends),
W is the operating wavelength of the SM or PM fiber, in nm. For MM fibers only, specify IRVIS for fiber with
a 400nm to 1600nm operating range, or UVVIS for fiber with a 240nm to 900nm operating range. See the
Standard Tables data sheet for available fibers.
a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, in microns, respectively. Ferrule hole sizes for FC connectors
are 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 124, 125, 126, and 127 microns,
F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber);
JD is the fiber jacket type (0.25 or 0.4 for unjacketed fiber, 0.9 for 0.9mm nylon jacketing or loose tubing,
3 for 3mm OD loose tube PVC cable, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm OD armored cable.),
L is the fiber length in meters,
A is 1 for prealigned and locked PM connectors, 0 for unaligned PM connectors.
Example 1: A customer requires a high power multimode fiber optic patchcord, with a 50 micron core size, and good
transmission at 488nm. The patchcord must be 2 meters long, 3mm O.D armored cabled, and with angled FC style
connectors on both ends. OZ Optics' part number: QMMJ-3A3A-IRVIS-50/125-3A-2. QMMJ-3A3A-UVVIS-50/125-3A-2 is
also valid.
Bulkhead SMA Receptacle
Bulkhead SMA Receptacle with Stopper
Bulkhead FC/PC Receptacle
Bulkhead Angled FC/PC Receptacle
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
DELIVERY SYSTEM FOR FLOW VISUALIZATION – FIBER OPTIC
Flow visualization systems are useful tools for process
automation and quality control in liquid and gas production
and transport. A visible wavelength laser beam is coupled
into an optical fiber, recollimated at the fiber output, and then
sent through a lens, generating a line. The line of laser light
is then shone through the flowing liquid under inspection. As
the light passes through the moving fluid, it refracts and
scatters. Any particulate matter present, or changes to the
flow pattern within the fluid, causes fluctuations in the output
beam pattern which are visually observed.
OZ Optics offers complete delivery systems for flow
visualization, consisting of a laser to fiber coupler, fiber optic
patchcord, fiber optic collimator, and fiber optic line
generator. The line generator uses a Powell lens. This lens
offers the unique ability to take a collimated beam, and
transform it into a line with a uniform output intensity
along its entire length. This is a major improvement over
standard line generators, that use simple cylindrical
lens. With cylindrical lenses, the output intensity is highest
at the centre of the beam, then gradually fades away to either
side. With the Powell lens you get a sharply defined line from
end to end.
Fiber optic delivery systems are available for 488nm, 514nm,
and 633nm wavelengths. Other wavelengths are available
on request. The maximum power transmission possible
depends upon the fiber size chosen - 4/125 fiber can handle
1 to 3 Watts, 10/125 fiber can handle 3 to 5 Watts, 25/125
fiber can handle 5 to 10 Watts, and 50/125 fiber can handle
10 to 20 Watts. For best repeatability and stability, FC
connectors are recommended for the fiber couplers and
collimators. Pigtail style couplers and collimators are also
recommended.
By choosing different focal lengths for the collimating and
Powell lenses, different line widths and fan angles are
possible. Standard line widths for singlemode fibers are
0.8mm and 1.2mm. Standard fan angles are 10, 30 and 45
degrees. Contact OZ Optics for further information on
available line widths and fan angles.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
DTS0014
Part Number
Description
HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH
Laser to fiber coupler with a connector receptacle.
FMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L
Singlemode or multimode fiber optic patchcord.
FOLM-2X-W-F-f-FA
Fiber optic line generator.
START-0X-V-WR
Alignment kit for singlemode laser to fiber couplers with receptacles (V refers to the video
format. Specify NTSC for North American format, PAL for European PAL format).
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
22-Feb-05
Where:
X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style couplers and collimators. For fiber optic
patchcords they refer to the male connectors on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905 connectors, etc. See table
1 below.),
W is the operating wavelength in nm,
a,b are the fiber core and cladding sizes, respectively, in microns. Available sizes include 4/125, 10/125, 25/125, 50/125,
and 100/140,
F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fibers, QS for fused
silica core singlemode, QM for fused silica multimode, QP for fused silica polarization maintaining fibers. 10/125 fiber is
considered to be singlemode fiber. It is constructed with a fused silica core.),
f is the lens focal length, in mm, and type of lens being used. The following achromatic lenses are available: 3.5AC, 6AC,
and 10AC,
JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A
for 5mm armored cable.),
L is the fiber length in meters,
LH is the laser head adapter number for the laser to fiber couplers (See table 2 below.),
FA is the fan angle of the laser line from the line marker. Fan angles of 10°, 30°, or 45° are available .
WR is wavelength range, IRVIS for 400-1600nm, UVVIS for 180-700nm.
When ordering the delivery system please specify the source laser beam characteristics (beam diameter, divergence angle,
laser power, wavelength, and laser head adapter). OZ Optics provides a questionnaire to help you choose the best system
for your application. Please complete it and fax it back before ordering.
CONNECTOR TYPE
CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE NUMBER (X)
2mm OD Ferrule
1.8mm OD Ferrule
AT&T Biconic
Universal Receptacle for connectors with 2.5mm OD ferrules
Standard NTT-FC/PC
Super NTT-FC/PC
Ultra NTT-FC/PC
Angled NTT-FC/PC
Angled NTT-FC/AFC
NEC-D4
SMA905
SMA906
Diamond 3.5mm OD
AT&T-ST®
Super AT&T-ST®
Ultra AT&T-ST®
Diamond HMS-10/HP 2.5mm OD
DIN Standard 2.5mm OD
SC
Angled SC
Ultra SC
No Connector
® ST is a registered trademark of AT&T.
LASER HEAD ADAPTER
1
1.8
2
2.5U
3
3S
3U
3A
3AF
4
5
6
7
8
8S
8U
9
0
SC
SCA
SCU
X
ADAPTER NUMBER (LH)
1"-32 TPI Male Threaded Adapter
1.75" Disk Adapter with 4 holes on corners of 1" square
3/4" - 32TPI Male Threaded Adapter
5/8" - 32TPI Male Threaded Adapter
1/2"-20 TPI Male Threaded Adapter for Amoco lasers
5/8"-24 TPI Male Threaded Adapter
1.75" O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes
1.50" O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes
1.38" O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes
1.25" O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes
Post Mount with 1/4"-20 TPI hole
25mm O.D. Male Adapter for Spindler and Hoyer Optical Bench
Polytec Laser Head Adapter
Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 0.625" square for Lightwave Electronic lasers
1.75" O.D. Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1" square and 1"-32 TPI female thread in the middle
1/2"-40 TPI UNF-2A Male Threaded Adapter
Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 27mm bolt circle Siemens Lasers
5/8"-24 TPI Female Laser Head Adapter for ILT lasers
Disk Adapter with 3 holes on a 2.25" diameter bolt circle for Omnichrome lasers
1.75" Disk Adapter with 4 holes on a 35mm diameter bolt circle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
BAR CODE #
817
830
825
826
824
919
834
938
929
841
835
851
931
800
836
802
850
765
928
837
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
DIFFERENTIAL POLARIZATION DELAY LINES
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Varies the delay between two polarization states
Low loss
Sub-picosecond resolution
Wide wavelength range
±50 psec delay range
Electronically controlled
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
PMD compensation in high speed communications networks
PMD emulation
TDM bit alignment
Interferometric sensors
Coherent telecommunications
Differential Delay Line
Product Description
OZ Optics’ new differential delay line represents the next stage in controlling polarization mode dispersion in optical networks. The device splits the
light within a fiber into orthogonal polarizations, and then actively varies the time that one polarization travels compared to the other
polarization before combining the two polarizations together again. With this technique, one can introduce up to ±50 picoseconds of optical delay
in a system. The resolution of the device is better than 0.005 picoseconds, thus providing a high degree of control. The device is easily controlled
by a computer via an RS-232 interface. Home and End position sensors allow easy monitoring of the device status and prevent any potential
damage to the device.
Figure 1: Differential Delay Line Dimensions (inches)
DTS0005
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
04/02
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we
will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so
your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
What delay range (in psec or mm) do you need?
What resolution (in psec or mm) do you need?
Do you need a readout of the position?
What interface do you prefer for device control?
What wavelength will you be using?
What is the worst acceptable return loss?
What kind of fiber connectors are you using?
What size of cable should be used?
How long should the fibers be?
DDL-650-11-W-a/b-S-LB-XY-JD-L -I
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for1550nm)
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
LB = Backreflection level 40, 50 or 60dB
(60dB is available for 1300 and 1550nm only)
X,Y = Connector code: Specify input connector
followed by output connector
X = No connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
I = Interface
PC for base model with no microcontroller
MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface
L: Fiber length in meters, on each side of the
device. If they are different, specify the input and
output fiber lengths separated by a comma.
Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber at the input
and 7 meters at the output, replace the L with 1,7
JD = Fiber jacket type
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
See the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes
LC = LC
LCA = Angled LC
MU = MU
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts:
A customer is building a PDL emulation system to test PDL effects at 1480nm using RS232 control. He needs singlemode fiber pigtails 1 meter
long on each side, and does not need connectors. Because he is fusion splicing, he prefers uncabled fiber.
Part Number
DDL-650-11-1480-9/125-S-60-XX-1-1-MC/RS232
Description
Electrically Controlled Differential Delay Line for 1480nm, with
60dB return loss. Pigtails are 1 meter long 0.9mm OD tight
buffered 9/125 SM fibers, no connectors. Controlled via an
RS232 protocol.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: Is the minimum delay zero picoseconds?
A: Yes. The delay can be positive or negative (ie, one polarization either lagging or leading the other polarization).
Q: Are the units calibrated?
A: Yes. The zero PMD reading is referenced to within ±1psec. All measurements are made relative to this value, with better than 0.002 psec
resolution.
Q: What limits the accuracy of the 0 psec point?
A: Several issues. First, the zero point is determined with a PMD meter, which is limited in its accuracy. Second, the delay introduced by the
device is also affected by how the fiber is coiled or bent during measurement and installation.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
DIGITAL INLINE OPTICAL POWER MONITOR/METER
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low insertion loss
Continuous fiber. No interruptions to optical path
Display units are interchangeable
Wide dynamic range
High power handling
Polarization maintaining (PM) fiber versions available
Rugged and compact design
Long battery life
Automatic shut off
RS-232 interface option available
Analog output option available
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical power control devices
Channel balancing for WDM systems
Dynamic optical amplifier gain monitoring
Power monitoring
Network monitoring
Real time in-line test and measurement
Network installation
Fiber optic sensor
Y
AR T
N
I
IM HEE
L
S
E
PR ATA
D
Inline Optical Power Monitor/ Meter With Digital Display
Product Description:
Using a new, patent pending process, OZ Optics, as part of its new series
of inline optical power monitors and tap couplers, now offers a digital inline
optical power monitor (for more details about OEM optical power monitors,
see the "Inline Optical Taps and Monitors" data sheet). Based on a
groundbreaking new fabrication process, these all-fiber taps and monitors
provide a way to easily measure the average signal intensity through an
optical fiber via tapped light channeled into a built-in photodiode, without
interrupting the traffic. The photodiode produces a signal proportional to the
optical power traveling through the fiber with high directivity.
The OPM-200 product integrates a novel inline optical tap with a low noise
InGaAs detector in combination with a high dynamic range logarithmic
amplifier. The built-in microcontroller processes and displays the power
transmitted through the selected fiber channel on an LCD display.
Inline Optical Power Monitor/Meter
With Manually Variable Attenuator
The optical tap modules and display units are independently calibrated, so
any display unit can be plugged into any tap module and the measured
power will be automatically calibrated. A low voltage circuitry design
ensures a long lifetime for the built-in battery.
The detector module can be calibrated for either a single wavelength or for
a broad wavelength range. Optional, RS-232 and analog outputs are also
available.
The OPM-200 is ideal for network monitoring, out of specification alarms,
and/or DWDM systems for real time monitoring and feedback. Our inline
taps are highly directional and ideal for monitoring traffic traveling in one
direction only. It may also be used for measuring return losses instead of
transmitted power. In the same product family, OZ Optics now provides
OEM single channel optical power monitors and multi-channel power
monitors for DWDM system integration.
DTS0052
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Inline Optical Power Monitor/Meter:
Detector Unit And Plug
01/19/04
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
Although we strongly recommend the purchase of our standard products, OZ Optics also welcomes the opportunity to provide custom-designed
products to meet your application requirements. There can be a difference in the pricing for a custom-designed device or part compared to our
standard parts list. Please consider the following points when reviewing your quotation:
Additional time is required to prepare a comprehensive quotation.
Lead times are usually longer than normal.
Non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges and lot charges may apply.
A five part minimum order is necessary.
•
•
•
•
These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so you can make a well-informed decision.
Questionnaire for Custom Parts:
1. What is your operating wavelength range?
2. Do you need a single calibration wavelength or calibration across the entire wavelength range?
3. Do you need standard singlemode fiber or polarization maintaining fiber?
4. What is the expected optical power through the fiber, or what tap ratio do you need?
5. Do you need the ends of the fiber connectorized? What type of connector do you need?
6. How long should each end of the fiber be?
7. Do you need the fiber cabled? What cable size do you need?
8. Do you need a display? Do you need it with analog output? RS-232, or with both analog and RS-232?
Description
Kit: Detector Module With Display unit:
Part Number
OPM-200-W-a/b-F-XY-J -L(-C)
W: Calibrated Wavelength in nm: 980, 1310, 1480, 1550 or
1620 for single wavelength calibration and 1290/1620 for
broad spectral calibration
a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm:
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber.
6/125 for 980/1064nm SM fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PM Fiber
F: Fiber type S: Singlemode
P: Polarization maintaining fiber
X,Y:
C: Communication interface:
Leave empty for no interface
A = Analog voltage interface
S232 = RS-232 communication interface
A/RS232= For both Analog and RS-232
L: Fiber Length in meters for each side
J: Jacket size:
1= 1mm OD loose tube Jacket
3= 3mm OD PVC cable
Connector code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
8 = AT&T-ST
LC=LC
MU=MU
4
Description
Part Number
OPM-200-W-a/b-F-XY-J -L-DET
Detector Module:
W: Calibrated Wavelength in nm: 980, 1310, 1480, 1550 or
1620 for single wavelength calibration and 1290/1620 for
broad spectral calibration
L: Fiber Length in meters for each side
J:: Jacket size: 1= 1mm OD loose tube jacket
3= 3mm OD PVC cable
a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm:
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber.
6/125 for 980/1064 nm SM fiber
8/125 for 1550 nm PM Fiber
X,Y:
Connector code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
8 = AT&T-ST
LC=LC
MU=MU
PS:
Power supply plug (only required
if a communication interface is ordered)
NA = North America
EU = Europe
UK = United Kingdom
F: Fiber type S: Singlemode
P: Polarization maintaining fiber
Description
Part Number
OPM-200(-C)(-PS)
Display unit:
C:
Communication interface:
Leave empty for no interface (standard)
A = Analog voltage interface
RS232 = RS-232 communication interface
A/RS232= For both analog and RS-232
Ordering Example For Custom Parts:
A North American DWDM manufacturer wants to measure the IL at wavelengths across a broad spectral range through an RS-232
communication interface. The manufacturer needs to order the following parts:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
20070
OPM-200-1290/1620-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-DET Inline tap detector module calibrated from 1290 to 1620nm. The fiber is 1m long
on each side, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 micron singlemode fiber with Ultra FC/PC
connectors on both ends.
20069
OPM-200-RS232-NA
Optical Power Monitor display unit with RS232 interface. Battery and AC
powered. RS-232 cable, 5V AC/DC North American power supply and right angle
detector interface plug are included.
Figure 2: Detector Unit Mechanical Dimension (inches) [mm]
5
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
DIGITAL TUNABLE FILTERS
Features:
• Narrow linewidth
• Polarization insensitive
• Wide wavelength range
• Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining fiber versions
• High resolution
• Built in computer RS232 interface
• GPIB/RS232 converter available
Applications:
• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM)
• Tunable sources
• Spectral analysis
• Quality control and measurement
• Product development
• Fiber optic component manufacturing
• Automated testing
Product Description:
Digital Tunable Filter
Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an adjustable narrow
bandpass filter, and a focusing optical assembly to collect the light again. Tunable
filters are available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, a motor
driven version for OEM applications, and a digital version.
The digital tunable filter is a hand held unit with a keypad, display, and computer
interface. The device works on the principle that by adjusting the angle of
incidence between the filter and the incident beam one controls the wavelength at
which the filter transmits. The digital version is calibrated such that the user
directly enters the wavelength to transmit via the keypad or remotely, through the
computer interface. An RS232 interface with cable is standard with GPIB to
RS232 converter offered as an optional accessory.
GPIB/RS232 Converter
Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum
(FWHM). The standard filter used in tunable filters has a smooth, rounded
transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A
Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer
of some thickness. Other filter profiles are available. For instance, flat top
bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the
number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the outof-band rejection level. For more information on custom filters please contact OZ
Optics.
OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization
Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL to below 0.3dB, while at
the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature
makes it ideal for today's DWDM system applications.
Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM)
fibers are offered.In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based
on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components
and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber
structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact
our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer
supplied fibers to build devices.
Figure 1: Digital Tunable Filter Layout
DTS0006
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
06/02
1
SAMPLE TEST DATA FOR TUNABLE FILTERS
Wavelength (nm)
PDL (dB)
1520.04
0.30
1530.00
0.20
1539.96
0.10
1550.04
0.15
1560.00
0.30
1569.96
0.30
Figure 2: Typical Transmission Curve For 1.2nm C-Band Tunable Filters
Standard Product Specifications:
Power Supply:
Computer Interface:
Resolution:
Tuning Range:
Wavelength Range:
Linewidth: (FWHM):
Wavelength/Temperature
Sensitivity
PDL:
Insertion Loss:
Standard
Wavelength
Ranges:
Power Handling:
Response Time:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Repeatability
Universal 110/220 Volt AC/DC adapter. Removable North American power cord included. Other power cords
available as accessories.
RS232. External GPIB-RS232 adapters available.
Typically less than 0.1nm
50nm
1520-1570 (C-band), 1570-1620 (L-band) and 1470-1520 (S-band) standard. Other ranges available on request.
1.1 ±0.1nm standard. As narrow as 0.3nm is available as an option.
Typically less than 0.002nm/°C
Typically less than 0.3dB
Typically less than 2.5dB for complete device over full tuning range.
S, C and L bands: 1470-1520nm, 1520-1570nm and 1570-1620nm
Up to 200mW for standard package.
50nm change in less than 1 sec. 1nm change in less than 0.1 sec.
5.9 x 3.2 x 1.8 inches (150 x 81 x 46mm)
1lb (450g) (not including protective boot)
Typically better than 0.2nm
2
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A customer in Europe wants to use a broadband source as a tunable source in order to test the spectral characteristics of optical components at
different wavelengths. Both the light source and components have FC/PC receptacles and the wavelength region of interest for the components
is throughout the C-band. The broadband source is polarized randomly and therefore the tunable source required should be polarization
insensitive. The customer would like to be able to adjust the wavelength at the workstation as well as remotely from a computer. He is using a
GPIB control interface.
The component required for this application is a polarization insensitive digital tunable filter. With this unit connected to the broadband light source
and by directly entering the wavelength to transmit via the keypad or remotely, through the computer interface, the transmitted wavelength from
the broadband source can be tuned from 1520 to 1570nm.
Bar Code
10176
Part Number
TF-100-3S3S-1520/1570-9/125-S-40-1.2
4572
4571
2737
GPIB-RS232
GPIB-CABLE-2
POWER CORD-EUROPE
Description
Polarization insensitive digital tunable filter for 1520-1570nm 9/125 SM fiber with
40dB return loss, super FC/PC receptacles and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter.
GPIB/RS232 Converter
GPIB cable, 2m long
Power Cord - European 4mm Round Pin
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation,
so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
What wavelength range are you interested in?
2.
What linewidth do you require?
3.
What type of transmission profile do you require?
4.
What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM?
5.
Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source?
6.
What return losses are acceptable in your system?
7.
What connector type are you using?
TF-100-XY-W-a/b-F-LB-LW
X,Y = Input & Output Connector codes:
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
LCA=Angled LCA
LW = Linewidth in nm:
Standard filter is Fabry Perot. For a flat top
profile filter, add the letter F to the end of the
number.
LB = Backreflection Level:
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or
polarization maintaining fibers only
(60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength
ranges only)
35dB for multimode fibers
W = Wavelength range in nanometers:
Example: 1520/1570
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns:
9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF 28 fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
F = Fiber type:
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
P=Polarization Maintaining
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
Example 1:
A customer in North America has a specialty polarized light source between the C and L bands and wants to use it as a tunable source while
maintaining the extinction ratio. The source is used between 1550 and 1600nm and is pigtailed with a super FC/PC connector.
A custom version of the digital tunable filter with a narrow linewidth made for PM fiber will meet this requirement custom filter.
Part Number
TF-100-3S3S-1550/1600-8/125-P-40-0.3
Description
Polarization maintaining digital tunable filter for 1550-1600nm 8/125 PM fiber
with 40dB return loss, super FC/PC receptacles and a custom 0.3nm FWHM
Fabry Perot filter.
4
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: What is the filter linewidth?
A: The standard filter is a 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. This can be customized to suit the customer's requirements.
Q: How do you define your linewidths?
A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This is the transmitted line width at -3dB from the peak transmission.
For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified.
Q: What is the largest tuning range available?
A: The standard tuning range is 50nm, however the filters can be made operational for a 100nm tuning range with some effects on the linewidth
and insertion loss in the lower wavelength (high angle of incidence) region.
Q: What is a Fabry Perot filter? Are there other types available?
A: A Fabry Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot
cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting the spacer thickness one can adjust
the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available. For example, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple
cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level.
For more information on what custom are filters available please contact OZ Optics.
Q: Is the shape of the transmission curve affected by polarization?
A: No, OZ Optics tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This design reduces PDL to minimal
levels, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive.
Q: How well does the filter block unwanted wavelengths?
A: For standard single cavity filters the typical line width at -20dB is ~10nm. This type of filter is good for selecting specific channels in a DWDM
system or cleaning up the ASE noise from a broadband source. The filter may transmit light at specific wavelengths significantly outside the
operating wavelength range For custom applications requiring different out-of-band isolation please contact OZ Optics.
Q: What linewidth do I need in a 200GHz DWDM system? 100GHz? 50GHz?
A: Typical linewidths associated with these frequencies are 1.2, 0.8 and 0.3nm respectively. This ultimately depends on the channel width and
isolation levels required for the system in question, OZ Optics can work with you to build the filter that best suites your requirements.
Q: Is the unit calibrated?
A: YES, the Digital Tunable Filter uses a stepper-motor which is calibrated to give the desired wavelength within the specified wavelength range
of the unit.
Q: Does the device operate at 220V as well as 110V?
A: Yes, the universal power adapter works for both voltages but you have to use the appropriate power cord. A North American style power cord
is included with the unit. Other types of power cords may be ordered separately.
Application Notes:
Introduction:
OZ Optics' family of hand-held test equipment includes the Digital Tunable Filter for transmission of a well-defined band of light. Wavelength
selection is controlled by angle of incidence of a collimated beam to a bandpass filter. Control of angle is accomplished with a micro-controlled
stepper motor geared for an optimal balance of speed and resolution.
The OZ Digital Tunable Filter TF-100 system includes the handheld unit with impact-absorbing blue rubber boot, RS-232 cable, AC/DC power
supply with cord.
Introduction To Thin Film Filters:
In many fiber-optic applications we need to use light with a specific frequency or wavelength (l). Although a laser may be an excellent source of
monochromatic radiation, we might need a source of light providing controlled, variable wavelength. Bandpass filters provide an effective means
of transmitting a well-defined band of light while blocking unwanted wavelengths emanating from a broadband source.
OZ Optics' Tunable Filter uses a narrow wavelength bandpass filter. With increased angle of incidence, the filter transmits light of decreased
wavelength (Figure 3)
5
Figure 3. Conceptual design of a tunable filter.
Application Notes:
(cont’d)
The typical output wavelength distribution is demonstrated in Figure 4.
tunable
filter
Figure 4: Use of a broadband source and a tunable filter to create a narrow-band signal.
The main problem with typical tunable filters that has been solved by OZ Optics is their polarization sensitivity. As the angle of incidence
increases, the sensitivity to polarized light also increases. (See Figure 5) This is a very important point in optical systems as the separation of the
S and P polarizations causing large PDL can have detrimental affects on the system.
Figure 5: Differences in spectral width and attenuation between
"P" and "S" polarized light.
OZ Optics' tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control PDL making the spectral response polarization insensitive. The polarization
insensitivity is accomplished through the precision alignment of optical components on both the input and output side of the filter. As
demonstrated in Figure 6. below, the light is first split into its respective polarizations and then one of the polarizations is rotated such that the
light incident on the filter is all the samepolarization. After passing through the filter the other poliarization is rotated and then the beams are
combined for the final focusing and collection into the fiber. By rotating the light and having a common polarization pass through the filters the
PDL effect of the filter at high angles of incidence is avoided.Therefore, the spectral response of S and P polarizations remain the same for
increasing angles of incidence. See figure 7.
Figure 6: A perspective sketch showing the splitting and recombining of the polarizations in a tunable filter.
Figure 7: "S" and "P" polarized output light at a high
angle of incidence in the OZ Optics filter.
6
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
DIGITAL VARIABLE ATTENUATOR
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CE Compliant
High power handling (up to 2 watts)
High speed
Wide attenuation range
Low PDL and wavelength dependency
Low insertion loss and backreflection
High resolution
Rugged and compact design
Calibrated for dual wavelengths, (1300-1550nm) or calibrated for
C and L bands. It can also be calibrated for up to four individual
wavelengths
Wide wavelength range
Wide range of receptacles
Blocking technique for singlemode; neutral density filter technique for
multimode fiber applications
Computer interface
Polarization maintaining fiber versions are available.
Digital Variable Attenuator
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bit error testing
Trouble shooting receivers and other active fiber optic components
Simulating long distance fiber transmission
Design of fiber optic transmitter/receiver circuitry
Power meter linearity checks
Power setting
Product Description:
OZ Optics offers a compact, rugged and low cost digital attenuator with high
resolution, high speed, high attenuation range and high power handling (blocking
technique only). OZ Optics' digital attenuator is a hand held unit, CE approved. These
attenuators have low insertion loss, low backreflection, low PDL and flat
RS-232 GPIB Interface
wavelength response. These units can be calibrated for up to 4 wavelengths, for C or
L bands. Alternatively the unit can be calibrated for a continuous range. By using interpolation between the calibration wavelengths, the unit is
capable of providing accurate attenuation levels over a continuous, broad range of wavelengths.
OZ Optics' digital attenuators are ideal for use in bit error rate testing, troubleshooting receivers and other active fiber optic components, power
meter linearity checks, simulating long distance fiber transmission and power setting. A computer interface allows users to access or remotely
control the unit through a PC.
OZ Optics provides digital attenuators that use either singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber. In general, OZ Optics uses
polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However
OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales
department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
DTS0007
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
04/02
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 5 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
How much power will be transmitted through the attenuator?
What type of fiber do you wish to use?
What is the worst acceptable return loss?
Will this attenuator be used in Europe or in the United Kingdom?
Are there any special performance requirements that you need to meet?
What wavelengths do you want the attenuator calibrated at?
Digital Variable Attenuator:
DA-100-X-W-a/b-F-LB
X = Connector code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See the standard tables data sheet for
other connectors
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers:
Example: 1300/1550 for standard telecom
wavelength range
Note 1:
LB = Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB
for singlemode fibers,35dB for MM fibers
F = Fiber type:
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
P=Polarization Maintaining
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber.
See the standard tables data sheet for
other standard fiber sizes
For low insertion loss attenuators add "-LL" to the end of the part number.
LL ≤ 0.6dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL ≤ 1dB for rest of the attenuators
To handle continuous power levels above 500mW, add -HP to the end of the part number. Maximum continuous power level should
not exceed 2 watts.
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A customer wants to order a digital attenuator to be calibrated at 1300nm and 1550nm, using singlemode fiber and FC receptacles with 50dB
back reflection and ≤ 1dB insertion loss. The part number should be: DA-100-3U-1300/1550-9/125-S-50-LL
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: What advantages or disadvantages does the beam blocking version have over the neutral density versions.
A: The beam blocking technique is naturally suited for high power applications, and can achieve greater attenuation levels. The neutral density
version shows less mode dependence or modal noise in multimode applications.
Q: What do you mean by mode dependence and modal noise?
A: The term multimode means there is more than one path for light to travel inside a single fiber. These paths are known as modes. It does
not mean the unit consists of multiple fibers in a bundle. When coherent laser light is coupled into multimode fiber, the output shows
speckles. Bending the fiber causes the speckle pattern to change. If the losses in a system depend on which modes are excited, then
changing the modes excited in the fiber changes the output power. This is known as modal noise. If the source being used is an LED,
then one does not see speckles, and modal noise is not an issue. However, for laser sources, modal noise is an issue.
When blocking style attenuators are used with multimode fiber, some modes are blocked, while others are transmitted. This can produce 1dB
or greater modal noise fluctuations with coherent sources. A variable attenuator using a neutral density filter is not as strongly affected by
modal noise. However, neutral density filter attenuators offer lower attenuation range (around 40dB) and can only handle about 50mW of
power.
Q: What are the standard numerical apertures (NA) for the fibers used in your attenuators? Should I specify the NA of the fiber when I'm
ordering an attenuator?
A: Please see our standard tables for detailed information on our fibers. If you want to use fiber that hasn't been specified in the standard
tables then you should specify it while ordering.
Q: I ordered an attenuator with 60dB return loss but when I measured it my return losses are higher. Why?
A: If you ordered an attenuator with 60dB return loss with connectors, the back reflection will depend on what grade of connector you selected
for your fibers. Typically only angle polished (APC) style connectors will give the desired return losses. The device itself has 60dB return
loss (i.e. if you cut off the connectors and measured the return loss you will see it above 60dB) but if you picked only ultra PC finish
connectors you may only see from 50 to 55dB return losses.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
DIGITAL VARIABLE REFLECTOR
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High speed
Wide reflectance range
Low insertion loss
High resolution
Rugged and compact design
Can be calibrated for dual wavelengths
Wide wavelength range
Wide range of connectors
Polarization insensitive
RS232 communications interface
Low cost
CE compliant
Applications:
• Bit error rate testing
• Troubleshooting receivers and other active fiber optic components
• Design of fiber optic transmitter/receiver circuitry
Digital Variable Reflector
Product Description:
OZ Optics’ Digital Variable Reflector enables the user to generate a known level of return loss
to evaluate system response. The unit allows testing the return loss sensitivity of devices such
as laser diodes, transmitters, isolators and so on. By generating a precise reflection level,
system performance (bit error rate, noise levels, isolator performance) can be evaluated. Our
built-in calibration table accurately defines intermediate degrees of reflection from 2dB to as
high as 60dB for different wavelengths.
Digital reflectors are offered using either singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining
(PM) fibers. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA
fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However
OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some
alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
Optional GPIB To RS-232 Converter
For best results, the standard parts are designed to accept angled FC/PC connectors. Other
connector types are possible with lower dynamic reflectance range.
The device can be controlled remotely via an RS232 interface. An optional GPIB to RS232
converter is also available. A universal AC/DC power supply is included with all units, along
with a North American power cord. Other types of power cords may be purchased separately.
The Digital Variable Reflector can be provided with a custom built-in fused coupler which
directs a fraction of the reflected light to a second optical connector on the unit. The user can
use this signal for monitoring the reflected power, or determining the influence of reflected
power on his device under test.
Contact OZ Optics for details.
DTS0008
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
04/02
1
Digital Variable Reflector:
DR-100-X-W-a/b-F-LB
XY = Connector Code :
LB = Backreflection range:
3S= Super NTT-FC/PC
3U= Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle
3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
8= AT&T-ST
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or
PM fibers
60dB backreflection is available
for 1310nm and 1550nm
singlemode only with FC/APC
connectors
35dB for multimode fibers
F = Fiber type:
W = Wavelength in nm:
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
P= Polarization maintaining (PM) fiber
980, 1310, 1480,1550 and 1625
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns.
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A customer would like to emulate the anticipated backreflection from different types of devices by using a variable reflector. If his system is
operating at a wavelength of 980 nm and he is using an SCA connector, then he could order the following part to perform the required testing:
Bar Code
N/A
Part Number
DR-100-SCA-980-6/125-S-40
Description
Singlemode Digital Variable Reflector with 40dB dynamic range calibrated at 980nm with
angled SC connector.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: What is a variable reflector used for?
A: A variable reflector is useful for emulating the reflectance that normally occurs from all optical interfaces within fiber optic systems. This
allows a designer to test a prototype quickly and easily to determine if its operation will be adversely affected by unexpected backreflection.
Q: Can it be used at wavelengths for which it is not calibrated?
A: Sometimes. Since the wavelength response of the Digital Variable Reflector is fairly flat, it can be used at other wavelengths without
noticeable degradation, if the wavelength is within a few tens of nanometers of the calibrated values. If the wavelength is significantly
different than the calibrated value, then the insertion losses will increase and the overall backreflection will deviate somewhat from the
displayed value.
Q: How do I get the unit calibrated?
A: OZ Optics recommends that the unit be returned to the factory annually for calibration.
Q: Why is the power rating for a multimode unit different than that of a singlemode unit?
A: Singlemode units use a beam blocking technique that can handle significant power levels. Multimode units use a variable neutral density
filter. The power handling of the multimode unit is limited by the power handling capabilities of the filter.
Q: Why do singlemode devices use a different technique than multimode units?
A: With singlemode units, the beam blocking technique is simple, repeatable, and cost effective. With multimode units, the fiber can support
many different modes. These mode patterns tend to be susceptible to any changes in the fiber due to applied stresses or temperature
variations. The beam blocking technique does not work well in such situations because it will not block all possible modes equally. Hence, a
variable filter is used instead.
Application Notes:
If a coherent light source is used in an application where a variable reflector will also be used, then the user may observe the effects of
constructive or destructive interference as the reflected light returns to the source. This may cause instabilities in the source or measurements
that might or might not be a problem in a "real" application. There are a couple of ways of getting around this problem:
1.
2.
3.
If possible, replace the source with a non-coherent source. LED sources are relatively non-coherent and may be used
successfully in some situations, although their power output is generally less than that of a laser.
By inserting a spool of fiber between the system under test and the variable reflector, the coherence of the light will be
greatly diminished.
Use a source with a built-in isolator to block any reflections before they reach the source.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
DUAL WAVELENGTH LED SOURCE
Features:
• Rugged, compact, lightweight, dual wavelength LED source
• 850, 1300, and 1550 nm wavelengths available
• Long term stability
• Low temperature dependence
• Selectable internal modulation for CW, 270 Hz, 1 kHz, or 2 kHz
• Auto power-down mode
• Push-and-hold power keys to prevent accidental activation
• Low battery indicator
• Long battery life
• May be operated from AC power mains with optional adaptor
• Dust caps attached to the case
• Low cost
Applications:
• Installing and maintaining fiber optic networks
• Testing multimode fiber cables
• Testing passive optical components
• Verifying patchcord specifications
• Measuring insertion loss
• Calibrating optical receivers
• Laboratory research
Dual LED Source
Product Description:
The OZ Optics Dual Wavelength LED Source consists of two sources in a single, lightweight package, and is ideal for multimode fiber testing.
Either one of the two outputs can be activated from the front panel. The user interface is controlled by a microprocessor and the optical outputs
are thermally stabilized.
Indicator LEDs and simple keys on the front panel provide easy operation. Two LEDs indicate the wavelength. Three LEDs indicate the modulation
frequency: 270 Hz, 1kHz, or 2 kHz. When all of these three LEDs are off, the output is continuous. The front panel keys are used to select on,
off, modulation, and wavelength.
Figure 1: Stability Of Dual LED Source At 850 nm
DTS0009
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
06/02
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
1. A customer in the USA needs an 850 and 1300 nm dual wavelength LED source, with FC/PC receptacles. He also wants an AC power supply
adaptor.
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
11441
DLEDS-850/3-1300/3
Dual LED Source with 850 and 1300 nm wavelengths, receptacles for Standard
Flat, Super and Ultra NTT-FC/PC.
11147
AC-5VDC-NA
5 VDC power supply adaptor, for North America.
2. A customer in Europe needs a 1300 and 1550 nm dual wavelength LED source, with an SC receptacle. He also wants an AC power supply
adaptor.
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
13572
DLEDS-1300/SC-1550/SC
Dual LED Source with 1300 and 1550 nm wavelengths, SC receptacles.
12388
AC-5VDC-EU
5 VDC power supply adaptor, for Europe.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 5 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
What are the wavelengths required for the LED sources?
2.
What is required maximum output power of each LED source?
3.
What type of receptacles are required for each LED source?
DLEDS-W1/X1-W2/X2
Dual LED Source
W1,W2 = LED source wavelength in nm(W1< W2 ):
850 = 850nm
1300 = 1300nm
1550 = 1550nm
X1,X2 = Connector receptacle:
3 = Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
1.25U = Universal receptacle for
1.25 mm diameter ferrule
connectors (MU, LC, etc.)
2.5U = Universal receptacle for
2.5 mm diameter ferrule connectors
(FC, ST, SC, etc.)
Contact OZ Optics Limited for custom
requirements.
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A customer in North America needs an 850/1300 nm dual wavelength LED source, with an ST receptacle on the 850nm source, and an FC
connector on the 1300nm source. He also wants an AC adaptor.
Bar Code
N/A
11147
Part Number
Description
DLEDS-850/8-1300/3
Dual LED Source with an 850nm LED, ST receptacle, and a 1300nm source with a receptacle for
Standard, Super, and Ultra NTT-FC/PC connectors.
AC-5VDC-NA
5 VDC power supply and adaptor for North America.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATOR
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stepper motor driven
High power handling
High speed
Wide attenuation range
Low PDL and wavelength dependency
Low insertion loss and backreflection
High resolution
Rugged and compact design
Can be calibrated for up to five wavelengths
Wide wavelength range
Flat wavelength response
Blocking attenuation technique for singlemode and polarization maintaining
fibers, neutral density filter for multimode fiber applications
Computer interface (-MC Version)
Polarization maintaining fiber versions are available.
Latching operation
Custom designs available
Low Cost
•
•
•
•
•
Motor Driven Variable Attenuator
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Active gain equalization in DWDM Systems
Local power monitoring and feedback attenuator settings
Bit error testing
Trouble shooting receivers and other active fiber optic components
Simulating long distance fiber transmission
Design of fiber optic transmitter/receiver circuitry
Power meter linearity checks
Power setting and power control
OEM Motorized Attenuator
Product Description
OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable motor driven
variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators offer excellent speed,
repeatability, and accuracy. Singlemode and polarization maintaining (PM) attenuators
utilize a novel blocking style attenuation technique, while multimode attenuators use a
variable neutral density filter to minimize mode dependent losses. Both types feature a
homing sensor to calibrate the attenuator, removing the need to use external taps, and a
jam-proof tuning mechanism.
In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber
structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However
OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some
alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If
necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
Loopback Style Motorized Attenuator
The PC version uses a reliable stepper motor that can be controlled by an external driver. The basic model provides the user direct access to the
stepper motor, as well as a logic level output for HOME position information. The -DR option adds a high speed driver circuit that accepts four logic
level inputs to control the stepper motor. Finally, the -MC option features an embedded microcontroller with a programmed calibration curve. The
units are addressable and support RS232, SPI, or I²C communication protocols. At this time, electronically controlled miniature loopback models are
available only in PC versions.
The MC version attenuators are calibrated at the wavelength specified in the part number. If required, the attenuators can be calibrated for multiple
wavelengths. Just specify them in the part number.
The standard models utilize a stepped motor with a 485:1 antibacklash gear train. Other gear ratios are available to increase either the speed or
resolution of the device. Keep in mind that choosing lower gear ratios to improve the speed will reduce the resolution of the device.
OZ Optics can also customize the design to fit your needs. We have smaller and faster versions if lower resolution is acceptable. Please read
our application notes on our website. Contact OZ Optics for detailed specifications.
DTS0010
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
07/02
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
What is your application?
What is your operating wavelength?
What is the worst acceptable return loss?
What fiber type do you need? What length?
What connectors, if any, are you using?
Do you have size constraints?
Do you require an inline or loopback version?
Do you have specific speed or resolution requirements? Compared to a standard unit with a 485:1 gear ratio, either of characteristics
can be improved at the expense of the other.
9. What voltage would you like to use to operate the motor? Most users choose 6 volts.
10. Do you want to design and build your own motor control circuitry, or do you want it built into the unit?
11. What optical power level will be used with the attenuator?
12. Will the fiber be subjected to handling once installed, or will it be undisturbed? A 3mm jacket is more rugged than a 900um jacket, but
it takes up more space and is less flexible.
Description
Part Number
Electrically Controlled Variable Fiber
Optic Attenuator
DD-N-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-G-V(-CI)1(-LL)2
N = 100 for inline style
600 for standard size loopback style
650 for miniature size loopback style
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber
See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard Tables
datasheet for other standard fiber sizes
CI = Control Circuit
PC for an OEM assembly without
interface port
DR for built in stepper motor drive
electronics
MC/SP” for intelligent SPI interface
MC/IIC for intelligent I2C interface
MC/RS232 for intelligent RS-232
interface
V = Motor supply voltage: 5,6 or 12 Volt
F = Fiber type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
G = Gear ratio: 485:1 for normal speed,
76:1 for fast speed. Other gear ratios are
141:1, 262:1, 900:1
LB = Backreflection level: 40,50 or 60dB for SM
& PM only. 60dB is available for 1300nm and
1550nm wavelengths only. 35dB for multimode
applications is standard.
L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of
the device Example: To order 1 meter of
fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output,
replace L with 1,7
X,Y = Connector Code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables
datasheet for other connectors
JD = Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
See Table 7 of the OZ Standard Tables for
other jacket sizes
Note 1 Unless specified, the unit will be built as a basic version which provides a TTL compatible home signal.
The DD-600 and DD-650 use the blocking style attenuation technique and are recommended only for singlemode or polarization
maintaining applications.
Note 2 Add LL to the part number for 0.6dB typical insertion losses for 60dB return loss, < 1dB for the rest of the attenuators.
5
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN POLARIZATION CONTROLLER-SCRAMBLER
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Negligible insertion losses
Negligible return losses
Negligible Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL)
>100Hz response speed
Continuous polarization control capability
Low voltage
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Polarization scrambling
Polarization stabilization
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) mitigation
Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) mitigation
PDL and PMD Measurement Systems
Interferometers and Sensors
Electically Driven
Polarization Controller-Scrambler
Product Description:
OZ Optics' Electrically Driven Polarization Controller (EPC) provides
a simple, efficient means to manipulate the state of polarization
within a singlemode fiber. Employing a novel mechanical fiber
squeezing technique, the device is controlled by either three or
four (depending on the model) input voltages that one varies over
a ±5 volt range to provide endless polarization control in a robust,
easy to operate package. The controller's rapid response speed
easily handles changes in polarization caused by the external
environment, and is highly suitable for polarization scrambling for
either averaging PDL effects, or for making PMD or PDL
measurements. Because the fiber within the device is continuous,
all insertion losses, return losses, and PDL effects are limited only
by the fiber itself. This makes it ideal for precise test and
measurement applications.
The polarization controller is available in either a three or four
channel configuration. The three channel system is ideal for
polarization scrambling applications such as for polarization
averaging or PDL measurements. The added redundancy of the
four channel version opens the way to continuous polarization
control, without having to occasionally reset the device when a
controller reaches its limit.
The unique design of the OZ Optics Polarization Controller means
that it does not require any dedicated driver circuitry. There are no
internal voltage multipliers or high voltage signals to worry about.
Thus operation is safe and simple.
Note: All units are in inches.
Figure 1: EPC Drawing
DTS0011
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
03-Mar-05
1
Ordering Example For Standard Parts:
A customer is building a polarization scrambler circuit for PDL testing at 1550 nm. He will use a three stage system with standard
singlemode fiber, and FC connectors.
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
13615
EPC-300-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-3U3U-1-1
Three Channel Polarization Scrambler using standard Corning SMF-28 singlemode
fiber. The input and output fibers are one meter long, with 900 micron diameter loose
tube jacketing, terminated with Ultra FC/PC connectors.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics provides custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do
take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need
additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a one piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in
your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Controller and Scrambling Unit
EPC-A-11-W-a/b-S-XY-JD-L-(C)
A = 300 for 3 stage scrambler
400 for 4 stage controller
(C) = Electrical interface connector
Leave blank for DB-9
PH = 5-pin header
BNC = Female BNC
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers:
Example: 1300/1550 for standard
telecom wavelength range
L = Fiber Length in meters, on each side of the
device. If they are different lengths, specify
the input and output lengths separated by a
comma. Example: To order 1 meter of the
fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output,
replace L with 1,7.
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for Corning SMF-28
Singlemode fiber. See standard tables
for other standard fiber sizes
JD = Fiber jacket type:
1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket
XY = Connector code:
X = No Connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCU = Ultra SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC/PC
See standard tables for other connectors
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
Are you performing polarization scrambling or polarization
controlling?
4.
What type of connectors do you need?
5.
How long should the fibers be?
2.
What is your operating wavelength?
6.
What is the fiber jacket OD?
3.
What type and size of fiber do you want?
7.
What type of electrical interface do you need?
Ordering Example For Custom Parts:
A customer wants a 4-channel polarization controller for 1310 nm wavelength. He wants singlemode fibers, 1 meter long, 900 micron
hytrel jacketing with FC/APC connectors and a 5-pin header electrical interface. He also wants an EPC driver with built-in RS232 for
remote control. He needs to order the following part numbers:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
n/a
EPC-400-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-3A3A-1-1-PH5
Four Channel Polarization Controllers with Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber. Input and
output are 1 m long with 900 micron OD jacket terminated with angled FC connectors.
16361
EPC-DRIVER-04-RS/232
4 Channel EPC Driver/Controller Box featuring a dual mode operation: controller mode
and scrambler mode. DC voltage ranging from -5 to +5V, frequency settable from 1 to
100 Hz and maximum current of 100 mA per channel. Built-in RS-232 provided.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
RY
A
IN EET
M
I
H
EL A S
R
P AT
D
ENVIRONMENTAL OPTICAL TEST SYSTEM
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Long period testing capability for optical passive component reliability
Multiple wavelength configurations
Multiple channel configurations
Optional swept wavelength capability
Flexible and simple user interface
Statistical measurement analysis
Custom configuration designs available
Optional Optical Return Loss (ORL) capability
Optional Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurement capability
Low cost
Environmental Optical Test System
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DWDM channel testing
Long term reliability testing on optical passive components
Characterization of insertion loss versus wavelength dependence
Optical return loss measurement
Characterization of PDL dependence versus wavelength
Product qualification as per Telcordia
Quality Control
Product Description:
OZ Optics has developed an environmental multi channel optical test system allowing fast, low cost, simple and flexible long-term reliability
testing. The system integrates an optimized optoelectronic design (including sources, optical switches and photo-detectors) and robust
system management software. This system allows optical manufacturers to perform automated and flexible long-term testing for compliance
with industry standards such as Telcordia generic requirements (GR-326-CORE, GR-1209-CORE and GR-1221-CORE). The meter offers
the capability of characterizing very low insertion loss (IL) drift. It also offers the optional capability of measuring return loss and polarization
dependent
loss
variations.
Measurement
capability
using
tunable
sources
can
also
be
offered.
The system can be run through any computer operating WindowsTM. The management software has a built in database for data
processing and statistical analysis of multiple sets of measurements. Collected data can be graphically displayed for easy interpretation.
Remote configuration and operation of the unit is possible with the unit via a parallel printer port, a standard serial communication port
(RS232) or General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB).
Ordering Information for Standard Parts :
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
13598
EOTS-100-24-3U3U-1310-1550-9/125-S
24 channels, 1310 and 1550 nm dual source Environmental Optical
Test System with Ultra FC/PC connector in both input and output ports
13599
EOTS-100-12-3U3U-1310-1550-9/125-S
12 channels, 1310 and 1550 nm dual source Environmental Optical
Test System with Ultra FC/PC connector in both input and output ports
2736
Power Cord - UK
Power Cord for the United Kingdom
2737
Power Cord Europe
European Power Cord
Windows™ is a trade mark of Microsoft Corporation
DTS0012
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
04/02
1
EOTS-100-AA-XY-W1-W2 -9/125-S-(OPT)
AA: Number of channels: 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 or 64
OPT: -BR for optional measurement capability
(for 60dB ORL measurements, the connectors have to be
angled FC/PC)
-BR/PDL for optional ORL and PDL capability
-PDL for Optional PDL capability
X,Y: Input & Output Receptacle Code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC connector
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC connector
3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
MU= MU type connector
LC= LC type connector.
Add -T for tunable wavelength source option
W1,W2: Built in sources: 1310, 1550, 1625.
Specify 0000 for external sources
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A European optical passive component R&D facility wants to perform IL and PDL long-term reliability testing of Fiber Bragg
Gratings across the C-band. Assuming they have their own programmable environmental chamber and a computer, they need
to order these following parts:
Bar Code
NA
Part Number
EOTS-100-24-3U3U-0000-1550-9/125-S-PDL
2737
POWER CORD - Europe
Description
24 channels, Environmental Optical Test System with Ultra FC/PC
connector in both input and output ports, with an external
wavelength selectable source across the C-band, a built-in 1550nm
source and PDL measurement capability
European power cord
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Q: How many channels can be ordered in a single unit?
A: 8,12,16,24, 32 or 64.
Q: Can I order a custom system?
A: Yes, the design is customer oriented in both software and hardware.
Q: Can I use the system without an external computer?
A: No, an external computer with a suitable Windows operating system is required to operate with the unit
Q: Can we export saved data to another computer for data analysis?
A: Yes, the data can be saved in text format so that it can be easily imported to a standard spreadsheet or statistical software.
Q: Can I test a 1 by 4 device using a 24 channel system without cycling through all ports?
A: Yes, a flexible user interface allows the system to be configured for a variety of operating conditions.
Q: Can I use the test system with polarization maintaining or multimode fibers?
A: Yes the system can be used with polarization maintaining fibers although it will not maintain polarization itself, but not for multimode fiber
because the inputs have singlemode fibers
Q: Can I use my own source for testing?
A: The standard system is provided with built-in sources. Ask OZ about custom configurations.
Q: Can I monitor other parameters, such as external voltages, temperature, humidity, etc.?
A: No, these parameters are external to our system. However, if the environmental chamber can provide such parameters, the
application software can be configured to monitor those parameters during the test.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
ERBIUM-DOPED FIBER AMPLIFIER (EDFA)
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 28 dBm (700 mW) output power
C-band, L-band and C+L-band models
Near quantum-limited noise figure preamplifiers
Wide selection of different type of amplifiers
Optional RS232 or USB interface
Pre
High performance-to-cost ratio
lim
Multi-Output Option-up to 4 ports
ina
ry
Custom design flexibility
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
Analog and digital CATV optical transmission networks
Long-Haul transmission
Access Networks
Instrumentation
Research and Development
Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
Product Description:
Erbium-doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA) are devices which provide
amplification to low-level optical signals. The Rack Mount EDFA
series of high performance, low noise and high output power
amplifiers provide the perfect opportunity to build a flexible CATV
network system. These units include a wide selection of Boosters,
Pre-amplifiers, In-Line, Mid-Stage access and Gain-Flattened
amplifiers. These EDFAs are available in both single channel and
DWDM configurations.
Amplifiers are available to cover the C-band, L-band, or both the C
& L bands together. A range of output powers are available. EDFAs
are available with either a flattened spectral output for stringent
DTS0107
applications, or a non-flattened response for less demanding or
cost-sensitive applications. The user can control the optical gain to
suit the application.
Fiber amplifiers are connected to the system through input and
output female connector receptacles. A variety of standard
connector types are offered. Custom connectors can also be
accommodated. A built-in microprocessor can be included for
applications that require the amplifier to operate under computer
control. Either RS-232 or USB interfaces are offered.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
22-Mar-05
1
Ordering Information For Standard Parts
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
OFA-1-B-12-1525/1570-1-N-3A-B-X
Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 12 dBm output power for the C band
(1525 - 1570 nm), in a bench top unit with angled FC/PC receptacles. The spectral response is
not flattened. Universal power supply with North American power cord included. Other types of
power cords available separately.
TBD
OFA-1-B-28-1525/1570-1-N-3A-B-X
Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 28 dBm output power for the C band
(1525 - 1570 nm), in a bench top unit with FC receptacles. The spectral response is not flattened.
Universal power supply with North American power cord included. Other types of power cords
available separately.
2737
POWER CORD - EUROPE
Power cord for European 4mm round pin plug to IEC connection.
2736
POWER CORD - UK
Power cord for UK plug to IEC connection.
TBD
Typical Specifications For C-band Amplifiers
Parameters
Saturated output power 1
Unit
dBm
Booster amplifier
Pre-amplifier
In-Line amplifier
Mid-access
amplifier
Gain-Flattened
amplifier
14-28
14-17
14-20
14-24
12-24
1525–1565
1525-1565
1540-1565
1525-1565
1540-1565
1528-1565
1540-1565
1528-1563
1542-1561
Operating wavelength range
nm
Noise figure 2
dB
<4.0
<3.2
<3.6
<4.5
<4.5
dB
Up to 40
Up to 40
Up to 43
12-34
16-32
Small signal
gain 3
Gain flatness
dB
1.0-1.5
PDL (maximum)
dB
0.2
0.3
0.25
PMD (maximum)
ps
0.2
0.3
0.3
Operating temperature range
°C
0 to +50
0 to +50
0 to +50
0 to +50
0 to +50
Storage temperature range
°C
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
Humidity 4
%
0 to 95
0 to 95
0 to 95
0 to 95
0 to 95
1
Pin = -4 dBm for Booster, Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. Pin determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access and Gain
Flattened amplifiers
2 P = -4 dBm for Booster, P = -20 dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access
in
in
in
and Gain Flattened amplifiers
3 P = -20 dBm for Booster, P = -30dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access
in
in
in
and Gain Flattened amplifiers
4 Non-condensing
Typical Specifications For L-band Amplifiers
Unit
Booster amplifier
Pre-amplifier
In-Line amplifier
Mid-access
amplifier
Gain-Flattened
amplifier
dBm
14-26
14-17
14-21
14-22
12-24
nm
1565–1610
1565–1610
1565–1610
1570–1605
1570–1603
dB
<5.5
<5.0
<5.5
<5.8
<5.5
Small signal gain 3
dB
Up to 30
Up to 24
Up to 25
12-28
14-26
Gain flatness
dB
PDL (maximum)
dB
0.2
0.3
0.25
PMD (maximum)
ps
0.35
0.45
0.4
Operating temperature range
°C
0 to +50
0 to +50
0 to +50
0 to +50
0 to +50
Storage temperature range
°C
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
Humidity 4
%
0 to 95
0 to 95
0 to 95
0 to 95
0 to 95
Parameters
Saturated output power 1
Operating wavelength range
Noise
figure 2
1.0-1.7
1
Pin = -2 dBm for Booster, Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1590 nm. Pin determined per customer request at 1590 nm for Mid-access and Gain
Flattened amplifiers
2 P = -2 dBm for Booster, P = -20 dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1590 nm. P determined per customer request at 1590 nm for Mid-access
in
in
in
and Gain Flattened amplifiers
3 P = -20 dBm for Booster, P = -30dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1590 nm. P determined per customer request at 1590 nm for Mid-access
in
in
in
and Gain Flattened amplifiers
4 Non-condensing
2
Typical Specifications For C+L-band amplifiers
1
2
3
4
Parameters
Unit
Booster amplifier
In-Line amplifier
Saturated output power 1
dBm
20
14
Operating wavelength range
nm
1525-1560 & 1570–1610
1525-1560 & 1570–1610
Noise figure 2
dB
<6.0
<6.0
Small signal gain3
dB
Up to 22
Up to 20
PDL (maximum)
dB
0.3
0.25
PMD (maximum)
ps
0.35
0.35
Operating temperature range
°C
0 to +50
0 to +50
Storage temperature range
°C
-40 to +80
-40 to +80
Humidity4
%
0 to 95
0 to 95
Pin = -2 dBm at 1550nm and 1590 nm.
Pin = -2 dBm for Booster, Pin = -20 dBm for In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm and 1590 nm.
Pin = -20 dBm for Booster, Pin = -30dBm for In-Line amplifiers at 1550nm and 1590 nm.
Non-condensing
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts
A customer needs to increase a nominal 10 µW signal to at least 100 µW before it reaches a detector circuit. The wavelength is 1550 nm.
She can do this with the following part:
Bar Code
TBD
Part Number
OFA-1-B-12-1525/1570-1-N-3A-B-X
Description
Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 12 dBm output power for the C
band (1525 - 1570 nm), in a bench top unit with angled FC/PC receptacles. The spectral
response is not flattened. Universal power supply with North American power cord
included. Other types of power cords available separately.
3
Questionnaire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
What gain do you require?
How flat do you require the spectrum of the amplifier to be?
Do you require that the amplifier be remotely controllable? If yes, what sort of interface do you prefer?
What sort of amplifier do you need (booster, pre-amplifier, In-line amplifier or Mid-Span amplifier)?
What is your operating wavelength range?
What style of fiber connectors do you use?
Do you need more than one output?
What sort of enclosure do you prefer?
Description
Optical Fiber Amplifier
N
Number of Output Ports.
Specify 1, 2 or 4. The input signal will
be amplified and split amongst the
output ports.
C
Configuration:
B = Booster
P = Preamplifier
L = In-line
M = Mid-span
P
Maximum Output Power in dBm:
Specify a value between 12 and 28 ,
corresponding to 12 and 28 dBm
respectively
W
Wavelength range:
1525/1570 = 1525 to 1570 nm
1540/1560 = 1540 to 1560 nm
1570/1605 = 1570 to 1605 nm
1525/1605 = 1525 to 1560 and 1570
to 1605 nm
(Custom wavelength ranges are
available. Contact OZ Optics with your
specific requirements)
S
Part Number
OFA-N-C -P -W- S- F -X -O - I
I
Control interface:
R = RS232
U = USB
X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block
version or basic version
O
Options:
A = Automatic gain control with
microprocessor
B = Basic version
M = Microprocessor controlled.
X
Receptacle style:
3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
F
Flatness:
N = Non-flattened
F = Flattened
Packaging style:
1 = Bench top
2 = Rack mountable
3 = OEM module
4 = Gain Block - No electronics
provided, user must provide pump
driver
9 = Custom
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FARADAY ROTATORS AND MIRRORS – PIGTAIL STYLE
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Singlemode,multimode and polarization maintaining
versions available
Wide range of center wavelengths
Low loss
Low back reflection
Compact housing
Miniature Faraday Rotator Package
For 1300-1550 nm
Applications
•
•
•
•
Fiber lasers
Interferometers sensors
Amplifiers
Circulators
Product Description
Faraday rotators change the polarization state of light traveling
through it. The output polarization state is rotated by 45 degrees
with respect to the input polarization.
When combined with a mirror, the reflected light is rotated by
another 45 degrees, resulting in a 90 degree rotation. In addition,
the polarization handedness is reversed by the mirror. This results
in a reflected polarization that is orthogonal to the original
polarization. This is useful when used in interferometers, because
polarization changes through the fiber are cancelled out on the
return journey.
1.93 [49]
1.38 [35]
0.91 [23]
Faraday Mirror Package for 1300-1550 nm
Faraday Rotator Package For 1300-1550 nm
Ø 0.22 [5.5]
Ø 0.12 [3.1]
Ø 0.19 [4.75]
Units are in inches [mm]
Figure 1: Miniature Faraday Rotator Dimensions
Faraday Rotator Package For 980-1064 nm
1.521 [38.6]
Ø0.216 [5.5]
0.787 [20]
Units are in inches [mm]
Figure 2: Miniature Faraday Mirror Dimensions
DTS0013
Faraday Rotator Package For 633-850 nm
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Standard Product Specifications (Faraday Rotator-Mirror Standard Parts)
Parameter
Condition
Center Wavelength
Insertion Loss1
633-850
980-1064
1310-1550
Typical
dB
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.5
Maximum
dB
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.75
Low Loss (- 60 Loss)
dB
N/A
N/A
0.6
0.5
dB
40
40
40, 60
40, 602
dB
20
20
20, 25, 30
20
±3
±3
±3
Polarization
Extinction Ratio 3
At center wavelength
degrees
Rotation Tolerance At center wavelength,25°C degrees
1
2
3
Value
nm
Return Loss 1
Rotation Angle
Units
1310-1550 Faraday Mirror
45
±3 (±1)
Does not include insertion losses, return losses from connectors.
For Faraday mirrors, return losses refers to reflections from points other than the mirror itself.
When using polarization maintaining fibers.
Wavelength[nm]
Wavelength[nm]
2
Ordering Example For Standard Parts
A researcher is building a fiber interferometer wants a Faraday mirror for 1550 nm. She is using standard singlemode fiber with 3 mm
cabling. To minimize losses and unwanted reflections, she requires the lowest loss units available. She will fusion splice the unit in her
system so no connectors are required.
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
23234
FOFM-11P-1550-8/125-P-60-XX-3-1
Faraday Mirror for 1550 nm with 60dB return loss, and with a one meter long 3 mm OD kevlar
reinforced PVC cabled 1550 nm 8/125 polarization maintaining fiber pigtail with no connector.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In
particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases
non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in
your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire
1.
2.
3.
4.
Are you looking for a rotator or a Faraday mirror?
What is the operating wavelength?
Do you need single mode or polarization maintaining fiber?
What is the minimum acceptable return loss?
Description
Pigtail Style
Faraday Rotator :
5.
6.
7.
8.
What is the maximum acceptable insertion loss?
Do you need connectors on the fibers? If yes, what type?
What type of fiber cabling do you prefer?
How long should the fibers be?
Part Number
FOR-11P-W-a/b-I-O-LB-XY-JD-L
Body sizes: 1 for standard size
2 for miniature size (1300-1550 nm)
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SMF
See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other standard fiber sizes.
Input Fiber:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other connectors.
Backreflection Level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB
60dB is available for 1300 nm and 1550 nm
wavelengths only. Special charges apply for
other wavelengths.
FOFM-11P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SMF
See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other standard fiber sizes.
Input Fiber:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
Backreflection Level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB
60dB is available for 1300 nm and 1550 nm
wavelengths only. Special charges apply for
other wavelengths.
Fiber Jacket Type:
1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other jacket sizes.
Connector Code:
Output Fiber: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
Pigtail Style
Faraday Mirror:
Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the
device. Example: to order 1 meter of fiber at
the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L
with 1,7.
Fiber length in meters
Fiber Jacket Type:
1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other jacket sizes.
Connector Code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other connectors.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIBER OPTIC CIRCULATORS
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low insertion loss
Miniature packages
High power handling
Wide wavelength range
Low cross talk
Center wavelengths 1310,1480,1550 nm
Low return loss
High extinction ratio
High isolation
Singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber versions
available
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
Standard Polarization Maintaining Circulator
DWDM networks
Chromatic dispersion compensation
Optical add drop modules (OADM)
Fiber amplifiers
Fiber sensors
Product Description
Fiber optic circulators act as signal routers, transmitting light from
an input fiber to an output fiber, but directing light that returns
along that output fiber to a third port. They perform a similar
function as an isolator, protecting the input fiber from return
power, but also allowing the rejected light to be employed.
OZ Optics’ fiber optic circulators are manufactured with polarization
maintaining fibers making them ideal for polarization maintaining
applications such as 40 Gbit systems or Raman pump applications.
They are also used in double pass amplifiers and in chromatic
dispersion compensation modules.
The standard fiber alignment is for all power to be transmitted
along the slow axis of each fiber. With OZ Optics’ modular
design and custom manufacturing capabilities, any of the three
ports can be aligned for fast axis coupling. High extinction ratio
connectors can also be installed. Regardless of the state of
In-line Fiber Optic Circulator
polarization of the return beam, the input fiber will still be
isolated from reflected light.
OZ Optics now offers miniature devices for OEM applications.
Polarization independent circulators using singlemode fibers are
also now available. Additional connector and cable options and
custom designs are also available. Please forward a detailed
description of your application requirements to the OZ Optics
Sales Department.
Figure 1: Standard Circulator Dimensions
DTS0070
18-Oct-04
Ordering Information For Custom Parts
Questionnaire For Custom Parts
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed
products to meet your application needs. As with most
manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort, so
please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our
standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to
prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer
than normal. In most cases, non-recurring engineering (NRE)
charges, lot charges, and minimum order quantities will be
necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as posssible.
We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
1.
What is your operating wavelength, in nm?
2.
Do you prefer a standard or inline style package?
3.
Are you using singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber?
4.
What are the minimum return loss requirements?
5.
How long should the fibers be and what fiber type?
6.
Do you require connectors? If so, what type?
7.
How much power will be transmitted through the fiber?
Description
Part Number
Fiber Optic Circulator
FOC-12P-11-a/b-PPP-W-LB-XYZ-JD- L
Circulator Type:
P for standard style
N for miniature inline style
Fiber Length in meters
Fiber Jacket Type:
0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate jacket
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for
other jacket sizes
Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes, in microns
7/125 for 1300 nm polarization maintaining fiber
8/125 for 1550 nm polarization maintaining fiber
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber
See Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard Tables for
other standard fiber sizes
Fiber Type:
S for singlemode
P for polarization maintaining
Connector Code:
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
Backreflection Level: 40, 50 or 60dB
3 = NTT - FC/PC
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard
Tables for other connectors.
Ordering Example For Custom Parts
A customer is building a fiber laser, and is using a circulator to direct the input light and amplified return signal. The operating wavelength
is 1550 nm, and uses polarization maintaining fiber. He wants a reconfigurable system, so he wants angled FC connectors on the fiber
ends. He also wants 3 mm cable on the fibers as he wants rugged units that can withstand repeated handling. One meter long fibers
are sufficient.
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
XXXXX
FOC-12P-111-8/125-PPP-1550-60-3A3A3A-3-1
Polarization maintaining fiber optic circulator for 1550 nm with 60dB return loss, with
1 meter long, 3 mm OD cabled 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, with FC/APC connectors on
all ends.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Q. Can I use a polarization maintaining circulator with
singlemode fiber?
A. Not without seeing high insertion losses. The transmission
through polarization maintaining circulators is highly
polarization dependent. Only the return output port can be
made using singlemode fiber without affecting performance.
One alternative is to use an all-fiber polarization controller
on the inputs to control the polarization through the unit.
Otherwise, we recommend the miniature units.
Q. Why do I get high losses?
A. Check to see that you are launching light through the proper
polarization axis of the proper fiber port.
Q. Can I get a higher isolation or extinction ratio?
A. OZ Optics can supply circulators with 25dB and 30dB
extinction ratios and can make design modifications for
higher isolation values. Please forward you system
requirements for a proposal.
Q. What happens to light polarized along the wrong axis?
A. Fast axis light in port T is absorbed internally, as is fast axis
light returning into the circulator.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIBER OPTIC MEDIA CONVERTERS
Features
• Cost effective copper to fiber conversion
• Complies with IEEE 802.3 and IEEE 802.3u
• Extends network span up to 2 km for LED sources and 40 Km
for laser sources
• Diagnostic LEDs for troubleshooting and maintenance
• Auto MDI/MDI-X on UTP port
• 10/100 Mbps auto-negotiation
• Far-end fault detection and link fault pass-through
• Multiple power options, including AC/DC adaptor, USB power,
or 5VDC
• Rack mount chassis available for most versions
• Plug and play for most versions
RY
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
A
IN EET
M
I
EL SH
PR ATA
D
Fiber Optic Media Converter
Short haul communications
High-speed data transfer
Transmitting data through electrically noisy environments
Secure optical links
Network testing
Product Description
The OZ family of media converters enables the transformation from copper UTP media to fiber media. The auto-negotiation feature of
these units allows these plug-and-play devices to be connected to either 10 or 100 Mbps fast Ethernet on the electrical side
(10/100Base-TX), and 100 Mbps fiber (100Base-FX) on the optical side. LEDs display the status of the unit to simplify diagnostics and
maintenance.
The units can be powered by a variety of means, including AC/DC adaptor, USB port, or 5VDC input. Data transfer is achieved by a
combination of switching and store-and-forward techniques. Fault pass-through capability is incorporated into every unit.
Each unit may be used as a stand-alone device, or mounted into a chassis for applications requiring multiple data links.
DTS0101
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
29-Oct-04
1
Questionnaire
1.
How long is the optical fiber for the data link?
2.
What type of fiber do you intend to use (core and cladding sizes)?
3.
What type of optical connector do you require?
Ordering Information for Parts
Description
Part Number
Media Converter
MC-T-F-RJ45-X (-W)
W (option for T=120 only)
-A = TX:1310 nm; RX:1550 nm
-B = TX:1550 nm; RX:1310 nm
T Type: 100 = Rack mountable, 1300 nm LED source
110 = Single port 1300 nm LED source
120 = Rack mountable, 1310 or 1550 nm laser
F Fiber type:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
Description
Part Number
Media Converter Chassis
MCC - Y
Y
X Optical connector:
VF45 = VF-45TM
SC = Duplex SC for T=100 or 110,
Single SC for T=120
LC = Duplex LC
ST = Duplex ST
VF-45 is a trademark of 3M
Number of channels
Y=
10 for 10-slot chassis
16 for 16 slot chassis
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Q: Can I use the units with either singlemode or multimode fiber?
A: Since most of the units use LEDs, it is difficult to couple a useful amount of light into singlemode fibers, which have a much smaller
core than multimode fibers. The MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B, however, uses a laser diode as the light source, and can be used with
either 9/125 micron singlemode fiber or 50/125 micron multimode fiber.
Q: Why does the MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B have a much greater range than the other devices?
A: The MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B uses a laser diode as the source. Laser diodes produce a more intense beam than the LEDs used in
the other devices. In addition, a greater percentage of the laser light can be coupled into the fiber, compared to an LED source. These
two factors combine to give a greater useable range for the device.
Q: Does the same model of media converter need to be used at each end of the fiber?
A: No. Since standard protocols are used, the media converters do not have to be identical.
Q: I have a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A connected to each end of my optical cable, but I cannot establish communications through the cable.
What is the problem?
A: If you have a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A at one end of the cable, then you should be using a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-B at the other end. The
MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A transmits at 1310 and receives at 1550. Therefore the unit at the other end should transmit at 1550 and receive
at 1310.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIBER PIGTAILED TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED LASER DIODE HOUSING
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Highly stable power output
Highly stable wavelength
Good coupling efficiency
Low backreflection
Wide wavelength range
Singlemode, multimode, polarization maintaining fiber versions
Adjustable output power
Optional OEM laser diode and Peltier driver electronics
Receptacle and pigtail versions
Laser driver is externally TTL modulatable
APPLICATIONS:
• Interferometric sensors
• Wavelength and power stabilized laser diode sources
• Long term stability measurements
SPECIFICATIONS:
• Available Wavelengths:
635 - 1625nm
• Backreflection:
-25, -40, -50, and -60dB
• Connector Types:
NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC,
Ultra NTT-FC/PC, Angled SC,
Angled NTT-FC/PC, SC, AT&T-ST,
SMA905, SMA906
• Extinction Ratio:
20, 25, or 30dB for PM fiber
• Case Temperature Control
Preset in the Factory:
From 15°C to 25°C to within ±0.1°C
• Optical Coupling
Efficiency:
30% - 60% in SM fiber
60% - 95% in MM fiber
• Laser Diode Driver Electronics (OEM Version):
CW: Currents up to 120mA can be sourced in constant
optical power (CW) mode.
TTL: Currents up to 250mA can be sourced at
frequencies up to 20MHz.
Higher power versions are available. Contact OZ Optics for
further information.
• Peltier Driver Electronics (OEM Version):
Matching requirements for the unit in Figure 1 is 3 Amp, 5 Volt.
Higher power versions are available. Contact OZ Optics for further information.
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Figure 1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
The laser diode housing consists of an emitter (either a laser diode, LED, or SLED), a Peltier cooler, heatsink, and
coupling optics into the fiber. The Peltier controller and laser diode driver electronics are external to the housing. A
current source is required for the Peltier cooler. Upon request, OZ Optics can provide a complete OEM turnkey laser
diode housing with a laser diode driver and Peltier cooler controller electronics. The control electronics for the Peltier
include a temperature sensor on the laser diode side, and on the heat sink side. External control and modulation
signals use pigtailed BNC connectors.
A special version of the unit comes with a blocking screw to control the light output. This allows the user to control the
ouput power from the source without adjusting the source current. This ensures that the output wavelength from the
source is as stable as possible.
The laser diode housing shown in Figure 1 is designed for diodes with less than 150mW of optical power. Oz Optics
manufactures housings for diodes with more than 150mW of optical power. Contact OZ Optics for further information.
OZ Optics can also design customer specified complete laser diode to fiber delivery systems, including optical
coupling mechanisms, fibers, collimators/focusers, driver electronics, and software. Contact OZ Optics for further
information.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Receptacle Style Housing:
Receptacle Code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
5 = SMA905 & 906
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other receptacle types
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Pigtail Style Housing:
HULD-TX-W-F-P-M
Modulation Technique: 1 = CW operation only
2 = TTL Modulation only
3 = Both CW and TTL
Optical Output Power, in mW, from the fiber
Fiber type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
LDPC-T1-W-a/b-F-BL-X-JD-L-P-M
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF
See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables
data sheet for other standard fiber sizes
Fiber type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB.
60dB version available for 1300nm and
1550nm only
Modulation Technique: 1 = CW operation only
2 = TTL Modulation only
3 = Both CW and TTL
Optical Output Power, in mW, from the fiber
Fiber length, in meters
Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 OD Micron hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for
other jacket sizes
Connector Code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
5 = SMA905
6 = SMA906
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other connector types
NOTES: Add “-DR” to the end of the part number to include Laser Diode Driver Electronics.
Add “-PC” to the end of the part number to include Peltier Cooler Controller Electronics.
Add “-PS” to the end of the part number to include a power supply.
Add “-LD” to the end of the part number if the laser diode is to be supplied by OZ Optics.
Add “-BL” to the end of the part number if a blocking screw is required.
Contact OZ Optics for other versions.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIBER TERMINATORS
Features:
•
Low backreflection
•
Compact size
•
High reliability
•
LOW COST!
Applications:
•
Fiber optic telecommunications
•
Fiber amplifiers
•
CATV systems
•
Optical network equipment
Fiber Terminators
Specifications:
•
Backreflection:
> 50dB
•
Connector type:
Ultra FC, SC, ST or LC
•
Wavelength range:
1300 nm to 1620 nm
•
Power handling:
Up to 1W
•
Fiber type:
Singlemode 9/125
•
Operating temperature:
-20 ~ 75°C
•
Storage temperature:
-40 ~ 85°C
•
Humidity:
95% RH
Figure 1: SC Terminator
Product Description:
Fiber Optic Terminators are recommended for any fiber optic system with unused ports.
Non - terminated ports may create unwanted backreflections that can degrade overall
system performance. These terminators can be easily installed into panel mount
receptacles to significantly reduce reflections from the fiber face. Terminators are
available for FC, SC, LC and ST style connectors with Ultra polish grade.
Figure 2: FC Terminator
Ordering Informations For Standard Parts:
Bar Code
3324
3325
13611
13612
Part Number
TER-3U
TER-SCU
TER-LCU
TER-8U
Description
Fiber Terminator for FC/UPC connectors
Fiber Terminator for SC/UPC connectors
Fiber Terminator for LC/UPC connectors
Fiber Terminator for ST/UPC connectors
10.0mm
20.0mm10.0mm
29.4mm
5.60mm
Figure 3: LC Terminator
5.60mm
20.0mm
DTS0029
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
21-Feb-05
1
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIBER TO PHOTODIODE COUPLERS
OZ Optics provides packaging services of photodiodes at
a low cost. Fiber to photodiode couplers are available for
virtually any photodiode available, using either
singlemode, multimode or polarization maintaining fiber.
The coupler design is both rugged and flexible, allowing
people to do their own alignment, if they desire. For OEM
applications, miniature pigtail style fiber to photodiode
couplers are available that do not use the tilt adjustment
technique. These feature both a smaller size and lower
cost.
OZ Optics’ fiber to photodiode couplers come in three
basic designs. The most common design consists of two
baseplates, separated by a resilient O-ring.
The
photodiode is epoxied into one plate. The other plate
contains the focusing optics and the connector for the input
fiber. A focusing lens is used to focus the light from the
fiber to a spot less than or equal to the size of the active
area of the photodiode. Spot sizes of less than 10 microns
in size can be achieved with this method, making it ideal
for very high speed transmission rates.
Utilizing Oz Optics patented tilt adjustment technique, the
alignment between the photodiode and the coupling optics
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specification without prior notice.
is adjusted until the maximum coupling efficiency is
achieved. Typical coupling efficiency exceeds 80 percent
for singlemode fibers, although this varies, depending on
the fiber and photodiode characteristics.
The tilt
adjustment design is recommended for getting the best
coupling efficiencies into very small surface area
photodiodes.
The second design does not have the tilt adjustment
design built in. Instead, the fiber, lens and photodiode are
glued into a single assembly. The third and final design
uses no lens at all. The fiber is simply butted against the
photodiode. Both of these designs are intended for OEM
applications.
For optimum coupling efficiency, stability, and minimum
backreflection, we recommend using pigtail style fiber to
photodiode couplers. These units have the fiber directly
attached to the photodiode. A wide variety of fiber types
are available from stock. They can be cabled with different
cable sizes, and preterminated with different types of
connectors. Metallized fibers and lenses, as well as
soldering techniques, are available for photodiode
couplers requiring hermetic sealing.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
Description
FPD-0X-W-F
Lens style fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle and tilt adjustment design.
PFPD-11-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L
Lens style fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler using the tilt adjustment design.
FPD-2X-W-F
Lens style miniature fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle, without tilt adjustment.
PFPD-21-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L
Lens style miniature fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment.
FPD-3X-W-F
Miniature fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle, without tilt adjustment or lens.
PFPD-31-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L
Miniature fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment or lens.
When ordering, please fax us your photodiode and fiber specifications.
Add “PD” to the end of the part number if the photodiode is to be provided with the coupler by OZ Optics.
Add “PO” to the end of the part number for Parts Only - if the customer is to do the alignment him/herself.
Where:
X is the connector receptacle type. For pigtail style photodiode couplers it refers to the male connector on the end
of the fiber. (3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC, 3A for Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for
SC connectors, X for unterminated fiber ends),
W is the operating wavelength of the photodiode, in nm,
a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns,
F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber),
LB is the desired backreflection level for pigtail style fiber to photodiode couplers. (25, 40 or 60dB typically),
JD is the fiber jacket type (0.25 or 0.4 for unjacketed fiber, 1 for 900 micron OD nylon jacketing or loose tubing,
3 for 3mm OD loose tube PVC cable),
L is the length of fiber in meters.
Example: A customer wants to pigtail a photodiode to a 9/125 singlemode fiber, to work at both 1300 and 1550nm. To
minimize size he chooses the fiber to photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment, but including a lens to maximize
coupling efficiency. The fiber is to be 0.5 meters long, with 900 micron nylon jacketing, and unterminated. OZ
Optics part number: PFPD-21-1300/1550-9/125-S-40-X-1-0.5
219 Westbrook Rd, Carp, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIXED ATTENUATORS AND ATTENUATING FIBER PATCHCORD
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low backreflection
Wide wavelength range
Polarization insensitive
Compact and rugged housings
Wide range of connectors/receptacles
Hybrid style attenuator uses attenuating fiber
Attenuating fiber patchcords utilize a new patent pending
technique. Not fusion splice.
Mode independent multimode loopback attenuators
Designed to meet Telcordia requirements
Low cost
Hybrid Male-Female Fixed Attenuator
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical power equalization
CATV, LAN, and telecommunications
Test and measurement
Channel balancing for WDM systems
Receiver padding
Optical transmission systems
Product Description:
OZ Optics’ line of low cost fixed attenuators are available in four
different configurations (hybrid male to female, attenuating fiber
patchcord, bulkhead receptacle and loopback) to best suit your
particular application. Each configuration has its own strengths.
The hybrid type is ideal for reducing the intensity of a signal just
prior to going into a receiver. They are also available with different
connector types on the input and output. The attenuating fiber
patchcord is ideal for high power applications and can be easily
installed into fiber splice enclosures. The receptacle style is ideal
when two male connectors need to be mated with a fixed
attenuator. Finally, the loopback style attenuator is intended for
patch panel installations.
The Attenuating Fiber Advantage: OZ Optics has recently
enhanced its fixed attenuator product line by developing a new
technology to precisely attenuate signals in fibers. This patent
pending, fully automatable technique allows one to create fixed
attenuators within any standard fiber, with low polarization
dependent loss (PDL) and high power handling. The resultant
attenuating fiber is physically identical in appearance and
behaviour to the original fiber, allowing it to be used to build
patchcords or male-female hybrid attenuators. As the process
used does not require the manufacture of special fiber, fixed
attenuators can be constructed in small batch quantities
economically. At the same time the automation aspect of the
techniques allows large quantity orders to be manufactured at a
cost as low as a dollar per unit.
Attenuating fiber can be made from either singlemode and
polarization maintaining (PM) fiber. PM attenuating fiber
DTS0030
Attenuating Fiber Patchcord
Receptacle Style Attenuator
Loopback Style Attenuator
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
17-Feb-05
1
Example 2:
A customer needs to reduce by 5dB the signal power from a polarization maintaining fiber that has an angle FC/PC connector before it
enters a receiver, which also has an angle FC receptacle. The signal wavelength is 1550 nm, and the power is in excess of 1 Watt. The
OZ Optics bar code number and description of the attenuator for this application is as follows:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
17771
PFA-3A3A-1550-8/125-3-0.5-P-5-HP
High power inline 5dB fixed attenuator at 1550 nm with 0.5 meter long, 3 mm OD cabled,
8/125 micron PM fiber with FC/Angle PC connectors on both ends.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
What is your operating wavelength range?
2.
Are you using polarization maintaining fiber? What type?
3.
What level of attenuation do you require?
4.
Do you need the ends of the fiber connectorized? What type of connector do you need?
5.
How long should each end of the fiber be?
6.
Do you need the fiber cabled? What cable size do you need?
7.
What is the power level of your application?
Ordering Information For Custom Parts
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list.
In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases
non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 25 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully
explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Description
Hybrid Style Fixed Attenuator:
Part Number
FA-300-XY-1300/1550-a/b-F-N-M1
N = Patchcord Attenuation:
1 for 1dB
2 for 2dB
...
20 for 20dB
25 for 25dB
X Y = Connector Code
(X for male, Y for female end):
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
SCU = SC Ultra PC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
8U = ST Ultra PC
F = Fiber type:
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in microns
singlemode: 9/125
multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125
Note: Hybrid style attenuators with angled finishes must have matching style connectors one each end (i.e. Angled NTT-FC/PC to Angled
NTT-FC/PC, not Angled NTT-FC/PC to Angled SC or Angled NTT-FC/PC to Ultra NTT-FC/PC
Bulkhead Receptacle Style Fixed Attenuator:
FA-500-X-1300/1500-9/125-S-N
X = Receptacle Code:
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
SCU = SC Ultra
8U = ST Ultra
Loopback Plug Style Fixed Attenuator:
X = Connector Code:
SCU = Ultra SC
SCA = Angle SC
3U = Ultra FC
3A = Angled FC
LC = Ultra
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in microns
singlemode: 9/125
multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140
N = Attenuation:
1 for 1dB
2 for 2dB
...
20 for 20dB
25 for 25dB
FA-400-X-W-a/b-F-N
N = Attenuation:
1 for 1dB
2 for 2dB
...
20 for 20dB
25 for 25dB
F = Fiber type:
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
4
Ordering Information For Custom Parts - continued
Description
Part Number
Fiber Patchcord Inline Fixed Attenuator:
PFA-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-F-N
Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for
other connectors
Patchcord Attenuation: 1 for 1dB
2 for 2dB
...
20 for 20dB
25 for 25dB
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
Fiber type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
Fiber Core/Cladding size, in microns:
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF
See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other
standard fiber sizes
Fiber length, in meters, on each side of
the device.
Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at
the input and 7 meters at the output,
replace “ L” with 1,7
Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for
other jacket sizes
Note: Add -(HP) to the end of the part number for attenuated high power patchcord style.
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts
1.
2.
3.
A customer needs a mode independent Loopback 10dB attenuator at 1300 nm for a multimode application. Core/cladding size
should be 50/125: and requires SC connectors. OZ part number will be: FA-400-1300-50/125-M-10
A 20dB inline fixed attenuator is required for 9/125 singlemode fiber, with an operating wavelength of 1300 nm. The input
connector is to be a male angled FC connector, while the output connector is a male SC connector. Fiber length 2 meters on
each side. OZ part number will be: PFA-3ASC-1300-9/125-3-2-S-20
A customer needs 12dB attenuation between the patchcord and the receiver. This patchcord has an LC male connected while
the receiver has a female LC receptacle. Working wavelength is C band. Then customer should order: PFA-300-LCLC1300/1550-9/125-12-S-M1
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Q: Is the patchcord style attenuator a good choice for multimode applications?
A: The plug type or loopback type are better choices. The patchcord style uses a high loss splice. It will attenuate high order
modes more than low order modes. Therefore the attenuation will depend on the launch conditions.
Q: Will I see the same attenuation with the patchcord attenuators at both 1300 nm and 1550 nm?
A: No. Because the mode field diameter is different for the different wavelengths, there is over 10% variation in the attenuation in
dB with the change in wavelength.
Application Notes:
Example 1: Power Equalization in Optical Networks: A network installer often has to lower system powers in a complex network so
that each receiver sees the optimum signal strength without being overloaded. To do this properly, the optical power from each fiber
should be measured just before entering the corresponding receiver. The required attenuation can then be calculated for each channel,
and the corresponding attenuator can be selected and installed. For instance, if each receiver is designed to work with between 0.5
mW (-3dBm) and 1 mW (0dBm) of optical power, and fiber one emits 20 mW (+13dBm), while fiber two emits 50 mW (+17dBm), then
a 15dB attenuator can be used on fiber one, while a 20dB attenuator can be used for fiber two. The installer simply installs the matching
plug style attenuator before each receiver.
Example 2: Patch Panel Attenuator Arrays: Patch panels are ideal locations for installing attenuation fiber patchcords. Quite often
one needs to attenuate the incoming signals from many fibers entering a hub, in order to equalize the signals. Attenuating fiber
patchcords provide a convenient means of introducing a fixed attenuation level in a fiber line, neatly arranged in a patch panel
enclosure. In contrast, using hybrid male-to-female fixed attenuators requires using an additional fiber patchcord as well, adding
complexity to the system, and potentialy increasing the chances of failure at a node.
Fiber
Patchcord
Hybrid
Attenuator
Replace This...
Attenuating
Fiber
Patchcord
With This
5
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIXED FILTERS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Narrow Line Widths
Rugged and Compact Size
Removable Filter Holder Designs
Wide Wavelength Range
Singlemode, Polarization Maintaining, and Multimode Fiber Versions
Expanded Beam Technology
LOW COST!
Applications:
• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
• CATV, LAN and Telecommunications Use
• Test and Measurement
Pigtail Style Fixed Filter
Product Description:
Fixed filters transmit or block specific wavelengths of light as they travel
through the optical fiber. Light from the input fiber is first collimated and
passed through the filter. The beam is then focused into the output fiber.
Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum
(FWHM). The standard filters used have a smooth, rounded transmission
spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot
cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of
some thickness. Other filter designs are available. For instance, flat top
bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By
increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope
therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. Please contact OZ
Optics for custom filter designs.
Miniature Pigtail Style Fixed Filter
Fixed filters using singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM)
fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers
based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining
components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices
using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in
stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary,
we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
Removable Filters
Figure 1: Pigtail Style Fixed Filter (FF-11 Series)
DTS0031
Figure 2: Pigtail Style Fixed Filter with (RFF-11 Series)
Removable Filter
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
08/02
1
FF-1A-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW
Fixed Filter
FF = Body Type:
FF for fixed filters
RFF for removable fixed filters
LW =Filter line width in nanometers. For flat
top filters add "F" to the line width.
L = Fiber length, in meters
A = Filter Size
1 for standard size
2 for miniature pigtail size
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm
9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber
F=
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
LB =Backreflection level:
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM
fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm
wavelength ranges only)
35dB for multimode fibers
JD =
Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
X,Y =
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
LCA=Angled LC
MU=MU
X=No Connector
Notes:
1 Only available for pigtail style non-removable filters
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A 0.8nm line width filter with a flat top profile is needed for 1570.4nm, to transmit light at a specific channel in the ITU grid, while blocking spurious noise in a neighboring channel. Size is critical, so the customer needs the miniature style fixed filters. Return loss is not critical. The customer wants to use standard singlemode fiber pigtails, 1 mm jacketing, no connectors, each one meter long. Part number and description are
as follows:
Part Number
FF-12-1570.4-9/125-S-40-XX-1-1-0.8F
Description
Pigtail style fixed filter for 1570.4nm, with 1 meter long, 1mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails,
40 dB return loss, no connectors and 0.8nm FWHM flat top profile filter.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: What is a Fabry-Perot filter? Are there other types available?
A: A Fabry-Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. This shape is known
as a Lorentz profile. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting
the spacer thickness one can adjust the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available. For instance, flat top bandpass
filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore
improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on what custom filters are available please contact OZ Optics.
Q: How do you define your linewidths?
A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This the transmitted linewidth at -3dB from the peak transmission.
For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified.
Q: Is the shape of the transmission curve affected by polarization?
A: No, OZ Optics tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This design reduces PDL to
minimal levels, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive.
Q: How well does the filter block unwanted wavelengths?
A: For standard single cavity Fabry Perot filters the typical linewidth at -20dB is roughly 10 times the FWHM linewidth. This type of filter is good
for selecting specific channels in a DWDM system or cleaning up the ASE noise from a broadband source. The filter may transmit light at
specific wavelengths significantly outside the operating wavelength range. For custom applications requiring different out-of-band isolation
please contact OZ Optics.
Q: What linewidth do I need in a 200GHz DWDM system? 100GHz? 50GHz?
A: Typical linewidths associated with these frequencies are 1.2, 0.8 and 0.3nm respectively. This ultimately depends on the channel width and
isolation levels required for the system in question. OZ Optics can work with you to build the filter that best suites your requirements.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIXED NEUTRAL DENSITY ATTENUATORS EXPANDED BEAM STYLE
Features:
• Mode Independent Attenuation Level
• Rugged and Compact Size
• Pigtail and Receptacle Styles
• Removable Filter Versions
• Wide Wavelength Range
• Singlemode, Polarization Maintaining, and Multimode Fiber Versions
• Expanded Beam Technology for flexible design
• Low Cost
Applications:
• CATV, LAN and Telecommunications use
• Receiver Padding
• Test and Measurement
• Optical Power Equalization
• Research & Design
Product Description:
OZ Optics line of expanded beam style neutral density fixed attenuators are ideal
for multimode applications and for applications where attenuating fibers are not
available or usable. These attenuators provide mode independent fixed
attenuation when used with multimode fibers. The insertion losses will not depend
on how the light is launched into the fiber. This is a significant advantange over
other attenuator designs.
The attenuators consist of a set of collimating and focusing optics and a central
baseplate containing the filter. They can be ordered in receptacle or pigtail styles.
The expanded beam design permits higher power handling than plug style
attenuators. The filters themselves can be either permanent or removable. This
provides great flexibility for experimentation.
Pigtail Style Fixed Attenuator
Figure 1: Fiber Pigtailed Neutral Density Fixed
Attenuators
Removable Filter Style Attenuator
Figure 2: Fiber Pigtailed Style Neutral Density
Removable Filter Attenuators
DTS0032
Figure 3: Receptacle Style Fixed Attenuators with
Neutral Density Filter
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
03/02
1
Standard Product Specification:
Version
Pigtail Style
Receptacle Style
Removable Filter
Fixed Filter
Removable Filter
5dB to 30dB, 5dB increments
40dB for Singlemode or PM Fibers, 35dB for
14dB (Multimode offered only)
multimode
440-1625nm
Fixed Filter
Attenuation
Return Loss
Available
1
Wavelengths
Attenuator
Diameter
Filter size for
removable filters
0.79” (20mm)
1.31” (33mm)
0.79”(20mm)
1.31”(33mm)
N/A
12.7mm diameter x
3mm thick
N/A
12.7mm diameter x
3mm thick
Questionnaire:
1.
2.
3.
4.
What is the power level of your application?
What is the operating wavelength?
Do you need a removable filter?
What fiber size are you using?
Ordering Information Custom Parts:
Receptacle Style:
Body Type: ND for non-removable filters
RND for removable filters
3 = Flat, Super or Ultra
FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables for
other connectors
ND-200-XY-W-a/b-F-N
Attenuation: 5 for 5dB
10 for 10dB
15 for 15dB
20 for 20dB
25 for 25dB
Connector Code:
Fiber type: M = Multimode
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF
See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard Tables
for other standard fiber sizes
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Pigtail Style:
Body Type: ND for non-removable filters
RND for removable filters
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF
See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard
Tables for other standard fiber sizes
Fiber type: M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
Backreflection level (Return Loss):
40 dB for Singlemode and PM
35dB for multimode
ND-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-N
Attenuation:
5 for 5dB
10 for 10dB
15 for 15dB
20 for 20dB
25 for 25dB
Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device
Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input
and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7
Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 of the OZ Standard Tables for other
jacket sizes
Fiber Connectors
X = No Connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables for other
connectors
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FUSED COUPLERS – FIBER OPTIC
This condition is met by using an incoherent source, such
as an LED, or by using a mode scrambler, to mix up the
modes traveling through the fiber. It is also achieved by
sending the signal through a long length of fiber, before it
enters the coupler.
Fused couplers are used to split optical signals between
two fibers, or to combine optical signals from two fibers
into one fiber. They are constructed by fusing and
tapering two fibers together. This method provides a
simple, rugged, and compact method of splitting and
combining optical signals. Typical excess losses are as
low as 0.2dB, while splitting ratios are accurate to within
±5 percent at the design wavelength. The devices are bidirectional, and offer low backreflection. The technique is
best suited to singlemode and multimode couplers.
Fused couplers do suffer from some disadvantages.
Multimode fused couplers are mode dependent. Certain
modes within one fiber are transferred to the second
fiber, while other modes are not. As a result, the splitting
ratio will depend on what modes are excited within the
fiber.
The couplers are optimized for a uniform
distribution of modes within the fiber known as an
equilibrium mode field distribution, (EMD).
Singlemode fused couplers only transmit one mode, so
they do not suffer from mode dependency. However,
they are highly wavelength dependent. A difference in
wavelength of only 10nm can cause a significant change
in the splitting ratio. As a result it is important to specify
the exact wavelength at which the fused coupler will be
used. Finally, fused couplers made from polarization
maintaining fiber do not maintain polarization well at the
fusion point, making them sensitive to temperature or
vibration. As a result they are not well suited for
polarization applications. If any of the above problems
are of concern to you, then you should instead consider
using an OZ Optics Fiber Optic Beam Splitter/Combiner,
which uses hybrid micro-optics. Refer to the data sheet
entitled Fiber Optic Beam Splitters/Combiners.
OZ Optics fused couplers are available in a range of
wavelengths, fiber sizes, and splitting ratios. The fiber
ends can be terminated with a variety of fiber connectors.
Standard configurations are One-by-Two and Two-byTwo couplers. N by M fused couplers, such as one by
three, or one-by 4, etc., are also available on request.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Standard Wavelengths:
488nm, 514nm, 633nm, 830nm, 1300-1350nm, and 1490-1550nm for single-mode fused
couplers. Other wavelengths are available on request. Multimode couplers are broadband in
nature. Their operating range is 400nm to 1600nm.
Fiber Sizes:
Singlemode: 3.5/125 for 488nm and 514nm couplers, 4/125 for 633nm, 5/125 for 830nm, and
9/125 for 1300nm and 1550nm.
Multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125 and 100/140 size fibers.
Excess Loss:
<0.3dB for 1300nm and 1550nm couplers. <0.5dB for 830nm couplers. <1.0dB for wavelengths
between 480nm and 700nm.
Directivity:
50dB or better.
Splitting Ratio Accuracy: Within ±3% for 850nm, 1300nm, and 1550nm wavelengths. Within ±5% for wavelengths
between 480nm and 850nm.
Temperature Range:
-40°C to +85°C
DTS0033
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
23-Feb-05
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Part Number
Description
FUSED-12-W-a/b-S/R-XYZ-JD-L
One-by-Two Fused Coupler
FUSED-22-W-a/b-S/R-XYZT-JD-L
Two-by-Two Fused Coupler
Where:
X,Y,Z,T are the input and output male connector types (3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC/PC, 3A for
Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, and X for unterminated fiber ends),
W is the operating wavelength in nm (Standard wavelengths are 488nm, 514nm, 633nm, 830nm, 1300nm and
1550nm),
a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns,
S/R is the desired splitting ratio (50/50 splitting is standard),
JD is the fiber jacket type (3 for 3mm OD loose tube kevlar reinforced PVC cable is standard.),
L is the fiber length in meters. The standard fiber length is 0.5m per side. Contact OZ Optics for availability on
other lengths.
Example: The customer requires a singlemode two-by-two 50/50 coupler for 633nm (fiber core size is 4/125 for 633nm
singlemode fiber). All ends are to be 0.5 meters long, cabled, and terminated with FC style connectors. OZ Optics' part
number: FUSED-22-633-4/125-50/50-3333-3-0.5
Note: OZ Optics reserves the right to substitute a two-by-two coupler for the equivalent one-by two splitter, depending on
availability. This will not affect the couplers performance or pricing. The only difference will be an extra input fiber on the
coupler.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
HAND HELD OPTICAL POWER METER
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wide dynamic range
Wide wavelength range
Interchangeable optical connectors available
Long battery lifetime, up to 300 hours
Powered by rechargeable battery or AC adaptor
RS-232 interface for computer control
Protective rubber boot
Built-in backlight
CE compliant
Low cost
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fiber optic assembling and testing
Quality control and measurement
Network installation
Component and system troubleshooting
Education
General optical power measurement
POM-300 Optical Power Meter
Product Description
The OZ Optics POM-300 offers a high-resolution optical power
meter with a wide dynamic range covering a broad spectrum of
wavelengths. A user-friendly keypad and easy-to-read back-lit
display makes it well suited to most user applications.
Extremely low power consumption allows extended operation
in the field. Alternatively, the AC adaptor may be used, either
directly, or to recharge the internal battery.
The POM-300 can accommodate a variety of standard,
interchangeable screw-in receptacles. Power levels as high as
+10 dBm or as low as -75 dBm can be easily measured, with
the values displayed in watts or dBm. Relative measurements
can be displayed in dB. The wavelength can be selected in
increments of 10 nm, or set to a specific value, within 1 nm.
Through the keypad and liquid crystal display, the user can
configure various modes of operation and format the displayed
measurements. Alternatively, using the RS232 serial interface,
the POM-300 can be controlled by a host PC using a series of
simple commands.
DTS0103
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
14-Jan-2005
1
Questionnaire:
1. What is the wavelength range that you need?
2. What is the maximum power level that you need to measure?
3. What is the minimum power level that you need to measure?
4. What type of optical receptacle do you need?
5. Do you need to be able to control the power meter from a computer?
Ordering Information for Custom Parts
Description
Optical Power Meter
Part Number
POM-300-W
Description
Optical receptacle
Part Number
POM-300-R-X
W:
Wavelength range: IR = infrared, 800 to 1650 nm
VIS = visible, 440 to 900 nm
X:
Receptacle style:
3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
1.25U = Universal adaptor for 1.25 mm
diameter ferrules
2.5U = Universal adaptor for 2.5 mm
diameter ferrules
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts:
A customer needs to measure optical power from a system operating at 650 nm, which has an LC connector on the end of a fiber. He
can do this by ordering the following parts:
Part Number
Description
POM-300-VIS
Hand Held Optical Power Meter with silicon detector and battery, for 440nm - 900nm wavelengths, -65dBm to
10dBm measurement range. Measurements are in watts/dBm/dB with 4 or 5-digit display. Receptacle is not
included.
POM-300-R-LC
Interchangeable LC/PC receptacle for POM-300 Optical Power Meter
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Q: I need to measure a noisy signal. Can I do this?
A: Yes. The POM-300 allows the user to set the length of an averaging queue, which will filter much of the noise to provide a steady
average reading.
Q: I need to make measurements in a fairly dark room. Does the POM-300 have a backlit display?
A: Yes. The backlight can be easily turned on or off. It can also be set to automatically turn off after a user-selectable time period has
passed.
Q: How long will the rechargeable battery last between charges?
A: The POM-300 can be run for up to 300 hours on a single charge. Using the backlight continuously will increase the power
consumption and drain the battery faster. For maximum battery life, the backlight should only be turned on when it is required.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
HIGH POWER FIBER OPTIC PATCHCORDS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unique connector design minimizes thermal damage
Multimode, singlemode, and polarization maintaining fiber types
Operating wavelengths from 200nm to 2000nm
2 micron to 1500 micron diameter core sizes
Low and high numerical aperture fibers
Anti-reflection coatings available
Armored cabling for maximum safety
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Materials processing
Laser cutting and welding
High power spectroscopy
Non-linear optics
Laser surgery
Light detection and ranging (LIDAR)
High Power Patchcords
Product Description:
OZ Optics produces fiber optic patchcords specifically for high power
applications. These patchcords feature special high power fibers, carefully prepared fiber endfaces, and specially designed fiber optic connectors to ensure
maximum power handling for your application.
In standard connectors the fibers are glued into place, and the fiber is polished
flush with the connector surface. When used with high power lasers, heat
generated at the tip of the fiber causes the surrounding epoxy to break down
and give off gases. These gases in turn burn onto the tip of the fiber, causing
catastrophic damage to the fiber and perhaps the entire system. Our
connectors feature an air-gap design, where the fiber extends into free space by
1.1mm to 1.5mm, providing an epoxy-free region where thermal energy can be
safely dissipated without burning the surrounding material. Standard connectors based on SMA 905 and FC connector designs are offered.
A unique feature of the FC connector design is that it features Adjustable Focus.
A special connector allows one to adjust the distance the ferrule and fiber
protrudes from the FC connector housing. This allows one to precisely position
the fiber tip in free space, making it ideal for laser to fiber coupling.
High Power SMA Connector
In addition to patchcords, OZ Optics features high power laser to fiber delivery
systems, optimized to work with our patchcords for maximum laser coupling.
Our engineers have extensive working knowledge with both continuous output
(CW) and pulsed laser applications, and can help you select the best system for
your application. Contact OZ Optics for further assistance.
High Power Adjustable Focus FC Connector
DTS0037
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
01-Oct-2004
1
Key
Strain Relief
Focus Adjustment
Ferrule
Motion
Fiber
1.1mm
Protected
Fiber
Nut
Figure 1: High Power SMA Connector Design
Focus Lock
Figure 2: High Power Adjustable Focus
FC Connector Design
Ordering Information for Standard Parts:
Bar Code
16244
Part Number
QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-200/240-3-2
16974
QMMJ-5HP5HP-UVVIS-200/240-3AS-4
9467
QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-400/430-3-3
17449
QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-550/600-3-2
9045
QMMJ-5HP5HP-UVVIS-550/600-3-3
14989
QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-940/1000-3AS-1
17665
QMMJ-A3HP3S-UVVIS-25/125-3-2
Description
2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 200/240 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord,
terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends.
4 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled, 200/240 high powered multimode
UVVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends.
3 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 400/430 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord,
terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends.
2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 550/600 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord,
terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends.
3 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 400/430 high powered multimode UVVIS fiber patchcord,
terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends.
1 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled, 940/1000 high powered multimode
IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends.
2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, UVVIS 25/125 MM fiber patchcord, terminated with an
adjustable high power air gap FC/PC connector on one end and with a super FC/PC connector
on the other end.
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A customer needs a high power patchcord to transmit 150 Watts of light with a 1064nm wavelength. Reviewing table 5 of the standard tables
shows that there is a fiber with a 550 micron core, 600 micron cladding that can handle up to 230 Watts of power. Because the fiber is a large
core multimode fiber he elects to use high power SMA connectors. The patchcord can be any length or cable type.
Bar Code
17449
Part Number
QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-550/600-3-2
Description
2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 550/600 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber
patchcord, terminated with High Power Air Gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends.
2
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1. What wavelength of light will you be transmitting through the fiber?
2. Are you working with a pulsed or continuous source?
3. If continuous, what is the output power from your source, in watts?
4. If pulsed, what are the pulse energies (in mJ), pulse duration (in nsec), and repetition rate?
5. Do you need multimode, singlemode, or polarization maintaining fiber?
6. If multimode, do you need graded index or step index fiber?
7. What fiber core/cladding size do you prefer?
8. What should the numerical aperture of the fiber be?
9. How long should the patchcord be, in meters?
10. What type of connectors do you need on each end?
11. What type of cabling do you need?
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will
need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be carefully explained in
your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Description
Part Number
High Power Fiber Optic Patchcord
FMJ - XY - W - a/b - JD - L-(A)
F = Fiber Type:
QM = High power multimode fiber
QS = High power singlemode fiber
QP = High power polarization maintaining
fiber
X,Y = Input and Output Connector Types:
5HP = High power SMA 905
A3HP = High power adjustable FC
X
= No connector
See table 6 of the standard tables for
other connector types
W = Wavelength in nm:
See tables 1 and 2 of the standard tables
for standard singlemode and PM fiber
operating wavelengths.
For multimode fibers specify either IRVIS
for visible and infrared applications
(400-2000nm), or UVVIS for
ultraviolet and visible applications
(200-700nm).
A = Alignment (Polarization maintaining
patchcords only)
0 = unaligned and rotatable
1 = slow axis of the fiber aligned with
respect to the key and locked
L = Patchcord length, in meters
JD = Jacket Diameter
3 = 3mm OD PVC loose tube with Kevlar
3A = 3mm OD armored
3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored
5A = 5mm OD armored
5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored
See table 7 of the standard tables for drawings
a/b = Fiber core and cladding diameters, in
microns: See tables 1 to 5 of the
standard tables for standard fiber sizes.
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A customer needs a high power patchcord to transmit 20 Watts of light at a 1064nm wavelength. He requires the smallest available fiber with a
numerical aperture of 0.22 or lower that will transmit this much power. Reviewing table 5 of the standard tables shows that there is a fiber with
a 200 micron core, 240 micron cladding that can handle up to 30 Watts of power. Because the fiber is a large core multimode fiber he elects to
use high power SMA connectors. The patchcord needs to be 5 meters long, with 3mm diameter stainless steel armored cable for protection.
Part Number
QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-200/240-3AS-5
Description
5 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled 200/240 high powered multimode
IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both
ends.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
HIGH POWER LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS WITH TEMPERATURE CONTROL
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Very High Power Handling
High Resolution
Wide Range of Lenses
Rugged, Stable Design
Built-In Peltier Cooler and Fan
Temperature Sensor and Safety Interlock
APPLICATIONS:
•
•
•
•
•
Laser Welding and Cutting And Marking
Medical, Chemical, and Pharmaceutical Sensors
High Power Laser Physics
High Power Spectroscopy
OEM Laser Systems
SPECIFICATIONS:
•
Coupling Efficiency:
Typically >55% for singlemode
and polarization maintaining
fibers, >80% for multimode fibers
•
Backreflection:
-14dB for receptacle style couplers
using flat finish connectors
-60dB for receptacle style couplers
using angle finish connectors
-40dB or -60dB for pigtailed source
couplers
•
Polarization Extinction Ratio:
>20dB
25dB, 30dB versions are also
available
•
Available Wavelengths:
180 - 2000nm
•
Power Handling:
Up to 5 Watts CW for singlemode
applications
Over 100 Watts CW for multimode
applications. Contact OZ for
Pulsed Laser power handling
specifications
ORDERING INFORMATION:
HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH-TE
Receptacle Code:
3 for FC, Super FC or Ultra FC
3A for Angled FC/PC
3AF for Flat Angled FC
5 for SMA 905
8 for AT&T-ST
8U for Ultra AT&T-ST
SC for SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other
connectors.
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 633 for 633nm)
Add - DR to the part number if a TE driver is required.
Add - PS to the part number if a Power Supply is required.
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Laser Head Adaptor:
1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor
2 for Disk Adaptor with 4 holes on a 1”
square
11 for Post Mount Adaptor
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other
adaptors.
Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for NonContact couplers with receptacles in the Laser to
Fiber Coupler Application Notes
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
HIGH POWER MULTI-MODE INDUSTRIAL DIODE LASERS
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 90 W output power
CW and pulsed operation
Top-hat output profile
Built-in red aiming beam option
Compact, air cooled package
Maintenance free operation
Pump laser diodes with lifetimes > 200,000 hours
High electrical-to-optical efficiency
RS232, USB, or analog control interfaces
Hight performance-to-cost ratio
Custom design flexibility
High Power Multi-Mode Industrial Diode Laser
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Heat treatment
Plastic welding
Cutting
Drilling and trimming
Soldering
Laser pumping
Medicine
ry
na
mi
eli
Pr
Our Diode Laser Sources (DLS) consist of a series of single-emitter laser
diodes combined into a single delivery fiber to provide up to 90 watts of
CW laser light through a multimode fiber. Available as either a turnkey,
stand-alone system, or as an OEM module, these sources deliver a beam
directly to the work site through a metal-shielded multi-mode fiber cable
terminated by a standard connector. Optional collimators and focuser
accessories convert the output from the fiber into either a collimated
beam or focused spot. Output beam diameters as large as 10 mm can be
provided, while focuser spots as small as 100 microns can be produced
with working distances as long as 100 mm for convenient use. A built-in
red aiming laser diode can be added as an option, allowing one to easily
aim the beam to the desired target. The output light immediately exiting
the fiber has a round top-hat beam profile, which provides uniform heat
distribution.
DTS0111
The all-fiber configuration of these sources provides a
robust, monolithic design with no optical parts to align or
stabilize, no need for maintenance parts or materials,
and the ability to operate under high shock, vibration
and dusty conditions. These laser systems are
completely sealed and will provide high performance
and reliability. Systems include RS-232 or USB
communication interfaces as well as analog signals to
allow users to easily integrate the fiber laser into their
setup. They require only standard wall plug power line
and will operate immediately. OEM modules offer analog
control of the laser power, pump laser diode currents
and temperature.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
26-May-05
1
Standard Product Specifications:
Parameters
Unit
Mode of operation1
Value
CW
Nominal output power
W
4-90
Peak wavelength
nm
915±10 or 975±10
Output power control
%
Long term output power stability
10-100
<2% over 5 Hours
Emission linewidth (FWHM)
nm
<10
Pump laser diode lifetimes
hours
Output fiber length
m
>40,000 standard,
>200,000 optional
550/600 micron core/cladding, 0.22 NA standard.
Other sizes, numerical apertures, available on request.
0.5-50
Operating voltage (AC)
V
100/120 or 200/240
mm
50 or 60 Hz
TBD
Output fiber type
Dimensions2
Weight
kg
Cooling
TBD
forced air
Operating Temperature
°C
+5 to +45
Storage Temperature
°C
-30 to +70
Humidity
%
5 to 95, non-condensing
1
2
Can be 100% amplitude modulated up to 50 kHz, single shot, repetitively pulsed or externally TTL modulated
Lasers can be provided as either an OEM module, a bench-top unit or in a 19" rack-mountable case
Safety Features:
Feature
Description
Error interlock input
Disables the laser operation when open, requiring a restart to restore operation.
Remote stop
Remote warning out
Disables laser operation when open, without requiring a restart to restore operation.
Normally closed, opens if either the error interlock or remote stop inputs are opened
Front panel key switch
Power on indicator
Emission indicator
Error Indicator
Key is required to turn on the laser
Indicates that the source is turned on.
Indicates laser light is being emitted by the unit.
On when laser output has been disabled by any internal or external error condition.
Ordering information:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most
manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our
standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than
normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These
points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible.
2
Questionnaire:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What is your preferred operating wavelength?
What are your minimum optical power requirements?
What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or a bench top unit?
What sort of connector do you want on the output fiber?
What are your needs with respect to fiber type, length, and connector?
What sort of control interface will you use?
Do you need to collimate or focus the light from the fiber?
Description
Part Number
Diode Laser Source
DLS-N-W-a/b-M-X-JD-L-P-I
N = Package style
1 for Bench Top unit
2 for 19" Rack mount
3 for OEM Module
W = Output Wavelength, in nm
915 for 915 ± 10 nm
975 for 975 ± 10 nm
I = Control Interface
R = RS232
U = USB
A = Analog Control
P = Maximum output power, in Watts
L = Fiber length, in meters
1 meter is standard
JD = Jacket Size
3AS (3mm OD stainless steel armored
cable) standard.
See table 7 of the standard tables for
other jacket sizes.
a/b = fiber size: Core/cladding diameters, in microns
550/600 is standard
200/240, 365/400, and 940/1000 options
available
X = Connector Type:
5HP for High Power SMA Connector
A5HPM for mechanically cleaved high
power air-gap SMA Connector
A5HPL for laser conditioned high power
air-gap SMA Connector
Note: Contact OZ for information on
available collimator and focuser options.
Standard Accessories:
Bar Code
2737
2736
Part Name
Description
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord
POWER CORD - UK
UK power cord
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
HIGH POWER PULSED FIBER SOURCES
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Peak powers up to 20 kW
Average output power from 20 mW to 2 W
Output wavelengths of 1.07 µm or 1.55 µm
Adjustable pulse durations, repetition rates
Gaussian beam profiles
Compact, air cooled package
Maintenance free operation
High electrical-to-optical efficiency
RS232, USB, or analog control interfaces
High performance-to-cost ratio
Custom design flexibility
ry
ina
lim
e
Pr
Pulsed Fiber Source in OEM Module Package
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Spectroscopy
Lidar
Range finding
Nonlinear Optics
Free-Space communication
Material processing
R&D
OZ Optics' Pulsed Fiber Sources (PFS) are a series of compact turnkey
systems or OEM modules based on a highly reliable masteroscillator/power-amplifier (MOPA) design, to deliver multi-kilowatt level
peak powers with average output powers of up to 2 W. The all-fiber
configuration provides a robust, monolithic design with no optical parts to
align or stabilize, and no need for maintenance parts or materials. The
sources can operate under high shock, vibration, or dusty conditions. PFS
systems have RS 232 or analog interfaces, to allow you to integrate them
into your setup.
Standard Product Specifications:
Parameters
Unit
Value
Average output power1
W
0.02 to 2
Peak power
kW
Up to 20
nm
1025-1090 or 1530-1590
Wavelength range
2
Pulse width (FWHM)
Repetition rate
ns
5 to 100
kHz
Up to 100
Data input
Operating voltage: (AC or DC)
Dimensions
Weight
Standard TTL level input
V
mm
100/120 or 200/240,
50 or 60 Hz AC
or +5 to +28 DC
TBD
kg
TBD
Cooling Method
forced air
Operating Temperature
°C
0 to +50
Storage Temperature
°C
-30 to +70
Operating Humidity
%
5 to 95, non-condensing
1
Other output powers available
2
Other wavelengths near 1 µm, 1.5 µm or 2 µm are available, with different specifications.
DTS0109
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
26-May-05
1
Safety Features:
Feature
Description
Error interlock input
Disables the laser operation when open, requiring a restart to restore operation.
Remote stop
Remote warning out
Disables laser operation when open, without requiring a restart to restore operation.
Normally closed, opens if either the error interlock or remote stop inputs are opened
Front panel key switch
Power on indicator
Emission indicator
Error Indicator
Key is required to turn on the laser
Indicates that the source is turned on.
Indicates laser light is being emitted by the unit.
On when laser output has been disabled by any internal or external error condition.
Packaging Options:
All PFS units can be supplied in either a bench top unit, a 19" rack-mount case, or OEM module. Mil-Spec watertight electrical interface
connectors are available for OEM modules.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In certain cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation,
so your decision will be as well-informed as possible.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1. What is your preferred operating wavelength?
2. What are your minimum optical power requirements?
3. What requirements do you have with regards to pulse duration and repetition rate?
4. What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or an OEM module?
5. What sort of connector do you want on the output fiber?
6. What sort of control interface will you use?
7. What is the available supply voltage?
Description
Part Number
PFS-N-W-a/b-F-X-JD-L-P-PW-R-I
Pulsed Fiber Source
N = Package style
1 for Bench Top unit
2 for 19" Rack mount
3 for OEM Module
W = Output Wavelength, in microns
1.0 for 1.03-1.09µm
1.5 for 1.53-1.59µm
a/b = fiber size: Core/cladding diameters, in microns
6/125 for 1 micron wavelengths
9/125 for singlemode fiber at 1.5µm
wavelengths
8/125 for PM fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths
F = Fiber type:
S = singlemode fiber
P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber
X = Connector Type:
3S = Super FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/PC
5 = SMA 905
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
E = E2000
EA = Angled E2000
See table 6 of the standard tables for
other connector types.
I = Control Interface
R = RS232
U = USB
A = Analog Control
R = Repetition rate in kHz
PW = Pulse width in ns
P = Maximum average output power, in milliwatts
L = Fiber length, in meters
1 meter is standard
JD = Jacket Size
3AS (3mm OD stainless steel
armored cable) standard.
See table 7 of the standard tables
for other jacket sizes.
Note: Contact OZ for information on
available collimator and focuser
options.
Standard Accessories:
Bar Code
2737
2736
Part Name
Description
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord
POWER CORD - UK
UK power cord
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
HIGH POWER SINGLEMODE INDUSTRIAL Yb FIBER LASER
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 50 W output power
Nearly perfect Gaussian Beam quality
1040 to 1100 nm fixed wavelength
Compact, air cooled package
Maintenance free operation
Pump laser diodes feature lifetimes > 200,000 hours
High electrical-to-optical efficiency
RS232, USB, or analog control interfaces
Linear output polarization optional
High performance-to-cost ratio
Custom design flexibility
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Marking
Micromachining
Precision cutting and welding
Drilling and trimming
High resolution soldering
Non-linear converter pumping
Graphic imaging
High Power Singlemode Fiber Laser Module
ry
na
mi
eli
Pr
OZ Optics offers a series of compact, diode-pumped single-mode
Ytterbium Fiber Lasers (YFL) in either a turnkey system or as an
OEM module, capable of providing up to 50 W of CW near
diffraction limited (M2 < 1.1) 1.08 um laser light. The YFL fiber
laser delivers a beam directly to the work site through a metalshielded singlemode fiber cable terminated by a standard
connector. Optional collimators and focuser accessories convert
the output from the fiber into either a collimated beam or focused
spot. Collimated beam diameters can range from 0.3 mm to over
7.5 mm, while focusers can produce circular spots as small as a
few microns in diameter, with long working distances to the work
piece.
DTS0110
The all-fiber configuration of these sources provides a robust,
monolithic design with no optical parts to align or stabilize, no
need for maintenance parts or materials, and the ability to
operate under high shock, vibration and dusty conditions. The
laser systems have a very high reliability which can not be
achieved by other solid state or gas laser systems. YFL systems
have RS-232, USB, or analog interfaces to allow you to
integrate them easily into your setup. They require only standard
wall plug electrical power and activate immediately. YFL
modules provide analog outputs for monitoring laser power,
pump laser diode currents, and operating temperature.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
26-May-05
1
Standard Product Specifications:
Parameters
Unit
Mode of operation1
Value
CW
Nominal output power
W
1-50
Peak wavelength
nm
1040-1100
%
20-100 for <5 W modules
10-100 for >5 W modules
<2% over 5 Hours
Pump laser diode lifetimes
hours
Output linewidth (FWHM)
nm
>40,000 standard,
>200,000 optional
1
2
Output power control
Long term output power stability
Output polarization
Random3
Output fiber length
m
Operating voltage (AC)
V
1 standard
0.5-20 custom
100 to 120 or 200 to 240
mm
50/60 Hz
TBD4
kg
TBD
Dimension
Weight
Cooling
forced air
Operating Temperature
°C
+5 to +45
Storage Temperature
°C
-30 to +70
Humidity
%
5 to 95, non-condensing
Can be 100% amplitude modulated up to 50 kHz. Pulse mode emission available through TTL pulsed input.
Other wavelengths near 1 µm, 1.5 µm or 2 µm are available, with different specifications.
3Linearly polarized versions using polarization maintaining fibers are available as an option.
4Lasers can be provided as either a bench-top unit or in a 19" rack-mountable case
1
2
Safety Features:
Feature
Description
Error interlock input
Disables the laser operation when open, requiring a restart to restore operation.
Remote stop
Remote warning out
Disables laser operation when open, without requiring a restart to restore operation.
Normally closed, opens if either the error interlock or remote stop inputs are opened
Front panel key switch
Power on indicator
Emission indicator
Error Indicator
Key is required to turn on the laser
Indicates that the source is turned on.
Indicates laser light is being emitted by the unit.
On when laser output has been disabled by any internal or external error condition.
Ordering information:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most
manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our
standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than
normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These
points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible.
2
Questionnaire:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What is your preferred operating wavelength?
What are your minimum optical power requirements?
What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or a bench top unit?
What sort of connector do you want on the output fiber?
What are your needs with respect to fiber type, length, and connector?
What sort of control interface will you use?
Do you need to collimate or focus the light from the fiber?
Description
Part Number
Ytterbium Fiber Laser
YFL-N-W-a/b-F-X-JD-L-P-I
N = Package style
1 for Bench Top unit
2 for 19" Rack mount
3 for OEM Module
W = Output Wavelength, in microns
1.0 for 1.04-1.10µm
a/b = fiber size: Core/cladding diameters, in microns
6/125 for 1 micron wavelengths
9/125 for singlemode fiber at 1.5µm
wavelengths
8/125 for PM fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths
F = Fiber type:
S = singlemode fiber
P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber
X = Connector Type:
3HP for High Power FC Connector
A3HPM for mechanically cleaved high
power air-gap FC Connector
A3HPL for laser conditioned high power
air-gap FC Connector
I = Control Interface
R = RS232
U = USB
A = Analog Control
P = Maximum output power, in watts
L = Fiber length, in meters
1 meter is standard
JD = Jacket Size
3AS (3mm OD stainless steel armored
cable) standard.
See table 7 of the standard tables for
other jacket sizes.
Note: Contact OZ for information on
available collimator or focuser options
Standard Accessories:
Bar Code
2737
2736
Part Name
Description
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord
POWER CORD - UK
UK power cord
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
INTELLIGENT TUNABLE LASER DIODE SOURCE
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
User tunable wavelength
User controllable power level
Excellent power and wavelength stability over wide operating temperature
Very short warm-up time
Serial port for computer control
Small size, low cost
Applications:
•
•
•
•
DWDM network testing
Component testing
Instrument wavelength and power calibration
General lab use
Y
AR T
N
I
E
LIM SHE
E
PR ATA
D
Product Description:
The Tunable Laser Diode Source from OZ Optics is a compact optical source
providing a user controllable wavelength and output power level. Using a unique
temperature compensation system, the source is able to provide excellent stability in
both wavelength and power. Unlike many sources that are accurate at only the
calibration temperature, OZ Optics' tunable laser is designed to maintain high
accuracy over a wide range of ambient temperatures. This makes it an ideal source
for use in environments where the room temperature is not precisely controlled.
Tunable Laser Diode Source
Unlike conventional sources that may require half an hour to warm up, the unique
design of this source allows the device to achieve stable operation within seconds of
being turned on. This saves time and effort for technicians in the field or on the
production floor.
In DWDM applications, precise wavelength control is essential for obtaining accurate
test measurements. With wavelength accuracy at the picometer level, the OZ tunable
source is able to meet these demanding requirements. While the operating
wavelength of most laser diodes is dependent on the current through the laser, the
design of OZ Optics' tunable laser will automatically compensate for changes in
output power to restore the wavelength to its desired value.
DWDM applications for the metro marketplace require lasers operating at precise
wavelengths in order to ensure that light intended for one channel does not interfere
with adjacent channels. The precise wavelength control of the Intelligent Tunable
Laser Diode Source allows one to replace an array of specific-wavelength sources
with a single tunable source. By tuning the source, one can set the source to the
specific channel required. OZ Optics also makes banks of 4 to 8 tunable laser
modules for OEM applications. Each laser in a bank can be individually tuned to
cover any of up to 10 channels (at 50 GHz spacing).
Not only does the Tunable Source offer accurate wavelength control, it also provides
excellent power level control and stability. Power level accuracy is better than 1%,
over a wide range of temperatures and wavelengths, with stability of better than 0.01
dB. With specifications like these, the Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source is well
suited to countless applications where stability, accuracy, and reliability are required.
For more information on tunable laser diode products, contact OZ Optics.
DTS0090
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
02/20/04
1
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
20405
TL-100-3A-1550-2-1-D
4572
GPIB-RS232
Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector,
1550nm center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range using a DFB laser, with 1 mW
output power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North
American power cord included. (Other power cords are available separately.
See below.)
RS232 to GPIB Adapter
4571
GPIB-CABLE-2
GPIB Cable, 2m long.
2736
POWER CORD - UK
POWER CORD for UK
2737
POWER CORD - EUROPE
POWER CORD for Europe
8122
SMJ-3A3A-1300/1550-9/125-3-1
1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 1300/1550nm 9/125 SM fiber patchcord,
terminated with angled FC/PC connectors on both ends.
Standard Product Specifications:
Center Wavelength
1550
nm
Wavelength Tuning Range
±2
nm
Wavelength Accuracy
± 0.004
nm
Wavelength Resolution
0.001
nm
Wavelength Response Time
30 (typical)
Seconds, from minimum wavelength to maximum wavelength.
Output Power
1
mW
Power Dynamic Range
20
dB
Power Stability
± 0.005
dB
Power Accuracy
5
%
Power Resolution
0.001
dB
Power Response Time
2 (typical)
Seconds, from minimum specified power to maximum specified
power.
Connector
Angled FC\APC
Remote Communications Interface
RS232
Power Requirements
120 to 240(@50 - 60 Hz)
Volts. Universal AC/DC adaptor included.
Operating Temperature Range
15 to 35
°C
Storage Temperature Range
-30 to 60
°C
Warm up time
30
Seconds. Limited by slew rate of wavelength.
Dimensions
15
60 x 90 x 190
Seconds to stable power. Limited by boot-up time
mm, including protective boot.
Weight
0.5
kg
Storage Humidity
<90%
RH, non-condensing
2
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
A customer in Europe wants to use a tunable laser in order to test the spectral characteristics of DWDM optical components at different
wavelengths around 1550 nm. His test jig has an angled FC/PC connector. The power level must be adjustable over the range of 50 microwatts
to 1 milliwatt. The customer would like to be able to use a tunable source directly, or operate it under computer control for automated testing.
The standard Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source offered by OZ Optics will fulfill the requirements. In addition, the customer should order
a power cord for use in Europe. He may also wish to order a patchcord to connect the source to his test jig. The complete list of parts that he
would order is shown below:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
20405
TL-100-3A-1550-2-1-D
Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 1550nm
center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range using a DFB laser, with 1 mW output
power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North American
power cord included.
2737
POWER CORD - EUROPE
POWER CORD for EUROPE
8122
SMJ-3A3A-1300/1550-9/125-3-1
1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 1300/1550nm 9/125 SM fiber patchcord,
terminated with angled FC/PC connectors on both ends.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
What
What
What
What
What
What
is the desired center wavelength?
is the required tuning range?
is the maximum power required?
is the minimum power that you require?
type of optical receptacle do you need on the source?
type of laser diode do you need?
Ordering Information for Custom Parts:
Description
Part Number
Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source
X:
W:
Output Connector Codes:
3S=Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
LCA=Angled LC
Center Wavelength in nanometers:
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
TL-100-X-W-R-P-L
L
Type of Laser Diode:
F=Fabry-Perot
D=DFB (Distributed Feedback)
(Recommended)
P
Maximum Optical Power in milliwatts:
(Example: 10 for 10 milliwatts.)
R
Tuning Range in nanometers from the
center wavelength:
(Example: 1 for ± 1 nm range.)
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts
A customer in North America needs to test the wavelength sensitivity of some DWDM components over the range of 1532 nm to 1536 nm, at
a power level in the range of 500 microwatts to 5 milliwatts. He requires an angled FC connector on his source. He can meet these
requirements with the following:
Part Number
Description
TL-100-3A-1534-2-5-D
Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 1534 center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range,
with 5 mW output power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North American power cord
included.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
FIBER OPTIC ISOLATORS
Isolators are optical devices that allow light to be
transmitted in one direction only. They are most often used
to prevent any light reflected back down the fiber from
entering the source, thus preventing any feedback
problems from occurring.
The simplest type of isolator consists of a polarizer
followed by a quarter wave plate. Such a device will block
any simple reflections provided that the output polarization
from the quarter wave plate is not modified by other optical
elements. Unfortunately, this is rarely the case in fiber
optic systems. A much better type of isolator uses
polarizers with a Faraday rotator to block the return light.
This type of isolator blocks all types of polarization, and
thus makes a much higher quality isolator. This is the type
of isolator used by OZ Optics. With this type of isolator,
isolation levels of 35dB can be achieved for 514 to 1064nm
wavelengths, and 42dB for 1300 and 1550nm
wavelengths. Furthermore, isolation levels of 60dB can be
achieved for 1300nm and 1550nm by cascading two
isolators together.
By using a patented tilt alignment technique, OZ Optics
has solved the problem of using isolators with fibers. Input
light from a laser, laser diode, or optical fiber is first
collimated (if necessary), then transmitted through the
isolator. A focusing lens on the output end of the isolator
then couples the light into the output fiber.
Because Faraday isolators use polarizers on the input end
as well as the output end, the transmission level through
the isolator depends on the input polarization. For
maximum transmission, the input light should be linearly
polarized, with the polarization axis aligned with the
transmission axis of the polarizers. If the source is
randomly polarized, then at least fifty percent of the light
will be lost at the input.
Because the transmission level through the isolator is
polarization sensitive, one has to be careful when using
singlemode fibers on the input end of the isolator.
Singlemode fibers do not maintain polarization. Instead, if
linearly polarized light is launched into singlemode fiber,
then any bends or stresses in the fiber will change the
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specification without prior notice.
output polarization state. This may cause intensity
changes in the isolator output.
There are four basic techniques to avoid this stability
problem. The simplest technique is to attach the isolator
directly onto the polarized source. This technique is the
most cost effective. By eliminating the need for an input
fiber in the system, the overall coupling efficiency will be
greatest. A second technique is to use a polarization
maintaining (PM) fiber between the isolator and the source
instead of an ordinary singlemode fiber. To work properly,
the polarization axis of the PM fiber must be aligned with
both the polarization axis of the source and the polarization
axis of the isolator. A third method is to use a polarization
controller on the input end of the fiber, and change the
input polarization state entering the fiber until the output
transmission is maximized. Finally, one could use a
polarization insensitive isolator, now offered by OZ Optics.
This type of isolator uses a beam splitter to divide the light
into two orthogonal polarizations. Each polarization is then
sent through a separate isolator. The two output beams
from the isolators are then recombined, and focused into
the output fiber. This type of isolator is much more
expensive than a standard isolator.
Since the whole purpose of an isolator is to prevent
reflected light from re-entering the source, it is important to
minimize backreflection from the input end of the isolator.
For this reason, we strongly recommend against using
isolators with a female receptacle on the input end. The
receptacle itself is a common source of backreflection.
Instead, use fiber pigtails or angled connectors such as
APC connectors at the input end..
In fiber to fiber pigtailed isolators, backreflections are
reduced by polishing the fiber ends at an angle, and
positioning them off-center with respect to the collimating
lens axis. In laser diode to fiber isolators, it is done by
positioning the diode off-center with respect to the
collimating lens axis. This will cause the collimated output
beam from the laser diode to emerge at a slight angle
before entering the isolator. In both cases, the tilt
adjustment technique is used to compensate for the offset
on the input ends, thus ensuring minimum losses.
OZ Optics can provide completely packaged isolator
systems for different wavelengths. In addition, OZ Optics
can provide components to allow the customer to do his
own laser or laser diode packaging with an isolator. If the
customer wishes to do this, then it is recommended that
the customer purchases an alignment kit. This kit includes
a centering lens, multimode fiber, and video instructions on
how to package an isolator. Part number: ALIGN-0X
SPECIFICATIONS:
Isolation:
35dB for 514 to 1064nm wavelengths. 42dB or 60dB for 1300nm and 1550nm. 42dB for polarization
independent isolators.
Insertion Loss:
Typically 0.6dB plus isolator loss. Total loss is typically 1.2dB for 514 to 1064nm isolators, 0.8dB
for 42dB 1300 or 1550nm isolators, and 1.4dB for 60dB cascaded 1300 or 1550nm isolators.
Backreflection:
Typically 40dB for pigtail style 42dB isolators. 60dB for pigtail style 60dB isolators.
Available Wavelengths: 500-1550 nm.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Part Number
Description
FOI-01-1X-W-a/b-F-LB-Y-JD-L-I
FOI-02-0X-W-F-I
FOI-11-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-I
FOPI-11-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-I
FOI-12-01-W-a/b-F-LB-Y-JD-L-I
ALIGN-0X
Fiber isolator with a pigtailed fiber on the input, and a female receptacle on the output.
Laser to fiber coupler with an isolator and an output female connector receptacle.
Pigtail style fiber to fiber isolator.
Pigtail style fiber to fiber polarization independent isolator, with -45dB backreflection.
Pigtail style laser to fiber coupler with an isolator.
Isolator alignment kit. It includes video instructions, centering lens, wrench, and a
multimode jumper.
Where: X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style couplers with isolators. For pigtail style isolators, it refers
to
the male connector on the fiber end (3 for NTT-FC, 3S for Super FC, 3A for Angled FC, 8 for AT&T-ST, etc.);
W is the isolator operating wavelength in nm;
F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber);
I is the desired isolation level (35, 40, or 60dB. 60dB is available for 1300nm and 1550nm only);
a/b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns;
JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and
5A for 5mm armored cable);
L is the fiber length in meters;
LB is the backreflection for pigtail style isolators (40 or 60dB typically. 60dB is available for 1300 or 1550nm only).
Ordering example: A customer wants a pigtail style fiber to fiber isolator for 1550nm, with better than 60 dB backreflection.
The input and output fibers are polarization maintaining fibers, cabled, and 1 meter long. The input fiber is terminated with an
angled FC connector. The output fiber is terminated with a Super FC connector.
OZ Optics part number: FOI-11-11-1550-9/125-P-60-3A3S-3-1-60.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER DIODE COLLIMATORS
Laser diode collimators are used to collimate the highly
divergent beam that is emitted by a laser diode. It consists
of a laser diode holder, a collimating lens holder, and a
high numerical aperture (NA) collimating lens, with a focal
length f. The lens is housed in a threaded receptacle that
is screwed into the collimating lens holder. By adjusting
the distance between the laser diode and the collimating
lens, one can collimate the laser diode output.
The dimensions of the collimated beam is determined by
two factors - the far field divergence angles θ⊥ and θ||, of
the laser diode being used, and the focal length of the
collimating lens. The collimating beam dimensions are
given by the equations
BD⊥ = 2 × f × sin(θ⊥/2)
BD|| = 2 × f × sin(θ||/2)
Standard focal lengths include f = 1.6mm, 2.0mm, 2.6mm,
3.9mm, and 6.2mm. For information on the diode
characteristics, consult the diode manufacturer for
specifications.
DTS0043
The light from a laser diode is not circularly symmetric.
Instead, the output diverges more in one direction than in
the perpendicular direction. As a result the output beam
from the collimating lens will be elliptical in shape rather
than circular. There are two main methods to correct this
problem. The first is to add a cylindrical lens or
anamorphic prism in front of the diode before collimating it.
A second technique is to couple the light from the laser
diode into a singlemode fiber and then collimate the output
from the fiber. The fiber acts as a spatial filter, providing a
near perfect Gaussian output. Both methods are shown in
the figures at the bottom of this page. Contact OZ Optics
for further information about these techniques.
Laser diode collimators are available in different
diameters. The standard diameter package is 0.79 inches
in diameter. This size fits most diode types. A larger, 1.3
inch diameter housing, is used for large O.D. diodes, such
as H1 packages. A 0.59" diameter housing is available for
diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter or smaller. Smaller
housings with 10mm OD's are available for OEM
applications.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
22-Feb-05
OZ Optics also offers special compact laser diode to
fiber couplers for OEM applications. These packages
have the diode and collimating lens permanently glued
into the same housing. This package features a
compact, rugged housing, at a significant reduction in
cost.
OZ Optics has in stock a selection of laser diodes. OZ
Optics can also supply you with laser diode power
supplies, that operate either from a battery or a DC
voltage source. We can even provide you with
complete miniaturized packaged systems. Contact
OZ Optics for information on what is available.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Note: When ordering, please specify what type of diode you wish to use, along with any diode characteristics that you
know (Wavelength, output power, can size, emitter chip dimensions, divergence angles, distance between the chip and
the window on the package, etc.)
Part Number
Description
HULDO-11-W-f
Laser diode collimator with 1.3" diameter flange.
HULDO-31-W-f
Laser diode collimator with 0.79" diameter flange.
HULDO-41-W-f
Laser diode collimator with 0.59" diameter flange.
HULDO-51-W-f
10mm diameter single piece laser diode collimator.
LDC-21
Collimating lens wrench for standard collimators.
LDC-21A
Collimating lens wrench for large lens collimators.
Where: W is the operating wavelength in nm;
f is the focal length of the collimating lens, in mm, and the lens type. GR denotes graded index lenses,
while AS denotes aspheric lenses. Standard lenses are 1.6GR, 2.0AS, 2.6AS, 3.9AS and 6.2AS.
Other focal lengths are available on request. Contact OZ Optics for details.
Note: Add the term "-LD" to the part number if OZ Optics is to supply the laser diode. Add the term "-PS" to the end
of the part number if OZ Optics is to also include a power supply.
Example: A customer wants a laser diode collimator for a 670nm laser diode, using a 2mm focal length aspheric lens.
The customer also wants the 0.79" package size. The customer is supplying the laser diode and the power supply.
OZ Optics part number: HULDO-31-670-2.0AS
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER DIODE POWER COMBINER
OZ Optics introduces a new coupler designed to combine
two polarized laser diode outputs into a single fiber. The
output fiber can be singlemode, multimode or polarization
maintaining fiber. Fiber-to-fiber polarization combiners /
splitters are also available.
The device utilizes a polarizing beam splitter in reverse, to
act as a combiner. The laser diode outputs are collimated,
and then attached onto the combiner. The collimated laser
diode outputs are rotated until the maximum light comes
out of the splitter / combiner output. The combined beam
is then focused into the output fiber using OZ Optics'
patented tilt adjustment technique.
A second version of the power combiner utilizes a dichroic
splitter instead of a polarization beam splitter to combine
the diode beams. This method has the advantage that the
polarization axes of the two diode beams can be oriented
in the same direction. This is useful when one needs to
launch the two input signals along the same axis of a
polarization maintaining fiber. However, this method is
only possible when the wavelengths of the two diodes differ by at least 40nm.
Laser diode power combiners come in a small, rugged
package and are available either with female receptacles
to accept different connectors (NTT-FC, AT&T-ST, etc.), or
pigtail style, with the fiber directly attached. Pigtail style
combiners are recommended for optimum stability, minimum insertion losses, and low backreflection. Receptacle
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
style systems are best suited for applications where the
output coupler is used with a multimode fiber. If a receptacle style combiner is used with a singlemode fiber, then the
user may have to adjust the alignment to maximize
coupling efficiency. Receptacle style systems with better
repeatability are available, but at the expense of lower
coupling efficiencies.
The coupling efficiency from each diode is about 75-90%
for multimode fibers and 45%-55% for singlemode fibers.
The typical backreflection level returning to the laser diode
is -20dB. Backreflection levels of -25dB, -40dB, and -60dB
are available for pigtail style combiners. This is
accomplished by polishing the fibers at an angle and
positioning the fiber off center with respect to the lens axis.
For -60dB backreflection levels, the fiber ends are AR
coated to reduce reflections. Applications include Erbium
doped fiber amplifiers, coherent telecommunications and
medical surgery.
Oz Optics also supplies laser diode to fiber couplers with
photodiodes. They are available in two configurations. In
one setup, the photodiode acts as a monitor photodiode,
measuring the reference power from the laser diode. The
second setup instead uses the photodiode to detect light
returning from the fiber. Such a setup is also known as an
optical transceiver.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Part Number
Description
ULBS-11X-F-W-PBS
Laser diode polarization power combiner with an output connector receptacle.
ULBS-11P-a/b-F-W-PBS-LB-X-JD-L
Pigtail style laser diode polarization power combiner.
ULBS-12P-a/b-FD-W-S/R-LB-X-JD-L
Laser diode to fiber coupler with a monitor photodiode.
TRBS-12P-a/b-FD-W-S/R-LB-X-JD-L
Laser diode transceiver module.
WDM-11X-F-W1/W2
Connector receptacle style laser diode power combiner with a dichroic splitter.
WDM-11P-a/b-F-W1/W2-LB-X-JD-L
Pigtail style laser diode power combiner using a dichroic splitter.
Where: X is the connector type for receptacle style combiners. For pigtail style combiners, they refer to the male connector
on the fiber end (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST connectors, X for bare fiber, etc.),
a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns,
W,W1,W2 are the diode wavelengths in nm,
S/R is the desired split ratio (50/50 and 90/10 are standard)
F is the output fiber type (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber),
LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB or 60dB for pigtail style systems only).
JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and
5A for 5mm OD armored cable.),
L is the fiber length in meters.
Example: A customer requires a pigtail style power combiner to combine the light from two 670nm laser diodes.
The customer wants low (-40dB) backreflection back into the diodes. The output fiber is a two meter long, 3.0mm O.D
kevlar cabled, 4/125 singlemode fiber, terminated with a male NTT-FC connector.
OZ Optics' part number: ULBS-11P-4/125-S-670-PBS-40-3-3-2.
Example 2: A 90/10 beam splitter is used to split the signal from an 830nm laser diode. Ninety percent of the light is
coupled into a 2 meter long, 3.0mm OD cabled PM fiber, terminated with an FC connector. The remaining 10 percent is
reflected to a monitoring photodiode. The typical backreflection level is 25dB. In this manner, one can independently
monitor the output power emmitted by the laser diode before it enters the fiber.
Oz Optics part number: ULBS-12P-5/125-PD-830-90/10-25-3-3-2.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER DIODE SOURCE – FIBER OPTIC
(SINGLE OR MULTI-WAVELENGTH)
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Single or multi-wavelength sources available
Continuous wave (CW) and waveform modulation
Wide range of connector receptacles available
Optional output power adjustment
Polarization-maintaining, singlemode, or multimode versions available
Low battery indicator
Rugged and compact design
Low cost
User selectable auto turn off mode
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Insertion loss measurement and attenuation measurement
Fiber identification using internal modulated mode
Splicing and connectorization testing
End-to-end short link testing
FTTX/PON
Quality Assurance
Multi-Wavelength Laser Diode Source
Product Description:
OZ Optics produces Fiber Optic Laser Diode Sources in a variety of wavelengths.
The receptacle-style sources are offered with a wide range of receptacles, while the
pigtail-style sources offer the choice of polarization maintaining, singlemode, or multimode fiber output. Each source has a low battery indicator on the front panel.
In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber
structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords.
However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do
carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for
availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build
devices.
The standard source provides continuous waveform output. It can also be pulse
modulated internally at 270 Hz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz.
As an option, OZ Optics can include a blocking-style optical attenuator to adjust the
output power for the FOSS-01 and FOSS-11 models. This method of power
control does not affect the spectral properties of the laser diode output. The FOSS-2N
allows the user to select one of four preset power levels via the keypad.
Single Wavelength Laser Diode Source
with Patchcord
OZ Optics recommends angled connectors for improved stability. For 1300nm and
1550nm wavelengths, an isolator can be added for improved stability. OZ Optics also
manufactures the Highly Stable Laser Diode Source (HIFOSS), which includes a temperature controller and an isolator. See the Highly Stable Laser Diode Source data
sheet for more information on this product.
DTS0019
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Standard Product Specifications:
Parameter
Specifications
Model
Available
FOSS-2N
FOSS-01 and FOSS-11
wavelengths 1
For single wavelength - without isolator
For single wavelength - with isolator
For multi-wavelength - without isolator
532, 635, 655, 670, 685, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
1310, 1550 nm
1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
Wavelength accuracy2
± 5 nm for 635 to 685 nm
± 15 nm for 780 to 1064 nm
± 20 nm for 1310 to 1625 nm
Linewidth2,3
1.5 nm (Typical for 1550 nm)
Available receptacles
Super, Ultra and angled NTT-FC/PC, SC, angled SC, AT&T-ST, LC, MU, 2.5 mm ID
Universal, and 1.25 mm ID Universal
Optical power4
0.8 to 1 mW (Standard, depending on wavelength and laser class)
Optical power
stability 5
± 0.025 dB (Typical)
± 0.05 dB (Typical)
Without isolator
With isolator
Internal modulation
CW, 270 Hz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz square wave
Power supply
Two AA alkaline batteries. Optional
universal 110/220 V AC/DC adapter7
9 V alkaline battery. Optional universal
110/220 V AC/DC adapter7
Dimensions (W x L x H)6
76 x 127 x 25.4 mm (3 x 5 x 1 in.)
72 x 110 x 25 mm (2.75 x 4.6 x 1 in.)
-10 to +50 °C
-20 to +60 °C
-10 to +50 °C
-30 to +60 °C, at 95% humidity, noncondensing
Weight (including batteries)
225 g (0.5 lb.)
200 g (0.45 lb.)
Laser classification based on IEC 60825-1
Class 1
Class 1, 2 or 3b
Temperature Range
Operating
Storage
Note:
1Typical wavelengths shown. For other wavelengths, please contact OZ Optics.
2Depends on Laser diode specification.
3For narrow linewidth, please contact OZ Optics.
4Higher power is available upon request. Please contact OZ Optics.
5Over 6 hours, at 23 °C, after 30 minutes warm up, tested at 1550 nm with super FC/PC receptacle, 9/125 singlemode fiber.
6Dimensions and weight may change for special order. Does not include pouch and connectors.
7See Standard Parts for universal 110/220 V AC/DC adapter.
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
1. A customer needs a 1550 nm laser diode source, with 1 mW output power, 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with a super FC/PC
receptacle. He wants an AC adaptor for North America as well.
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
2836
FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1550-S-1
Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mW output, for 9/125
core/cladding, singlemode fiber, with super FC/PC receptacle.
8402
AC-9VDC-NA
Universal 110/220 VAC to 9 VDC power supply adaptor, for North America.
2. A customer wants a pigtail style 635 nm laser diode source, with 1mW output power . Fiber is 4/125 um core/cladding, singlemode, 3 mm
OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable, 1 meter long with super FC/PC connector.
Bar Code
8772
Part Number
FOSS-11-4/125-635-S-1-3S-3-1
Description
Pigtail-style Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 635 nm wavelength, 1 mW
output. Fiber is singlemode, 4/125 core/cladding, 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable, 1 m long, with super FC/PC connector.
3
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so
your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
What
What
What
What
is the wavelength required for the laser diode source?
is required maximum output power of the laser diode source?
type of fiber are you using? (SMF, MMF or PMF)
model source do you need? If Receptacle style, what type? If Pigtail style, what it the fiber length, Jacket OD and connector type?
Receptacle Style FOSS1
FOSS-01-X-a/b-W- F-1(-BL2) (-ISOL3)
F=
X = Receptacle or connector code:4
3S = Standard, Super, or Ultra
NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
8 = AT&T-ST
LC = LC
MU = MU
1.25U=Universal Receptacle for
1.25mm OD ferrule (LC, MU, etc.)
2.5U=Universal Receptacle for
2.5mm OD ferrule (FC, ST, SC, etc.)
Pigtail Style FOSS1
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
W = Wavelength, in nm: 635, 650, 670, 685,
780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310,
1480, 1550,1625
a/b4 = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm
9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber
FOSS-11-a/b-W-F-1-X-JD-L(-BL2) (-ISOL3)
a/b4 = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm
9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber
W =Wavelength, in nm: 635, 650, 670, 685,
780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310,
1480, 1550, 1625
F = Fiber type
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
L = Fiber length, in meters
JD =
Fiber jacket type:4
1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
X = Receptacle or connector code:4
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
8 = AT&T-ST
LC = LC
MU = MU
Note:
1 Standard unit. For Highly Stable Laser Diode Source (HIFOSS), which includes TE cooler and an isolator, please see the Highly Stable Laser
Diode Source data sheet.
2 Add -BL to the part number to add blocking style attenuator to the FOSS.
3 Add -ISOL to the part number to add an isolator (1310nm or 1550nm only. For other wavelengths, order HIFOSS with isolator and TE cooler).
4 See Standard Tables data sheet for fiber sizes, jacket sizes, and other connectors.
4
Description
Single/Multiwavelength Receptacle
Style Laser Diode Source
Part Number
FOSS-2N-X-a/b-W-F-P
P = Output Power in mW:
(0.2 mW, 0.5 mW and 0.9 mW are
standard for infrared wavelengths.)
N = Number of channels:
1 = Single Wavelength Source
2 = Dual Wavelength Source
3 = Triple Wavelength Source
F = Fiber type:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining - Only available
for single wavelength option.
X = Connector type:
3S = Standard, Super, or Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
8 = AT&T-ST
LC = LC
MU = MU
1.25U = Universal receptacle for 1.25 mm OD
ferrule (LC, MU, etc.)
2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5 mm OD
ferrule (FC, ST, SC, etc.)
W = Wavelength, in nm:
For single wavelength sources, the standard
wavelengths are: 532, 635, 655, 670, 685, 780, 810,
830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1490, 1550, and 1625 nm.
For other wavelengths, please contact OZ Optics Ltd.
For multi-wavelength sources, the options are:
1310, 1490, 1550, and 1625 nm. For multiwavelength sources, specify each wavelength
separated by a "/" (Example 1310/1550). Some
combinations of wavelengths may not be available.
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in µm:
9/125 for 1300/1500 nm singlemode fiber.
8/125 for 1550 nm PANDA style PM fiber.
7/125 for 1300 nm PANDA style PM fiber
(See tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet for other values)
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A customer needs a 1550 nm laser diode source, with 1mW output power and isolator, for 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with super
FC/PC receptacle. He wants the output power to be adjustable.
Part Number
FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1550-S-1-BL-ISOL
Description
Fiber Optic Stable Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelengths, 1 mW output, isolator and
blocking attenuator, for 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with super FC/PC receptacle.
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts:
A customer needs to verify the integrity of an optical network using 9/125 SM fiber at 1310, 1480, and 1550 nm. The network uses FC connectors. The customer would like to carry out the tests using 0.5 mW sources. He can do this by ordering the following part:
Part Number
FOSS-23-3S-9/125-1310/1490/1550-S-0.5
Description
Triple Wavelength Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1310, 1490, and 1550 nm wavelengths,
0.5 mW output, for 9/125 µm core/cladding SM fiber with FC receptacle. Uses 2 AA batteries
or optional AC adapter.
5
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER DIODE TO FIBER COUPLERS
OZ Optics offers a complete line of laser diode to fiber
couplers, offering optimum coupling in a small, rugged
package. They may be purchased prealigned, with the
diode already in place, or as a kit that can be assembled
by the customer using their own diode. The complete
assembly procedure is quite straightforward, and can be
done in less than twenty minutes. Assembly and operating
instructions are available in a video cassette, showing the
alignment process. The video is available in both North
America and European (PAL) versions. In addition, a
complete alignment kit is available, which includes the
collimating wrench, multimode fiber assembly, centering
lens, and video instructions.
female receptacle, such as NTT-FC, or AT&T-ST, etc. at
the output end. This allows the user to connect any optical
fiber with a matching male connector to the diode. Pigtail
style laser diode to fiber couplers are also offered, with the
fiber pigtailed directly onto the coupler. Pigtail style laser
diode to fiber couplers provide higher coupling efficiencies
than receptacle style couplers, as well as better stability,
and lower backreflection levels. The output fiber can also
be terminated with different output connectors.
Diode source couplers are available for a variety of diode
case sizes, and for diode wavelengths from less than
630nm to greater than 1550nm. These source couplers
work with multimode, singlemode, and polarization
maintaining fiber. Should the diode ever fail, it can be
easily replaced while using the rest of the coupling optics.
The source coupler can then be realigned for optimum
coupling. This is one of the main advantages of using the
OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique.
Laser diode to fiber couplers are available in different
diameters. The standard diameter package is 0.79 inches
in diameter. This size fits most diode types, and is
available for both receptacle style and pigtail style
couplers. For the best coupling efficiencies choose the
larger, 1.3 inch diameter housing, which supports larger
and higher quality lenses. This housing size is also used
with large diode case sizes, such as H1 package sizes.
For pigtail style source couplers, a smaller 0.59" diameter
housing is available for diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter
or smaller. For diodes with can diameters of 5.6mm or
less, a miniature 0.5" diameter tilt adjustable housing is
possible.
There are two versions of tilt adjustable laser diode to fiber
couplers; receptacle style couplers, and pigtail style
couplers. Connector receptacle style couplers have a
One misconception about tilt adjustable laser diode
couplers is the belief that the number of tilt and
lockingscrews make the coupler sensitive to temperature
1
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
or vibration. In fact, tilt adjustable source couplers can be
used over a temperature range of -25°C to 60°C, and have
been vibration tested. Higher temperature versions are
available on request.
OZ Optics also offers a special, low cost, miniature
pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers for OEM
applications. These packages use just a single lens to
couple light from the laser diode into the fiber. They do not
use OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. This package
features a compact, rugged housing, at a significantly
lower cost. The housing diameter is typically 10mm.
Coupling efficiency into singlemode and multimode fibers is
typically 10 percent and 35 percent, respectively.
A variety of options are available for laser diode to fiber
couplers. One such option is a coupler with a built in
isolator. Isolators can reduce the effects of backreflection
by up to 60dB. This is done by using coated optics and
angled polished fibers. This is very useful for applications
where the intensity and wavelength stability of the output
light from the diode is critical.
Self contained systems are available in both a pocket size
casing, as well as a miniature pen size housing. Both
receptacle style and pigtail style systems are available. OZ
Optics can also provide fiber pigtailed collimators for your
system.
OZ Optics has in stock a selection of laser diodes. In
addition we can package customer specified laser diodes.
OZ Optics also provides laser diode power supplies and
drivers, as well a thermoelectric Peltier coolers. Please
refer to the Fiber Optic Stable Source & TE Cooled Laser
Diode Housing Data Sheet.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Another option for laser diode to fiber couplers is a blocking
screw to attenuate the output beam. This allows the user
to precisely control the output power entering the fiber,
without having to change the diode current. Another option
is laser diode to fiber couplers with polarizer or polarization
Rotator in the middle.
Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler with
Polarization Rotator in the middle
LIGHT SOURCES
OZ Optics also has available self contained laser diode to
fiber delivery systems, with battery operated power
supplies. AC to DC converters are also available. These
systems provide a compact, portable source of light to
attach to an optical fiber for test and measurement
systems. They are used in a variety of applications,
including fault detection, laser acupuncture, fluorescence
measurements, etc.
Laser diode to fiber couplers with tilt adjustment use a two
stage process to couple light from the laser diode into the
fiber. In the first stage, the output light from the diode is
collimated with a collimating lens. The distance between
the diode and the collimating lens is easily adjusted with a
collimator wrench, then locked with a radial set screw. The
collimated beam is then coupled into the fiber with a
second lens, using OZ Optics' patented tilt alignment
technique. The focal lengths of the collimating and
coupling lenses are carefully selected to transform the
optical properties of the laser diode light to match the mode
field pattern of the fiber as closely as possible. Coupling
efficiencies of over 50 percent into singlemode fiber, and
80 percent into multimode fibers, can be achieved with
certain diodes with the correct choice of lenses. Coupling
efficiencies into singlemode fibers better than 80% are
possible with certain diodes by correcting the diode
astigmatism and the ellipticity of the diode output with a
miniature cylindrical type lens. Contact OZ Optics for
further information about this technique.
Before building a laser diode to fiber coupler, OZ Optics
has to choose an appropriate lens combination to
maximize coupling efficiency. To do so, we need to know
the following laser diode characteristics: (1) Diode
wavelength (2) Output power (3) Diode can size (4) Emitter
dimensions (5) Far field divergence angles (6)
Astigmatism. In addition, the diode selected should exhibit
2
good pointing stability over time.
SPECIFICATIONS
Coupling Efficiency:
Backreflection levels:
Wavelength range:
Operating temperature:
Output extinction ratios:
75% to 85% for multimode fibers, 35%-55% for singlemode (SM) or polarization maintaining (PM)
fibers. Coupling efficiencies greater than 75% into SM or PM fibers are also possible for certain
diodes.
Typically -15dB for receptacle style versions, and either -25dB, -40dB, or -60dB for pigtail style
versions. (-60dB is available for 1300nm and 1550nm only.)
600nm to 1600nm.
-20°C to +60°C.
Typically greater than 20dB for PM fibers. 30dB versions are available on request for 1300 and
1550nm only
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering laser diode to fiber couplers, please specify the laser diode characteristics (diode type, angular beam profile,
housing dimensions, etc.). If possible, please fax us the diode manufacturer's specification sheet before ordering. For pigtail
style laser diode to PM fiber couplers please indicate whether you wish to align the slow axis or the fast axis of the PM fiber with
respect to the diode output. The OZ Optics standard is to align the PM fiber such that the diode output is transmitted along the
slow axis of the fiber.
Part Number
HULD-AX-W-F-C
LDPC-0A-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-C
VIDEO-01-NTSC (or PAL)
MMJ-X1-50/125-3-0-1
LDC-21 (or LDC-21A)
ALIGN-0X-NTSC (or PAL)
Where:
Description
Laser diode to fiber source coupler with connector receptacle.
Pigtail style laser diode to fiber source coupler.
Video instructions for using OZ Optics' components. Please indicate whether an
American (NTSC) or European (PAL) standard video is required.
One meter long multimode jumper assembly for performing initial alignment of
singlemode laser to fiber couplers.
Alignment wrench for adjusting the laser diode collimation.
Alignment kit for laser diode to singlemode fiber source couplers, containing a
collimating wrench, a multimode jumper assembly, written instructions, and instructional
video. Please indicate whether an American (NTSC) or European (PAL) standard video
is required.
A is the diameter of the diode package. (Use 1 for the standard 0.79" diameter package size, 2 for the higher
performance 1.3" diameter package, 3 for compact 0.59" diameter, and 4 for the miniature 0.50" diameter. Note that
due to limitations in the size of the diode being used, not all package sizes are available for every diode.)
X is the receptacle type for connector style laser diode to fiber source couplers. For pigtail style laser diode to fiber
couplers, it refers to the male connector on the fiber end (3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC
connectors, etc. Use X for unterminated fibers for pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers.)
W is the laser diode wavelength in nm;
a/b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns;
F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber);
C is the desired coupling efficiency (35%, 45% or 75% typical efficiencies for singlemode couplers, 75% typically for
multimode fibers). Note that due to limitations in the diode optical characteristics, not all of the coupling efficiencies
listed are possible with every diode. Contact OZ Optics for further technical help.
LB is the desired backreflection level for pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers. (25, 40 or 60 dB typically);
JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and
5A for 5mm armored cable);
L is the fiber length in meters;
Options: If OZ Optics is to supply the laser diode, then add the term "-LD" to the part number. If you require a power supply
as well, then add the term "-PS" to the part number. For a blocking screw, add the term "-BL" to the part number. Add “-PO”
to the part number for parts only, if customer wants to do the alignment. Add “-DR” to the part number for laser diode driver
circuit.
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
1. A pigtail style laser diode to fiber coupler is needed to couple light from a 1300nm laser diode into a PM fiber. The output
fiber is to be one meter long, cabled with 3.0mm kevlar cable, and with an NTT-FC connector on the end. The backreflection
level is to be less than 40dB. A coupling efficiency of 45% is desired. The slow axis of the fiber is to be aligned with the
polarization axis of the output light from the diode. The customer wants OZ Optics to supply the laser diode and a power supply
for the diode. OZ Optics' part number: LDPC-01-1300-9/125-P-40-3-3.0-1-45-LD-PS.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER DIODE TO FIBER COUPLER – PIGTAIL STYLE
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
Proven design and manufacture
Variety of standard packaging options
400nm to 1625nm
Single mode, multimode or polarization maintaining fiber
Rugged design
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LDPC-01
Fiber Optic Communications
Optical Alignment Systems
Process Control
Optical Sensor Applications
Medical Apparatus
Imaging Systems
Test and measurement systems
Product Description:
OZ Optics offers a complete line of laser diode to fiber couplers, offering optimum coupling in a small,
rugged package. They may be purchased prealigned, with the diode already in place, or as a kit that
can be assembled by the customer using their own diode. The complete assembly procedure is quite
straightforward, and can be done in less than twenty minutes. A complete alignment kit, which includes
tools and video instructions, is available seperately.
Laser diode source couplers are available for a variety of diode case sizes, and for diode wavelengths
from 400nm to greater than 1650nm. These source couplers work with multimode, singlemode, and
polarization maintaining fiber. One advantage of the design is should the diode ever fail, it can easily
be replaced while reusing the rest of the optics. The device can then be realigned for optimum
coupling. There are two versions of tilt adjustable laser diode to fiber couplers - receptacle style
couplers, and pigtail style couplers. Pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers are offered with the fiber
pigtailed directly onto the coupler. The pigtail style laser diode to fiber coupler provides higher coupling
efficiencies and lower backreflection levels than receptacle style couplers, as well as better stability.
The output fiber can be terminated with different output connectors, as desired.
Laser diode to fiber couplers are available in different diameters. The standard diameter package is
0.79" in diameter. This size fits almost all standard laser diode packages. The larger 1.3" diameter
housing provides best coupling efficiencies as it permits a wider selection of coupling optics. This
housing size is also used with large diode case sizes, such as TO-3 (H1) package sizes. A smaller
0.59" diameter housing is available for diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter or smaller. For diodes with
can diameters of 5.6mm or less, a miniature 0.5" diameter tilt adjustable housing is possible.
LDPC-02
LDPC-03
LDPC-04
One misconception about tilt adjustable laser diode couplers is the belief that the number of tilt and
locking screws make the coupler sensitive to temperature or vibration. In fact, tilt adjustable source
couplers can be used over a temperature range of -25°C to 60°C, and have been vibration tested.
Higher temperature versions are available on request.
OZ Optics also offers a special, low cost, miniature pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers for OEM
applications. These packages use just a single lens to couple light from the laser diode into the fiber.
They do not use OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. This package features a compact, rugged
housing, at a significantly lower cost. The housing diameter is typically 10mm. Coupling efficiency into
singlemode and multimode fibers is typically 10 percent and 35 percent, respectively.
LDPC-05
A variety of options are available for laser diode to fiber couplers. One such option is a coupler with a
built in isolator. Isolators can reduce the effects of backreflection by up to 60dB. This is very useful for
applications where the intensity and wavelength stability of the output light from the diode are critical.
Another option is a blocking screw to attenuate the output beam. This allows the user to precisely
control the output power entering the fiber, without having to change the diode current. Laser diode to
fiber couplers with polarizers or polarization rotators in the middle are also available.
LDPC-06
DTS0063
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Standard Product Specifications:
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A customer needs to couple light from a 1310nm laser diode into a 9/125 SM fiber. They require 35% coupling and want to do the alignment
themselves.
Bar Code
XXXX
Part Number
LDPC-01-1310-9/125-S-40-3S-3-1-35-5LD
9587
ALIGN-01/4-NTSC-IRVIS
Description
1310nm laser diode to SM fiber coupler (33mm OD housing) with a FC
receptacle, 35% coupling efficiency from a 1310nm laser diode into a 9/125,
singlemode fiber.
Alignment kit for laser diode to fiber couplers with 4mm OD pigtails. The kit
includes a collimating wrench; 4mm OD lensed multimode fiber assembly,
instruction manual and an instructional video (NTSC format).
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we
will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
Please fill out the Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler Delivery System Questionnaire, available seperately.
Pigtail Style Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler
A = Package size1: 1
2
3
4
5
6
LDPC-0A-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-C-(OPT)
= 0.79" OD cylindrical housing
= 1.31" OD cylindrical housing
= 0.59" OD cylindrical housing
= 0.50" OD cylindrical housing
= OEM 10mm OD cylindrical housing
= OEM Rt. Angle PCB mountable housing
W =Wavelength2: 400, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 780, 810, 830,
850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625.
a/b = Fiber core/cladding diameters (in µm)
F=
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
LB =Backreflection level: 25 = 25dB return loss
40 = 40dB return loss
60 = 60dB return loss
C = Coupling Efficiency3: 30 = 30%
45 = 45%
75 = 75%
L = Fiber length, in meters
JD = Jacket Diameter:
0.25 = 250µm buffered fiber
0.4 = 400µm buffered fiber
1 = 900µm jacketed fiber
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar etc.
X = Connector Receptacle: 2.5U = 2.5mm
universal receptacle (for FC, ST, or SC).
3 = FC/PC
3S = Super FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/PC
5 = SMA905
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = SCA
1 Note that due to limitations in the size of the laser diode being used, not all package sizes are available for every laser diode.
2 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers toler-
ance. (typically ±5nm to as high as ±30nm).
3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser
diode for every fiber type.
Options: Add "-ISOL" if the laser diode is to be coupled through an optical isolator.
Add "-DR" If OZ Optics is to provide the laser diode driver circuit or module for the laser diode.
Add "-PS" if OZ Optics is to provide the power supply to operate the laser diode driver.
Add "-#LD" if OZ Optics is to provide the laser diode (where # is the LD output power, IE: -5LD).
Add "-BL" If OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the laser diode output power.
Add “-PO” if OZ Optics is to supply parts as a kit, for customer to install the laser diode.
Add “-CSP” for customer supplied laser diodes
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER DIODE TO FIBER DELIVERY SYSTEMS FOR ACUPUNCTURE
OZ Optics introduces a laser diode to fiber
delivery system, housed in a compact, rugged
pocket size housing. It can be either battery
operated, or powered by an optional AC to DC
converter. The system could be used for laser
acupuncture treatments. Users must first
comply with FDA regulations.
The delivery system uses a 635nm visible laser
diode, complete with a drive circuit and power
supply, to couple light into a fiber. A fiber is
attached to the diode, and the output end of the
fiber has a collimating lens attached, to give a
tightly collimated beam. Fiber splitters are also
available, to divide the light from the diode into
multiple output beams.
The diode source comes in an attractive pocket
size housing, complete with an optional belt clip,
to give the operator maximum mobility during
treatment. Delivery systems with up to 25mW
of 635nm output power are available on
request. Contact OZ Optics for further details.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
FODL-23-635-a/b-P
PROBE-a/b-L
AC-9VDC
Description
Pocket size 635nm laser diode delivery system with Super FC/PC receptacle.
Fiber probe with 0.4mm collimating lens.
Universal 110 or 220V AC to DC adaptor.
Where:
P is the output power of the diode source in milliwatts (mW). The standard output
power is less than or equal to 1mW (CDRH class II rating). Delivery systems with
up to 25mW output power are available. Contact OZ Optics for details.
a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns Standard
sizes are 4/125, 9/125, 25/125, etc.
L is the fiber length in meters.
Note: We recommend the use of an AC adapter for units larger than 1mW. Proper eye protection is also
required for units above 1mW.
Example: A customer wants to order a 635nm, 12 mW laser diode source, with a 3 meter long 25/125
multimode fiber probe. OZ Optics part number: FODL-23-635-25/125-12 for the diode source,
PROBE-25/125-3 for the fiber with lens.
WARNING:
Laser diode sources emit visible laser radiation. Do not stare directly into the output beam.
The FODL system is designed solely as an OEM component for incorporation into the customer's
end products. Therefore it does not comply with the appropriate requirements of FDA 21 CFR,
Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11 for complete laser products.
The complete laser product manufacturer is responsible for complying with these requirements.
These products are not to be used for clinical applications without first complying with FDA
regulations.
DTS0046
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Oct-99
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0
Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981
Fax:(613) 836-5089
E-mail: [email protected]
LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ADJUSTABLE FOCUS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
Precision focus adjustment
Excellent coupling efficiency
Wide wavelength ranges
Rugged, simple design
Easy to install and adjust
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interferometric sensors
Laboratory applications
Education and training
Visual laser alignment for manufacturing
Medical, pharmaceutical, and chemical sensors
Fluorescence measurements
OEM laser systems
Tunable lasers
Laser shows and entertainment
Laser To Fiber Coupler With Adjustable Focus
Specifications:
•
Coupling Efficiency:
Typically >70% for singlemode and
polarization maintaining fibers,
>90% for multimode fibers
•
Backreflection Levels:
>40dB
>60dB versions are also available
•
Polarization Extinction Ratios:
>20dB
25dB and 30dB versions are also
available
•
Available Wavelengths:
180 - 2000nm
•
Power Handling:
>1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses
>10 Watts CW for aspheric lenses
>5 Watts CW for achromats
>100 Watts CW for fused silica or
sapphire plano-convex and biconvex
lenses
Patchcord With Adjustable Connector
Product Description:
Adjustable focus source couplers are ideal for situations where optimum
coupling efficiency is critical. A special connector allows the spacing
between the fiber and lens to be precisely controlled without rotating the
fiber. This allows one to compensate for any changes in wavelength or
beam waist location, thus further optimizing the coupling efficiency.
Adjustable focus couplers are available with a variety of lens types and
fiber types. Internal surfaces are angle polished and/or AR coated to
minimize backreflection. Typical backreflection levels are -40dB. -60dB is
available for certain options. OZ Optics also sells fiber patchcords with
adjustable FC/PC connectors only. Contact OZ Optics for details.
Figure 1: Operating Principle Of Adjustable Focus
DTS0047
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
05/30/03
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A research lab in North America needs to launch light from a Argon-Ion laser, emitting light at 488 and 514nm, into a singlemode fiber. The laser
beam diameter is 1mm. The laser does not have any provisions for mounting optics, so a post mount will be used in front of the laser. The
patchcord needs to be at least, 2 meters long, and with an FC/PC connector on the other end. An alignment kit is ordered to help in aligning the
optics.
Bar Code
14160
Part Number
HPUC-2A3A-400/700-S-6AC-11
12538
QSMJ-A3A,3S-488-3.5/125-3-2
11671
START-0A3A-NTSC-IRVIS
Ordering Information:
Coupler With Adjustable Focus:
Description
Non-Contact style laser to SM fiber coupler for 400-700nm, with an adjustable angle FC
compatible receptacle, f=6mm achromatic lens and post mount adapter
2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC jacketed 3.5/125µm 488nm high power SM fiber patchcord,
terminated with an adjustable FC/PC connector on one end, and a Super FC/PC connector on
the other end.
Alignment kit for laser to fiber couplers with adjustable angle FC/APC compatible receptacles.
The kit includes a MM patchcord and a instructional video (NTSC format). For 400-1600nm
applications.
HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH
Receptacle Code:
A3 for adjustable FC
A3A for adjustable FC/APC
Laser Head Adapter
1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter
2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1”
square
11 for Post Mount Adapter
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
For achromats for wavelengths specify
400/700
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other
adapters
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
Lens ID:
See Lens Selection Guide 3 for
Non - Contact couplers with receptacles in the
Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes
Adjustable Patchcords:
FMJ-X,Y-W-a/b-JD-L(-A)
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
QM for High Power Multimode
QS for High Power Singlemode
QP for High Power PM
A = Alignment (Polarization maintaining
patchcords only)
0 = unaligned and rotatable
1 = slow axis of the fiber aligned with
respect to the key and locked
Connector Code:
A3 = Adjustable Flat NTT-FC
A3S = Adjustable Super NTT-FC/PC
A3U = Adjustable Ultra NTT-FC/PC
A3A = Adjustable Angled NTT-FC/PC
X = Unterminated End
See table 6 of the standard tables for other
connectors
Fiber Length in meters
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 633 for 633nm)
Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes in Microns:
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber
For Multimode fibers specify either UVVIS for
ultraviolet/visible wavelengths or IRVIS for
visible/infrared wavelengths.
Fiber Jacket Type:1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket
sizes
See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other
standard fiber sizes.
NOTE:
To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System
Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler system based on your response.
Unit prices for couplers are approximately $450USD for typical applications with delivery being between 2 and 4 weeks after
receiving your order (ARO). Unit prices for adjustable patchcords are $190USD for each adjustable connector plus the fiber
price. Delivery is 2 - 4 weeks, ARO. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more
information.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ATTENUATOR OR SHUTTER
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
High Power Handling
High Resolution
Polarization Insensitive Attenuator/Shutter
Wide Attenuation Range
Manual and Electrically Controlled Versions
Different Connector Receptacles
APPLICATIONS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power Setting
Safety Interlocks
Colour Balancing
Spectroscopy
Medical, Pharmaceutical, and Chemical Sensors
Interferometric Sensors
OEM Laser Systems
Laser Shows/Entertainment
SPECIFICATIONS:
LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ELECTRICALLY
CONTROLLED ATTENUATOR
• Coupling Efficiency:
Typically >55% for singlemode and
polarization maintaining fibers,
>80% for multimode fibers
• Backreflection:
-14dB for receptacle style couplers using
flat finish connectors
-60dB for receptacle style couplers using
angle finish connectors
-25dB for LPSC-01 style pigtailed source
couplers
-40dB or -60dB for LPSC-03 style pigtailed
source couplers
• Polarization Extinction Ratio: >20dB
25dB, 30 dB version are also available
• Available Wavelengths:
180 - 2000nm
• Power Handling:
Up to 3 Watts for singlemode applications
Over 100 Watts for multimode applications
• Attenuation Range:
0 to 60dB
• Resolution:
0.05dB
• Interface:
Manual/Current Drive/RS-232/SPI/I 2C
LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ELECTRICALLY
CONTROLLED SHUTTER
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
OZ Optics offers source to fiber couplers with built in attenuators or
shutters. These couplers provide a precise method to control the
intensity of light through a fiber. They are available in both
receptacle style and pigtail style.
speed driver circuit that accepts four logic level signals to control the
motor.
Finally, the -MC option features an embedded
microcontroller. These units are addressable and accept RS232,
SPI, and I2C protocols.
Source couplers are available with both manual and electrically
controlled attenuators. In the manual version, the beam from the
laser is partially blocked by a precision blocking screw. Adjusting
the screw controls how much light reaches the fiber. In the
electrically controlled version, a stepper motor controls the amount
of attenuation. It includes a homing sensor to calibrate the
attenuator against.
The shutter accepts a +12V supply to block or transmit the beam.
This shutter is normally closed until voltage is applied. This makes it
ideal for safety interlocks. A manual switch is also on the shutter.
The shutter response speed is under 20 milliseconds. Shutters with
foot pedal control are also available.
The stepper motor is available with several options for control. The
basic model provides direct access to the motor as well as logic
level output for the HOME sensor. The -DR option adds a high
DTS0048
OZ Optics can also provide shutters with a safety interlock function
on the fiber connection. If the fiber is disconnected from the coupler,
the shutter will close automatically. Contact OZ Optics for more
information.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
22-Feb-05
ORDERING INFORMATION:
RECEPTACLE STYLE SOURCE COUPLERS:
HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH-B (-G-V-I)
Receptacle Code:
3 for FC, Super FC/PC, Ultra FC/PC
3A for Angled FC/PC
3AF for Flat angled FC
8 for AT&T-ST, Super ST, Ultra ST
5 for SMA905, SMA906
See Tables 6 of the Standard Tables for other
connectors
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Interface (Motorized Attenuator only):
PC for Base Model
DR for High Speed Driver
MC/SPI for Intelligent SPI Interface
MC/IIC for Intelligent I2C Interface
MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface
Stepper Motor Voltage
(Motorized Attenuator only): 6 or 12 Volts
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
Gear Ratio (Motorized Attenuator Only):
485:1 Standard
76:1 for Fast Speed
Other ratios include 141:2,
262:1, and 900:1
Lens Focal Length and Type:
See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non-Contact
Style Couplers in the Laser to Fiber Coupler
Application Notes
Attenuation Technique:
BL for Manual Blocking Screw
SH for Electronicaly Controlled Shutter
DD for Electronically Controlled Attenuator
Laser Head Adaptor
1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor
2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1”
Square
11 for Post Mount Adapter
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for Other
Adapters
PIGTAIL STYLE SOURCE COUPLERS:
LPSC-0A-W-a/b-F-f-LB-LH-X-JD-L-B(-G-V-I)
Coupler Type:
1 for Contact Style
3 for Non-Contact Style
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 633 for 633nm)
Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber
See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for
other standard fiber sizes
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
Lens Focal Length and Type
See Lens Selection Guide 1 for Pigtail Style
Source Couplers in the Laser to Fiber
Coupler Application Notes
Backreflection:
25dB (Contact Style)
40, 50, or 60dB (Non-contact style)
60dB versions standard only for 1300 and
1550nm wavelengths. Contact OZ before
specifying other wavelengths
Connector Code:
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other
Connectors
Interface (Motorized Attenuator only):
PC for Base Model
DR for High Speed Driver
MC/SPI for Intelligent SPI Interface
MC/IIC for Intelligent I2C Interface
MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface
Stepper Motor Voltage
(Motorized Attenuator Only): 6 or 12 Volts
Gear Ratio (Motorized Attenuator Only):
485:1 Standard
76:1 for Fast Speed
Other ratios include 141:2,
262:1, and 900:1
Attenuation Technique:
BL for Manual Blocking Screw
SH for Electronicaly controlled Shutter
DD for Electronically Controlled Attenuator
Fiber Length in meters
Fiber Jacket Type:
1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC
cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other
jacket sizes
Note:
To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System
Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response.
Unit prices range from $350USD to $1000USD for standard applications with delivery being between 4 and 8 weeks after
receiving your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH RECEPTACLE
(NON-CONTACT STYLE)
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low Cost
High Power Handling
Wide Range of Lenses
Excellent Polarization Maintaining Capabilities
Different Connector Receptacle Versions
Wide Wavelength Ranges
APPLICATIONS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Laser Shows/Entertainment
Spectroscopy
Interferometric Sensors
Fluorescence Measurements
Medical, Pharmaceutical, and Chemical Sensors
OEM Laser Systems
SPECIFICATIONS:
•
Coupling Efficiency:
Typically >60% into singlemode or
polarization maintaining fibers,
>80% for multimode fibers
•
Backreflection Levels:
Typically -14dB with standard
connectors
Typically <-60dB with angled
connectors
•
Available Wavelengths:
180 - 2000nm
•
Polarization Extinction Ratios: Typically >20dB
25, 30dB versions are also available
•
Power Handling:
>1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses,
>10 Watt CW for aspheric lenses
>5 Watts CW for achromats
>100 Watts CW for fused silica or
sapphire plano-convex and biconvex
lenses
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
In non-contact style source couplers, an air gap exists between the fiber
and the lens. This design is more flexible, allowing a wide range of lens
types and focal lengths to be used. The distance between the fiber and
the lens can be adjusted to compensate the changes in the source
wavelengths or to intentionally defocus the laser beam to prevent arcing
in high power laser to multimode fiber applications. Couplers using
GRIN lenses, achromats, aspheres, fused silica, plano-convex, and biconvex lenses have all been made utilizing this design.
Non-contact style couplers can handle input powers of up to 100W CW,
and even higher energies from pulsed sources. They are best suited for
applications where either the input energy is higher than 400mW, or
when more than one wavelength is to be coupled into the fiber, or for
input beams that have unusually large beam diameters or divergence
angles. They also have superior polarization maintaining capabilities
compared to physical contact style couplers. However because of the
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
CONNECTOR POLISH STYLES
air gap between the fiber and the lens, the
backreflection level for the endface of the fiber is about
-14dB. This can be reduced to -40dB to -60dB by
slant polishing both fiber ends to deflect the
backreflected signal.
There is a significant variation in the endface
geometries of angled PC (APC) connectors. This
effects the spacing between the endface of the fiber
and the lens. To minimize this variation, OZ Optics
offers an angled flat (AFC) connector. This connector
features a beveled endface where the fiber itself is
angled but the ferrule tip is flat. This geometry
provides optimum repeatability between connections.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH
Receptacle Code:
3 for FC, Super FC/PC, Ultra FC/PC
3A for Angled FC/PC
3AF for Flat Angled FC
5 for SMA 905
8 for AT&T-ST
8U for Ultra AT&T-ST
SC for SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other
connectors
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Laser Head Adaptor
1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter
2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1”
square
11 for Post Mount Adapter
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other
adapters
Lens ID:
See Lens Selection Guide 3 for
Non - Contact couplers with receptacles in the
Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
STANDARD COUPLERS:
OZ OPTICS PART NUMBER
BAR CODE NUMBER
HPUC-23-400/700-S-3.5AC-1
3793
HPUC-23-400/700-S-6AC-1
3794
HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-10AC-1
3795
HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-3.5AC-1
3796
HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-6AC-1
3797
HPUC-23-400/700-S-10AC-1
3798
HPUC-23-325-S-5BQ-1
3799
HPUC-23-325-S-10BQ-1
3800
OZ OPTICS PART NUMBER
BAR CODE NUMBER
HPUC-23-400/700-S-3.5AC-2
3802
HPUC-23-400/700-S-6AC-2
3803
HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-10AC-2
3804
HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-3.5AC-2
3082
HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-6AC-2
3805
HPUC-23-400/700-S-10AC-2
3806
HPUC-23-325-S-5BQ-2
3807
HPUC-23-325-S-10BQ-2
3808
NOTE:
To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System
Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS WITH RECEPTACLES
(PHYSICAL CONTACT STYLE)
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low Cost
Easy to Install and Adjust
Rugged, Compact, Simple Design
Good Coupling Efficiency
Different Connector Receptacles
Adjustable Output Power
Wide Wavelength Ranges
APPLICATIONS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interferometric Sensors
Laboratory Applications
Education and Training
Visual Laser Alignment for Manufacturing
Medical, Pharmaceutical and Chemical Sensors
Fluorescence Measurements
OEM Laser Systems
Laser Shows/Entertainment
SPECIFICATIONS:
•
Coupling Efficiency:
Typically >55% for singlemode
and polarization maintaining
fibers,
>80% for multimode fibers
•
Backreflection Levels:
Typically -25dB
•
Polarization Extinction Ratio:
Typically 20dB
•
Available Wavelengths:
Optimized for 488, 514, 532,
543, 633, 830, 1300, 1550 and
1625nm
•
Power Handling:
Up to 250mW for 633-1550nm
Up to 10mW for 488-543nm
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
Physical contact source couplers are the most economical type of
laser to fiber source couplers. A Graded Index (GRIN) lens is used
to focus the light into the fiber. The fiber is butted directly against the
endface of the lens thus ensuring that the laser beam is properly
focused onto the end of the fiber. A special version is available for
use with unterminated (bare) fibers.
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
By using index matching gel on the end of the fiber,
backreflection levels are reduced to -25dB. This
technique should only be used for low power lasers
and 633-1625nm wavelengths.
Gel is not
recommended for 488-543nm wavelengths. The
couplers are optimized for a specific wavelength which
is specified when ordering.
Backreflection is
approximately -15dB when gel is not used.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
HUC-1X-W-F-f-LH
Receptacle Code:
1 for Bare Fibers
3 for FC, Super FC or Ultra FC
8 for AT&T-ST, Super ST or Ultra ST
5 for SMA 905
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other
receptacles.
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 633 for 633nm)
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
Laser Head Adaptor:
1 = 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor
2 = Disk Adaptor with 4 holes on a 1”
square
11 = Post Mount Adaptor
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other
adaptors.
Lens Type:
1.8GR for beam sizes < 0.5mm
2.6GR for beam sizes between 0.5mm and 1mm
Use Non-contact style couplers for beam sizes
larger than 1mm.
Note: Add -BL to the part number if a manually adjustable attenuator is to be added.
STANDARD COUPLERS:
OZ Optics Part Number
HUC-13-633-S-1.8GR-1
HUC-13-633-S-1.8GR-2
HUC-13-633-S-2.6GR-1
HUC-13-633-S-2.6GR-2
HUC-15-633-M-2.6GR-1
HUC-15-633-M-2.6GR-2
HUC-18-633-S-2.6GR-1
HUC-18-633-S-2.6GR-2
RECEPTACLE STYLE PHYSICAL CONTACT SOURCE COUPLER
Bar Code Number
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
BARE FIBER SOURCE COUPLER
NOTE:
To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System
Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response.
Unit prices range from $100USD to $230USD for standard items with delivery being from stock to within 2 weeks of receiving
your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
PIGTAIL STYLE LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS
FEATURES:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rugged, Compact, Stable Design
Low Backreflection
Low Cost
Environmentally Stable
Excellent Coupling Efficiency
Excellent Polarization Maintaining Capabilities
Wide Wavelength Ranges
Adjustable Output Power
APPLICATIONS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interferometric Sensors
Medical, Pharmaceutical, and Chemical Sensors
Fluorescence Measurements
Spectroscopy
Laser Shows/Entertainment
OEM Laser Systems
SPECIFICATIONS:
• Coupling Efficiency:
Typically >60% into
Singlemode or Polarization
Maintaining fibers,
>80% for Multimode fibers
• Backreflection Levels:
Typically -25dB for Physical
Contact style, -40dB for NonContact style. -60dB versions
are also available
• Polarization Extinction Ratios: >20dB
25dB and 30dB versions are
also available
• Available Wavelengths:
180 - 2000nm
• Power Handling:
>1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses,
>10 Watts CW for aspheric lenses
>5 Watts CW for achromats
>100 Watts CW for fused
silica or sapphire plano-convex
and biconvex lenses
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
Pigtail style source couplers are recommended for permanent or semipermanent situations, where optimum coupling efficiency, output stability, and
minimum backreflection are desired. In these couplers the fibers are
permanently glued to the focusing lens. The fiber-lens assembly is then
inserted into the tilt adjustment flange, and held in place with two radial set
screws.
Because the fiber is permanently attached to the lens, the fiber cannot be
replaced without also replacing the coupling lens.
09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Pigtail style couplers are manufactured in both contact (LPSC-01)
model and non-contact (LPSC-03) model versions. For contact style
pigtailed couplers, the backreflection level is typically -25dB. In the
case of non-contact style couplers, the internal endface of the fiber
is polished at an angle to reduce backreflection. Non-contact pigtail
style couplers are available with up to -40dB or -60dB backreflection
levels.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
LPSC-0A-W-a/b-F-f-LH-LB-X-JD-L
Coupler Type:
1 for Contact Style
3 for Non-Contact Style
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 633 for 633nm)
Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber
See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for
other standard fiber sizes
Fiber Length in meters
Fiber Jacket Type: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7of the Standard Tables for other jacket
sizes
Connector Code:
Fiber Type: M for Multimode
S for Singlemode
P for Polarization Maintaining
Lens Type: See the Lens Selection Guide 1
for Pigtail Style Source Couplers in the Laser
to Fiber Coupler Application Notes
Laser Head Adaptor
1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor
2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1”
square
11 Post Mount Adapter
See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other
adapters
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
8S = Super AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other
connectors
Backreflection:
40, 50, or 60dB
60dB versions standard only for 1300 and 1550nm
wavelengths. Contact OZ before specifying other
wavelengths.
Note: Add “ -ER=30” or “-ER=25” to the part number for 30dB or 25dB extinction ratios (For 1300nm and 1550nm only).
Add “-BL” to the part number if a manually adjustable attenuator is to be added.
NOTE:
To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System
Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response.
Unit prices range from $250USD to $400USD for typical applications with delivery being from stock to within 2 weeks of
receiving your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE POLARIZATION INSENSITIVE TUNABLE FILTERS
Features:
• Narrow linewidth
• Polarization insensitive
• Wide wavelength range
• Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining fiber versions
• High resolution
Applications:
• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM)
• Tunable sources
• Spectral analysis
• Quality control and measurement
• Product development
• Fiber optic component manufacturing
Product Description:
Manually Adjustable Tunable Filter
Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an adjustable narrow bandpass filter, and a focusing optical assembly to collect the light
again. Tunable filters are available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, a motor driven version for OEM applications, and a digital
version with a display and computer interface.
The manual tunable filter is a pigtailed component with a rotating stage that allows for the manual adjustment of the angle of incidence between the
beam and the filter. The filter works based on the principle that by adjusting the angle of incidence between the filter and the incident beam one
controls the wavelength at which the filter transmits.
Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filter used in tunable filters has a smooth,
rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors
separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. Other filter designs are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking
multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection
level. For more information on custom filters please contact OZ Optics.
OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL to
below 0.3dB, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature makes it ideal for today's DWDM system
applications.
Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization
maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can
construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for
availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
Figure 1: Manually Adjustable Tunable Filter
DTS0051
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
06/02
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A customer wants to use a broadband source as a manual tunable source in order to test the spectral characteristics of optical
components at different wavelengths. Both the light source and components have FC/PC receptacles and the wavelength region
of interest for the components is throughout the C-band. The broadband source is polarized randomly and therefore the tunable
source required should be polarization insensitive.
The component required for this application is a polarization insensitive manual tunable filter. With this filter connected to the
broadband light source and by adjusting the angle at which the beam is incident on the filter the transmitted wavelength from the
broadband source can be tuned from 1520 to 1570nm.
Bar Code
13553
Part Number
TF-11-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-1.2
Description
Polarization insensitive manual tunable filter in U-bracket for 1520-1570nm
with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss,
super FC/PC connectors and standard 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1. What wavelength range are you interested in?
2. What linewidth do you require?
3. What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, multimode or PM fiber?
4. Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source?
5. What return losses are acceptable in your system?
6. What connector types are you using?
7. What fiber length and jacket diameter do you need?
TF-11-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW
W: Wavelength range in nanometers:
Example: 1520/1570
a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns:
9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF28
fiber8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM
fiber
F:
Fiber type:
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
P=Polarization Maintaining
LB: Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for
singlemode or PM fibers only.
(60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength
ranges only)
35dB for multimode fibers
LW: FWHM linewidth in nm. Standard filter is a
Fabry Perot. For a flat top profile filter, add the
letter F to the end of the number
L: Fiber length in meters
JD: Fiber Jacket type:
1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
X,Y: Input & Output Connector codes:
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
LCA=Angled LC
MU=MU
X=No Connector
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
Example 1:
A customer wants to reduce the ASE noise and manually tune the transmitted wavelength for a special broadband light source between
the C and L bands, 1550 to 1600nm, with a very narrow linewidth.
A custom version of the manually tunable filter will meet this requirement with a narrow linewidth custom filter used in the component.
Bar Code
N/A
Part Number
TF-11-11-1550/1600-9/125-S-50-3U3U-3-1-0.3
Description
Polarization insensitive manual tunable filter for 1550-1600nm with 1 meter
long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return loss and ultra
FC/PC connectors. Custom 0.3nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
MEMS VARIABLE OPTICAL ATTENUATORS SINGLE/MULTI-CHANNEL
Features:
Pr
• Small size, low cost
• Single channel up to 8 channels per module for MEMS VOA arrays and up to
40 channels for MEMS VOA with electronic drivers
• Standard or custom arrays.
• Continuous attenuation control for each channel.
• Integrated output power monitoring (optional).
• Fast response.
• Low insertion loss.
• High dynamic range.
• Flat wavelength response.
• SM or PM fiber versions are available
• Low power consumption
• Very low crosstalk
• High attenuation acuracy
im
el
y
ar
in
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
Active gain equalization in DWDM systems
Local power monitoring and feedback control
Power control into receivers
Gain tilt control in EDFAs
Channel balancing for optimizing transmission performance in longhaul and metro networks
• Power balancing before modulation and multiplexing
• Dynamic optical power control and channel equalization in add/drop
multiplexers
MEMS Variable Optical Attenuator
Product Description:
OZ Optics Ltd. introduces a MEMS based variable optical attenuator (VOA) in a fast, low cost miniature package. The attenuators are available
either in individual units or as an integrated array of separate attenuators, each with independent continuous control. The attenuation is controlled
by a simple analog voltage input signal. Up to 8 attenuators can be incorporated into one module. Integrated optical power monitoring of each
channel is available as an option. The combination of ease of control with integrated power monitoring makes the unit an attractive choice for
DWDM optical networks, where automated control is essential.
MEMS based VOAs using either singlemode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are available. An ingenious manufacturing technique ensures
optimum alignment of PM fibers while keeping assembly costs to minimal levels. This reduces costs dramatically.
MEMS VOAs can be provided in 4 configurations: single channel; multi channel VOA arrays without any electronics; multi channel VOA arrays with
0-5V drive electronics; and multi channel VOA arrays with 0-5V drive electronics and serial port communication interface.
Dimensions are in milimeters
Figure 1: Single Channel MEMS VOA
DTS0078
Figure 2: 8 Channel MEMS VOA Module
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
17-Jan-2005
1
MEMS Multichannel VOA
MMVOA-C-W-F-a/b-XY -JD -L(-M)1
L = Fiber length, in meters on each side of
C = Number of Channels:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 40
the device:
1 meter is standard. If the inputs and
outputs are different lengths, then specify
the input and output lengths with a comma.
Example: To order 1 meter on the input,
and 7 meters on the output, enter 1,7 for L
in the part number.
W = Wavelength
Specify in nm 1550 for 1470 - 1620nm
operating range (C, L, and S bands)
F = Fiber type
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
JD = Fiber Jacket Size:
0.25 = 250µ OD acrylate coating (standard)
1 = 900µ OD Hytrel Buffer (optional)
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns
9/125 for standard Corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM
fiber
Note:1
Add -M to the part number to have integrated power monitoring added
Add -DR to the part number to have integrated 0-5V drive electronics
Add -DR/RS232 or DR/I2C to the part number to have integrated 0-5V drive
electronics with serial interface
X,Y = Input and Output Connector types
3S = FC connector, Super PC finish
3U = FC connector, Ultra PC finish
3A = FC connector, Angled PC (APC) finish
8 = AT&T-ST connector
SC = SC connector, Super PC finish
SCA = SC connector, Angled PC (APC) finish
LC = LC connector
MU = MU connector
X = No connector
Note: All fibers on one side are terminated
with one connector type.
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A customer needs an eight channel, 1550nm PM MEMS VOA. The fibers on each side are 1 meter long, with 900 micron loose tube hytrel
jacketing. The ends of the fibers are to be terminated with FC/APC connectors. The customer wants built in power monitoring. The part number
and description are as follows:
Part Number
Description
MMVOA-8-1550-P-8/125-3A3A-1-1-M
MEMS Multichannel VOA, with eight channels. Each channel uses PM fiber for
1550nm, 1 meter long on both ends, 900 micron loose tube hytrel jacketing, with
FC/APC connectors on each end. Integrated power monitoring is included.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: How does the integrated power monitoring work?
A: Integrated power monitoring is achieved through the use of a unique tapping process and a photodiode. The output signal from the photodiode
can be measured by a feedback circuit to control the attenuation.
Application Notes:
Application example: Load balancing on a WDM network
As illustrated in figure 2, an eight channel wavelength multiplexed signal from a trunk line is demultiplexed into individual signals. The signals are of
different intensities, and have to be balanced to avoid saturating any of the receivers. To do so, each channel is sent through a corresponding port
on an eight channel MEMS VOA. The signal strength through the attenuator outputs is monitored by a control circuit. If the output signal on one
channel gets too high or too low, the corresponding attenuator is adjusted to bring the light level to the correct range. The complete module is very
compact.
Figure 3: Using A MEMS VOA To Balance Signal Strengths In A WDM Network
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
METALIZED FIBERS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining fibers
Easy to solder
Cleaved enfaces available
Unplated (masked) ends available
Mid-span plating available
Designed to meet Telcordia requirements
Large volume manufacturing capacity
Custom configurations available
Applications:
• Hermetic feed-throughs
• Integrated optics packaging
• Diode pigtailing
Metalized Fiber
Product Description:
OZ Optics metalized fibers are specifically designed for optoelectronic packaging. The fiber is first coated with a layer of nickel to provide
superior adhesion and a stable soldering base. The fiber is then plated with an overcoat layer of gold to provide resistance to oxidization. The
result is a strong, uniform coating capable of handling the rigors of soldering and hermetic sealing. OZ Optics metalized fibers are well suited
for use in assemblies that must conform to Telcordia requirements. If required, OZ Optics metalized fibers can be manufactured with masked
ends. This process provides a clean, non-metalized fiber end suitable for termination with ceramic ferrules, fusion splicing or direct connection
to a device. This allows for an easy transformation of devices into hermetically sealed packages. Also available are custom mid-span
metalization of optical fibers and metalized ribbon fibers. The mid-span configuration provides a solution for hermetically sealing in-fiber devices
such as Fiber Bragg Gratings, optical isolators or optical filters, as well as allowing larger package devices that exceed the length restrictions of
standard metalized fibers. Metalization of ribbon fibers allows for easy hermetic sealing of multiple fibers into hermetic packages that require
many fibers or are being used with V-Groove assemblies.
OZ Optics metalized fibers are available with Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers. PM fibers offer a means to
control polarization of optical signals throughout the system thus controlling Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) and Polarization Mode
Dispersion (PMD). This control is crucial in developing high speed, 10 Gbs, 40 Gbs, and faster systems. In general, OZ Optics uses
polarization
maintaining
fibers
based
on
the
PANDA
fiber
structure
when
building
polarization
maintaining
components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber
types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build
devices.
Figure 1: Metalized Bare Fiber
DTS0053
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
06/02
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionaire For Custom Parts:
1.
What type of fiber is required for your application?
2.
Do you need the fiber to be protected with 0.9mm loose tubing?
3.
What length of metalization is required?
4.
Is the metalization needed at the end of the fiber or another location along the length?
5.
If this is an end plating, do you require a bare length of fiber (masked region) at the end?
6.
Do you need the end of the fiber to be cleaved?
7.
What is the overall length of the fiber needed?
8.
Do you need a connector on the opposite end?
9.
What is the application that this fiber is being used for?
MEFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-A-B-E-L-(OPT)
F = Fiber Type
M = Multimode
S = Single Mode
P = Polarization Maintaining
L = Overall Length in Meters
X = Connector Code 3S = Super FC
3U = Ultra FC
3A = Angle FC
8 = ST
SC = Super SC
SCU = Ultra SC
SCA = Angle SC
MU = Super MU
LC = Super LC
LCA = Angle LC
E = Fiber Endface Finish
0 = 0° cleave (Flat)
8 = 8° cleave (Angled)
X = No cleave
B = Metalized fiber length in millimeters (for
assemblies with full metalization, this number
should match "A")
W = Wavelength, in nanometers
1300/1550 for Corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
a/b = Fiber core/cladding
9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber
6/125 for 980nm PANDA style PM fiber
7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
* Note:
1
A = Stripped fiber length in millimeters
JD = Jacket Diameter
0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating
(standard bare fiber)
0.40 = 400 micron acrylate coating (PM bare fiber)
1 = 900µm Hytrel loose tube buffered fiber
(standard bare fiber)
PANDA style 1300nm or 1550nm fiber only
OPT = Options (add if required)
M = Mid-span plating
ER = 30 for >30dB extinction ratio
1
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts
A customer needs to hermetically seal a 2 meter long length of PANDA style 1550nm PM fiber into a package. To do so he will solder into
place a metalized fiber. The metalized fiber length needs to be 30mm long with only 20mm metalized, leaving 10mm of exposed bare fiber for
attachment to his device, No fiber end finish is required. There is also a requirement for the fiber to be jacketed to 900 micron with an FC/APC
connector.
Bar Code
NEW
Part Number
MEPMJ-3A-1550-8/125-1-30-20-X-2
Description
2 meter long, 0.9mm OD Jacketed 1550nm 8/125 Polarization Maintaining
fiber patchcord with metalized tip on one end, Angle FC/PC connector on the
other end. Strip length is 30mm, metalized length is 20mm, no ferrule or
cleave on the end
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
MINI OPTICAL POWER METER
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Very small size
Low cost
Interchangeable optical receptacles available
Powered by replaceable batteries
Auto-off
CE compliant
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
Fiber optic assembling and testing
Network installation
Component and system troubleshooting
Education
General optical power measurement
Product Description
The OZ Optics POM-400 is a pocket-sized optical power meter
covering a range of popular wavelengths. The ultra-compact
size and user-friendly keypad makes it well suited to many user
applications. Low power consumption allows extended
operation in the field.
POM-400 Optical Power Meter
The POM-400 can accommodate a number of standard,
interchangeable screw-in receptacles. The dynamic range
exeeds 63 dB. Power levels from +3 dBm to as low as -60 dBm
can be easily measured, with the values displayed in watts or
dBm. The user may select any of three pre-set calibrated
wavelengths.
Measurement range
-60 to +3 dBm
Calibrated wavelengths
1550, 1490, 1310
Detector type
Display resolution
Accuracy (@ 23°C)
Measurement units
InGaAs
0.01 dB
± 5%
Watts, dBm
Ordering Information for Standard Parts :
Available optical receptacles
Universal receptacle for FC/SC/ST. FC receptacle also included.
Dimensions
x H)
Bar Code (L x W
Part
Number
90 x 55 x 16 mm
Description
Weight
22519
Power supply
90 g with
battery
Optical
Power
Meter calibrated at infrared wavelengths 1310/1490/1550 nm, -60 to +3dBm
measurement
range.
Measurement units are in watts and dBm. Universal adaptor for
3 AAA 1.5 volt
batteries
FC/SC/ST connectors. FC/PC receptacle is included. Battery operated.
360 hours
POM-400-IR
Battery operating lifetime
Temperature range:
DTS0104
Operating
Storage
-10 to +60 °C
-25 to +70 °C
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
14-Jan-2005
1
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
MINIATURE INLINE POLARIZATION MAINTAINING SPLITTERS/
TAPS/COMBINERS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rugged compact design
Broad wavelength range
Low insertion loss
High extinction ratio
Low return losses
Low Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL)
Low Wavelength Dependent Loss (WDL)
Miniature Inline Splitter
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
EDFA amplifiers
Raman amplifier combiners
Polarization mode dispersion compensation
Polarization extinction ratio measurements
Fiber optic sensors
Coherent communication systems
Product Description:
Ø 0.22 [5.5]
Ø 0.12 [3.1]
OZ Optics’ miniature fiber optic beam splitters are used to split the light
traveling through a fiber into two fibers, or to split or combine orthogonally
polarized light into separate fibers. These splitters feature a rugged
miniature housing to fit into compact spaces in equipment and systems.
Light from a fiber is first collimated, then sent through a beamsplitting optic
to divide it into two beams by either a fixed ratio or into two orthogonal
polarizations. The resultant output beams are then coupled back into the
output fibers. This flexible design allows one to manufacture splitters with
different fiber types on the input and output ports.
Miniature inline splitters are sold in two different configurations - a polarization
maintaining splitter, with a fixed splitting ratio, and a polarizing splitter, to
split and combine orthogonal polarizations. Their operating principles are as
follows:
Polarization Maintaining Splitters: Also known as optical taps, these
splitters use a partially reflecting mirror to transmit a portion of the light from
the input fiber to the main output fiber, and reflect the remainder of the light
to the second output fiber. All ports made using polarization maintaining fiber
are aligned so that polarized light aligned parallel to the stress rods on the
input fiber emerge from the output fibers in the same manner, maintaining
the polarization state to a high degree. The top drawing in Figure 2 shows
the arrangement of the input and output ports.
Splitters that only split off a small portion of the input light are commonly
known as taps. These splitters are often used for power monitoring
applications. The small signal, typically between one and ten percent, is
sent to a monitoring photodiode, while the majority of the signal goes on to
the main destination. For a very low cost alternative configuration,
combining the functions of a tap and monitor photodiode in a single unit, we
invite you to review our Inline Optical Taps and Monitors data sheet.
Polarizing Splitters: Polarizing Beam Splitters split incoming light into two
orthogonal states. They can also be used to combine the light from two
fibers into a single output fiber. When used as a beam combiner, each input
signal will transmit along a different output polarization axis.
By default the output fibers on a polarizing splitter are aligned so that the
output polarization from each fiber is in line with the stress rods of the fibers.
DTS0091
1.93 [49]
1.38 [35]
0.91 [23]
Ø 0.19 [4.75]
Dimensions are in inches [mm]
Figure 1: Inline Splitter Dimensions
Input Fibe
r
Output Fiber 1
50/50 or 96/4
Output Fib
er 2
Output Fib
Input Fiber 1
er 1
PBS
Output Fib
er 2
Figure 2: Polarization Maintaining And
Polarizing Splitter Configurations
If the input fiber is a polarization maintaining (PM) fiber,
the input fiber is aligned such that light polarized parallel
to the fiber’s stress rods is transmitted to port 1 of the
splitter, while light polarized perpendicular to the stress
rods is transmitted to port 2 of the splitter. The bottom
drawing in Figure 2 illustrates this. Because of OZ Optics’
modular design, the PM fiber configuration can be changed
to whatever suits your needs.
Splitters can be manufactured with different fibers on the
input and output ports. For example, light from a
singlemode fiber could be split into its two orthogonal states
and then launched into two polarization maintaining fibers.
Standard products for 1550 nm applications are readily
available, while custom items can be made with rapid
turnaround at low cost. Products for other wavelengths,
such as 980 nm, 1300 nm, or 1480 nm are offered. Contact
OZ Optics for details and a quotation.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
A customer requires a polarization maintaining tap to monitor the output power from a 1550 nm DFB laser diode with a PM output. The
tap ratio needs to be 5% or smaller. The coupler has to exhibit the lowest possible insertion losses and return losses. Connectors are
not required.
Bar
Code
Part Number
Description
20408
FOBS-12N-111-8/125-PPP-1550-96/4-60-XXX-1-1
Miniature inline polarization maintaining splitter for 1550 nm, with a 96/4 splitting
ratio, 60 dB return loss. The fibers on all ports are 1 meter long, 900 micron loose
tube cabled PM fibers, with no connectors.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In
particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases
non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in
your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
What is your operating wavelength?
What is the intensity of your signal?
What is the input fiber type?
What is the first output fiber type?
What is the second output fiber type?
What splitting ratio do you desire? Do you require a fixed splitting ratio or a polarizing splitter?
Do you intend to use the unit as a splitter or as a combiner?
What are your insertion loss requirements?
What are your return loss requirements?
How long should the fibers be on each port?
Do you require uncabled fibers, or fibers protected with a 900 micron diameter loose tube cable?
Do you need any connectors on the fibers? If so, what type?
Description
Part Number
Miniature Inline Splitter
a/b =
FOBS-12N-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L
Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber.
8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber
7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber
See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables
data sheet for other standard fiber sizes
ABC = Fiber Types on each port
(input, output 1, output 2)
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
W=
Wavelength:Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
S/R =
Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 98/2
50/50, 96/4 Standard
Use PBS for polarizing splitters
L=
Fiber length, in meters
JD =
Fiber jacket type
0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
XYZ =
Connector codes for each port
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
LC = LC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet
for other connectors
LB =
Backreflection level:
30, 40, 50, or 60 dB
50, 60 dB are standard for 1300 nm to
1550 nm only
40 dB standard for other wavelengths
30 dB is standard for multimode
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts
A 980nm polarizing beamsplitter is needed to combine the signal from two polarization maintaining fibers into one singlemode fiber. The
two polarization maintaining fibers are to be terminated with FC/APC connectors, while the singlemode fiber is left unterminated.
Standard return losses, insertion losses and jacket materials are acceptable.
Part Number
Description
FOBS-12N-111-6/125-SPP-980-PBS-40-X3A3A-1-1
Miniature inline polarizing splitter/combiner for 980 nm, with 40 dB return loss. The input fiber is
980 nm singlemode fiber with no connector while the two output fibers are both 980 nm PM fibers
with angled NTT-FC/PC connectors. The fibers on all ports are 1 meter long and 900 micron
loose tube cabled.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
MOTOR DRIVEN TUNABLE FILTERS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Narrow Linewidth
Polarization Insensitive
Wide Wavelength Range
Singlemode, Multimode, and Polarization Maintaining Fiber Versions
High Resolution
Built in Computer RS232 Interface
GPIB/RS232 Converter
Applications:
• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
• Tunable Sources
• Spectral Analysis
• Quality Control and Measurement
• Product Development
• Fiber Optic Component Manufacturing
• Automated Testing
Motor Driven Tunable Filter
Product Description:
Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an
adjustable narrow bandpass filter, and a focusing optical
assembly to collect the light again. Tunable filters are
available in three versions - a manually adjustable version,
a motor driven version for OEM applications, and a digital
version with a display and computer interface.
The motor driven tunable filter is a pigtailed unit with a
computer interface which has options for different
communication standards. The device works on the
principle that by adjusting the angle of incidence between
the filter and the incident beam one controls the
wavelength at which the filter transmits. The motor driven
version is calibrated such that the user directly enters the
wavelength to transmit via the computer interface. An
RS232 interface with cable is standard.
Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width
at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filter used in
tunable filters has a smooth, rounded transmission
spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type
Figure 1. Motor Driven Tunable Filter
cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two
reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness.
Other filter profiles are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the
number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on custom
filters please contact OZ Optics.
OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL
to below 0.3dB, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature makes it ideal for today's DWDM
system applications.
Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization
maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ
Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales
department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
DTS0054
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
09/03
1
Standard Product Specifications:
Computer Interface:
RS232. Other available options include IIC and SPI.
Resolution:
As low as 0.1nm
Tuning Range:
50nm
Linewidth:
1.1 ± 0.1nm over full tuning range is standard. As low as 0.3nm as an option.
PDL:
Typically less than 0.3dB
Insertion Loss:
Typically less than 2.0dB for complete device over full tuning range.
Standard Wavelength Ranges:
S, C and L bands: 1470-1520nm, 1520-1570nm and 1570-1620nm
Power Handling:
Up to 200mW for standard package.
Response Time:
50nm change in less than 1 sec. 1nm change in less than 0.1 sec.
Dimensions:
0.75” x 1.5” x 3.25” (2.0 3.8 x 8.5cm), (not including fibers)
Weight:
0.2lb (100g)
Power Requirements:
Voltage: 5.0 volts for logic, 5 to 12 volts for motor
Current: 57mA for logic supply, 160mA for motor with +12V Supply
Repeatability:
Typically better than ±0.2nm
SAMPLE TEST DATA FOR TUNABLE FILTERS
Wavelength (nm)
PDL (dB)
1520.04
0.30
1530.00
0.20
1539.96
0.10
1550.04
0.15
1560.00
0.30
1569.96
0.30
Figure 2: Typical Transmission Curves Of 1.2nm C-band Tunable Filters
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
Bar Code Part Number
Description
10528
TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232
Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with
1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return
loss, super FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232
interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter.
13546
TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-50-3U3U-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232
Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with
1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return
loss, ultra FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232
interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter.
13547
TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-60-3A3A-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232
Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with
1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 60dB return
loss, angled FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232
interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter.
13548
TF-100-11-1570/1620-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232
Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1570-1620nm with
1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return
loss, super FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232
interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter.
2
Motor Driven Tunable Filter:
W=
TF-100-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW-MC/I
I = Computer Interface:
RS232 for RS232
IIC for IIC
SPI for SPI
Wavelength range in nanometers:
Example: 1520/1570
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns:
for 1300/1550 SM fiber use 9/125
for 1550 Panda Style PM fiber use 8/125
LW = Linewidth in nm. For a flat-top profile
add the suffix “F” to the line width
Example: -15F=15nm Flat Top Filter
F = Fiber type:
L = Fiber length in meters (each side)
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
P=Polarization Maintaining
JD = Fiber Jacket type:
1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
LB = 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or
polarization maintaining units only (60dB for
1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only)
35dB for multimode units
X,Y = Connector code:
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
LCA=Angled LC
MU=MU
X=No Connector
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
Example 1:
A customer wants to select between channels in the C-band for a metro Coarse WDM (CWDM) system. Typical channel width is 15nm and
a flat top, low ripple, polarization insensitive tunable filter is needed.
Part Number
Description
TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-50-3U3U-3-1-15F-MC/RS232
Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with 1 meter
long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return loss, ultra FC/PC
connectors and built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 15nm
passband flat top filter.
Example 2:
A customer wants to reduce the out of band noise of a polarized light source and tune the transmitted wavelength using a 0.3nm linewidth
tunable filter. The component required for this application is a polarization maintaining motorized tunable filter.
Part Number
Description
TF-100-11-1520/1570-8/125-P-40-3S3S-3-1-MC/RS232-0.3
Polarization maintaining motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with 1
meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss, super
FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 0.3nm
FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: What is the filter linewidth?
A: The standard filter is a 1.2nm FWHM Fabry-Perot filter. This can be customized to suit the customer's requirements.
Q: How do you define your linewidths?
A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This is the transmitted line width at -3dB from the peak
transmission. For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified.
Q: What is the largest tuning range available?
A: The standard tuning range is 50nm. However the filter can be set to operate over a 100nm tuning range with some effects on the
linewidth and insertion loss in the lower wavelength (high angle of incidence) region.
Q: What is a Fabry-Perot filter? Are there other types available?
A: A Fabry-Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot
cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting the spacer thickness one can
adjust the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple
cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection
level. For more information on custom filters available please contact OZ Optics.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
OPTICAL DELAY LINES
Features:
• Low loss
• Sub-picosecond resolution
• Wide wavelength range
• Over 300 psec delay range
• Polarization insensitive
• Singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber versions
• Electrically controlled versions available
Applications:
• PMD compensation in high speed communications networks
• Interferometric sensors
• Coherent telecommunications
• Spectrum analyzers
Delay Line With Lead Screw (ODL-100)
Product Description:
Fiber Optic Delay Lines (ODL) consist of an input and output fiber collimator to
project the light into free space and collect it again into a fiber. The distance the light
travels in free space is precisely controlled, either by controlling the separation
between the input and output optics, or by reflecting the light off a movable reflector.
In either case, by varying the distance the light travels, one can control the delay time
through the device.
Delay lines are offered using singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM)
fibers. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the
PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and
patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber
structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our
sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer
supplied fibers to build devices.
Delay lines are offered in both manual or electrically controlled versions. Manual
delay lines utilize either a lead screw or a micrometer to adjust the spacing.
Electrically controlled versions utilize a servo motor with encoders to monitor the
motion. With this device submicron resolution (<0.003 ps) is achieved. The delay line
is easily controlled by a computer via an RS-232 interface or manually using some
simple TTL input signals. These devices are calibrated to provide the delay in
picoseconds. Home and end position sensors prevent accidental damage to the
device.
Delay Line With Micrometer (ODL-200)
Basic Delay Line With Servo Motor (ODL-300)
Reflector Style Delay Line With
Electrically Controlled Delay Line (ODL-650)
DTS0055
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Lead Screw (ODL-600)
05/02
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A customer is building a polarization mode dispersion compensator using a polarization maintaining electrically controlled delay line and computer
interface. The delays in their system are 50 picoseconds or less. His system is sensitive to both insertion losses and return losses, so a low
return loss device is needed.
Bar Code
13757
Part Number
ODL-650-11-1550-8/125-P-60-3A3A-1-1-MC/RS232
Description
Electrically Controlled Reflector Style Variable Fiber Optic
Delay Line for 1550nm, with 60dB return loss. Pigtails are 1
meter long, 8/125 PM fibers, protected with 0.9mm OD hytrel
tubing, and with FC/APC connectors, RS232 Interface
Standard Product Specifications:
Model
Travel Mechanism
ODL-200
Manual Micrometer
ODL-300
Servo Motor
Travel Range (mm)
Resolution (microns)1
ODL-100
Manual Lead
Screw
100
318 per turn
25
10 per division
Delay Range (psec)
Delay Resolution (psec)1
330
1 psec per turn
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)2,3
Loss Variation over travel
range (typical)(dB) 3
Size (LxWxH) (mm)
Return Loss (dB)
Speed (mm/sec)
Input Supply Voltage
Input Supply Current
<1.5
0.5
83
0.033 psec per
division
<1.0
0.1
100
1.4 per encoder
pulse
330
0.0047 psec per
encoder pulse
<1.5
0.5
ODL-600
Manual Lead
Screw, mirror
25x2=50mm
635 per turn
167
2 psec per turn
<1.0
0.15
230x30x60
145x60x55
242x30x60
102x51x25
-35 for multimode fiber versions, -40, -50, -60 for singlemode fiber versions
N/A
N/A
2.9
N/A
N/A
N/A
6V to 8V
N/A
N/A
N/A
400mA
N/A
ODL-650
Servo-motor,
Mirror
25x2=50mm
1 per encoder
pulse
167
0.0033 psec per
encoder pulse
<1.0
0.15
102x51x25
1
6V to 8V
180mA
1
Theoretical, based on thread pitch and motor/encoder resolution. The MC/RS232 versions of the ODL-300 and ODL-650 can generate two
counts per encoder pulse, effectively doubling the resolution.
2
Includes variation of insertion loss over the entire travel range.
For 1550nm wavelengths singlemode or PM fibers, at room temperature
3
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1. What Delay Range (in psec or mm) do you need?
2. What Resolution (in psec or mm) do you need?
3. Do you need a readout of the position?
4. Do you need electrical control?
5. Do you need computer control? What Interface will you use?
6. Do you intend to make your own drive circuit?
7. What wavelength will you be using?
8. What fiber type are you using? Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining?
9. What is the worst acceptable return loss?
10. What kind of fiber connectors are you using?
5
ODL-A-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L(-I)
A = Version:
100 = Standard Style, with lead screw
200 = Standard Style, with micrometer
300 = Standard Style, with DC servo motor
600 = Reflector Style, with lead screw
650 = Reflector Style, with Servo motor
I = Interface (ODL-300 & 650 models only)
MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface
with built-in manual TTL control lines
PC for direct connections to the motor,
encoder and limit switches (no driver).
W = Wavelength:Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of
the device
Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the
input and 7 meters at the output, replace the
L with 1,7
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns,
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber sizes
8/125 for 1550nm PM fiber sizes
See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other fiber sizes
JD = Fiber Jacket type:
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced PVC
cable
F = Fiber type: M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
P=Polarization maintaining
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other
jacket sizes
LB = Backreflection level: 35, 40, 50, or 60dB
60dB is available for 1300 and 1550nm only
Multimode devices are only available with
35dB
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
X,Y = Input & Output Connector Codes:
X = No connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
LCA = Angled LC
MU = MU
A customer building an interferometer needs a manual delay line for 1300nm, using singlemode fiber. He needs pigtails 1 meter long on one
side, and 10 meters long on the other side, and does not need connectors. Because he is fusion splicing, he prefers uncabled fiber. While
he does not require to read the exact delay, he does need as long a travel range as possible. Return losses do need to be as low as possible,
to prevent additional interference effects.
Part Number
ODL-100-11-1300-9/125-S-60-XX-1-1,10
Description
Variable Fiber Optic Delay Line for 1300nm, with manual lead screw and 60dB return loss.
Pigtails are 1 meter long on the input, 10 meters long on the output, 0.9mm OD tight buffered
9/125 SM fibers, no connectors.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: How do I convert travel in mm to delays in picoseconds?
A: The delay is equal to the distance divided by the speed of light in air. 1mm corresponds to 3.33psec of delay. Note that in the ODL-600
and ODL-650 models, the light travels the distance twice, so the delay is twice the motion of the optics.
Q: Is the minimum delay zero picoseconds?
A: No, there is a minimum delay, due to the minimum separation between the optics, and the length of the attached fibers. A one meter long
fiber produces a 4.9nsec delay. The minimum separation of the optics induces between 30psec and 150psec delay, depending on the
model. The delay range specified in the tables is for relative delay.
Q: Are the units calibrated?
A: The ODL-200 models have a micrometer, to give the direct readout of the motion, in mm. The ODL-300 with controller and ODL-650 also
givea readout of the delay in picoseconds. The other models do not have any calibration. Note that these are relative readouts, not
absolute (see the previous question).
Q: What are the advantages and disadvantages of the inline version versus the reflector style?
A: Generally the inline version gives the largest travel ranges versus the reflector style, and thus can produce the greatest delays. However
the reflector style unit has the advantage that the fibers themselves do not move. This makes the reflector style the best choice for
commercial applications as opposed to lab use.
Q: Do I need special software to run the ODL-300 or ODL-650 delay lines?
A: Both units are operated with simple text commands that can be sent via terminal programs such as Windows™ Hyperterminal™.
Active X™ control and Labview™ driver, as well as a direct Windows interface program are also provided.
Q: What voltages and currents do the motor driven delay lines use?
A: The ODL-300 requires an input voltage between 6 to 8 Volts, and can draw up to 400mA of current when the motor is turning. The ODL650 also requires 6 to 8 Volts, and can draw up to 180mA of current when operating. If necessary, the ODL-650 can be set up to work with
a 5V supply voltage. However, that will limit the speed. If necessary, OZ Optics can provide a 12V version of the ODL-650 style delay line,
which will accept supply voltages from 6V to 12.25V. This option will provide slightly greater speed. However it will consume more current
than the standard model, and would have to be custom built.
6
Application Notes:
Example Application: Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) is an important issue in the quest to build high speed (10GBs, 40GBs, and higher)
communication networks. An input signal travelling along a single mode fiber normally has some distortion, due to polarization mode
dispersion. The signal effectively has been split into two arbitrary, yet orthogonal polarizations, and one polarization is leading the other. A
delay line is a crucial element in building compensators for PMD.
The figure below shows how to use a delay line to compensate for polarization modes dispersion. The light from the singlemode input is split
into two using a polarizing beam splitter. A polarization controller installed just before the splitter is used to convert the arbitrary polarizations
that the signal has been split into S and P polarization. The faster S polarization is routed through the delay line while the slower P polarization
is sent straight into the combiner. The combined signals then reach the receiver. A control system monitors the quality of the signal at the
receiver, and dynamically adjusts the polarization and the delay to get the two signals to match up again. Thus the PMD is the system can
be corrected in real time.
Figure 6: PMD Compensation System Using a Variable Delay Line
Mounting: The base of the delay lines have mounting holes for attachment to a rack or printed circuit board. For best results, the mounting
surface should be rigid and free of vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws and use screws that thread in no more than
2mm. Tightening the mounting screws too much will warp the base and potentially increase losses either temporarily or permanently
Electrical Connections: The ODL-650 unit has a Hirose DF11-16P-2DS16-pin connector. The pin designations are given below:
Pin
1
2
3
4
Name
GND
GND
Select
Vin
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Reverse
Rx
Forward
Tx
N/A
N/A
Reset
N/A
End
N/A
Home
N/A
Function
Common Ground
Common Ground
Select TTL interface
Input DC supply voltage;
(Min +6V Max +8V)
Move the motor in reveres
RS232- Receive input line
Move the motor forward
RS232- Transmit output line
Do not connect
Do not connect
Hardware Reset line
Do not connect
End limit switch
Do not connect
Home limit switch
Do not connect
Comment
For TTL interface, Input Active Low
For ODL-300 Max 400mA
For ODL-650 Max 180mA
For TTL interface, Input Active Low
(1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) (15)
(2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) (16)
Hirose 16-pin connector
For TTL interface, Input Active low
Factory use
Factory use
Active Low, Min 100mS
Factory use
TTL output, active low
Factory use
TTL output, active low
Factory use
When you first connect the wire harness to the 16-pin port, make sure that the power is off. Before turning the power on, make sure that your
connections have the correct voltage levels and polarity (given above). If you have ordered an RS-232 interface, the harness comes terminated
with a DB9 connector that plugs directly into your computer's serial port. For special applications, the harness is left without a connector and
must be terminated by the user for the communications type of their choice.
7
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
OPTICAL FIBER AMPLIFIERS FOR CATV APPLICATIONS
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Total output power from 25 mW to 5 W
Low noise figure
Up to 16 output ports
Low CSO and CTB
RS232, RS485, 10Base-T, and USB network interfaces
High performance-to-cost ratio
Custom design flexibility
Applications
•
•
•
•
ry
Analog and digital HFC/CATV networks
SONET/SDH systems
Access Networks
Free space communications
na
mi
li
e
Pr
The OFAC series of high performance, low noise and high output
power amplifiers are specially designed for CATV network systems,
where signal distortion must be minimized. These amplifiers feature
a low noise figure, and feature very low Composite Second Order
(CSO) and Composite Triple Beat (CTB) distortion levels while
providing output powers from 25 mW up to 5 Watts.
Amplifiers can be provided in either single or multiple output
versions, with up to 16 output ports. They can be used in both
OEM Module Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier
single wavelength and DWDM systems, thus providing the
perfect opportunity to build flexible CATV network systems.
OFAC amplifiers have a flexible architecture and can be
customized to meet special requirements for electrical
connections, packaging and optical characteristics. The
amplifiers can be supplied in either a 19" rack-mount case, an
OEM module format or in a gain block. Contact an OZ Optics
sales representative for more details.
Typical Performance
Parameters
Unit
Value
Total Output Power
dBm
14 to 37
Input Power
dBm
-4 to +6 Standard
Number of Output Ports
1,2,4,8,12 or 16
Port to Port Variation
dB
+/-0.4 Maximum
Operating Wavelength
nm
1540 - 1565 Standard1
Fiber core/cladding diameters
µm
9/125
Noise Figure (Pin = 0 dBm)
dB
Typically <4.5
dBm
-30 (Maximum)
dB
55 (Minimum)
Operating Voltage
V
100 to 120V or 200 to 240V, 50 or 60 Hz
Operating Temperature Range
°C
Storage Temperature Range
°C
-10 to +50 Standard
-10 to +65 Extended
-40 to +80
Humidity
%
0 to 95 Non-condensing
Input Pump Leakage
Return Loss
1
Other wavelength ranges available upon request
DTS0112
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
26-May-05
1
Packaging
All OFAC amplifiers can be supplied in either a 19" rack-mount case, an OEM module format or in a gain block.
Ordering information:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most
manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our
standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than
normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These
points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible.
Questionnaire:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What gain do you require?
How flat do you require the spectrum of the amplifier to be?
Do you require that the amplifier be remotely controllable? If yes, what sort of interface do you prefer?
What is your operating wavelength range?
What style of fiber connectors do you use?
Do you need more than one output?
What sort of enclosure do you prefer?
Description
Part Number
Optical Fiber Amplifier for CATV
N
Number of Output Ports.
Specify 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16. The input
signal will be amplified and split
amongst the output ports.
P
Maximum Output Power in dBm:
Specify a value between 14 and 37 ,
corresponding to 14 and 37 dBm
respectively
W
S
O FA C - N - B - P - W - S - F - X - O - I
Wavelength range:
1540/1565 for 1540 to 1565 nm
(Custom wavelength ranges are
available. Contact OZ Optics with your
specific requirements)
I
Control interface:
R = RS232
U = USB
X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block
version or basic version
O
Options:
A = Automatic gain control with
microprocessor
B = Basic version
M = Microprocessor controlled.
X
Receptacle style:
3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
E = E2000/PC
EA = E2000/APC
See table 6 of the standard table for
other connector types
F
Flatness:
N = Non-flattened
F = Flattened
Packaging style:
2 = Rack mountable
3 = OEM module
4 = Gain Block - No electronics
provided, user must provide pump
driver
9 = Custom
Standard Accessories:
Bar Code
2737
2736
Part Name
Description
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord
POWER CORD - UK
UK power cord
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
OPTICAL FIBER AMPLIFIERS FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Total output power from 50 mW to 40 W
1 µm and 2 µm operating wavelengths
Excellent beam quality
RS232, RS485, 10Base-T, and USB network interfaces
High performance-to-cost ratio
Custom design flexibility
ry
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
ina
lim
e
Pr
IR spectroscopy
Medicine
IR imaging
Lidar
Pollution control
Research & Development
OEM Module Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier
The OZ Optics optical fiber amplifier product line now includes the OFAS
series of special optical amplifiers, designed to meet growing customer
needs in IR spectroscopy, medicine, IR imaging, and other applications.
These new optical fiber amplifiers provide output powers from 40 mW up
to 40 W, at 1 micron and 2 micron wavelengths, with excellent beam
quality. These amplifiers have a flexible architecture that can be
customized to meet special demands with regards to electrical
connections, packaging and optical characteristics. Contact an OZ Optics
sales representative for more details.
Bench Top Unit Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier
Typical Performance
Parameters
Unit
Value
nm
1050 - 1120 or 1900 -2100 Standard1
Total Output Power
dBm
Input Power
dBm
17 to 25 or 30 to 46 at 1.06 µm
17 to 20 or 30 to 37 at 2.00 µm
-10 to +8 standard
Operating Wavelength
Operating Temperature Range
°C
Storage Temperature Range
°C
-10 to +50 Standard
-10 to +65 Extended
-40 to +80
Humidity
%
0 to 95 Non-condensing
1
Other wavelength ranges available upon request
DTS0113
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
26-May-05
1
Packaging
All OFAS amplifiers can be supplied in either a bench-top unit, a 19" rack-mount case, an OEM module format, or in a gain block.
Ordering information:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most
manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our
standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than
normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These
points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible.
Questionnaire:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What is your operating wavelength range?
What gain do you require?
How flat do you require the spectrum of the amplifier to be?
What sort of amplifier do you need (booster, pre-amplifier, In-line amplifier or Mid-Span amplifier)?
Do you require that the amplifier be remotely controllable? If yes, what sort of interface do you prefer?
What style of fiber connectors do you use?
What sort of enclosure do you prefer?
Description
Part Number
Optical Fiber Amplifier for Special
Applications
P
Maximum output power in dBm:
Specify a value between 17 and 46 ,
depending on wavelength
W
Wavelength range:
1050/1120 = 1050 to 1120 nm
1900/2100 = 1900 to 2100 nm
(Custom wavelength ranges are
available. Contact OZ Optics with your
specific requirements)
a/b
S
O FA S - 1 - B - P - W - a / b - S - N - X - O - I
Fiber size: core/cladding diameters, in
microns
Packaging style:
2 = Rack mountable
3 = OEM module
4 = Gain Block - No electronics
provided, user must provide pump
driver
9 = Custom
I
Control interface:
R = RS232
U = USB
X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block
version or basic version
O
Options:
A = Automatic gain control with
microprocessor
B = Basic version
M = Microprocessor controlled.
X
Receptacle style:
3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra
FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
E = E2000/PC
EA = E2000/APC
See table 6 of the standard table
for other connector types
Standard Accessories:
Bar Code
2737
2736
Part Name
Description
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord
POWER CORD - UK
UK power cord
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
OPTICAL FIBER RANGER
Product Description
The OZ-FR-110 and OZ-FR-120 are compact, cost-effective
portable singlemode fiber fault-event data loggers. They are light,
easy to use, and hence ideal for fiber cable troubleshooting,
repairing, and restoration.
Just like an OTDR, the fiber ranger injects the laser pulse into the
fiber under test and picks up scattered and reflected optical signals.
However, the structure of the fiber ranger is highly simplified to
make it a low cost, high performance fiber optical test instrument.
Although the fiber ranger neither displays the trace of the fiber nor
gives any information about the fiber and event losses, it can
identify types and locations of both based on a set of predetermined threshold values, and goes throughout the entire
length of the fiber under test.
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Portable, compact, and low cost
Backlit LCD display
Membrane keypad ideal for fieldwork
LED indicators for battery charging, and LD lasing status
RS-232 port for data transmission
Built-in Ni-MH rechargeable batteries
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fiber length measurements
Fiber break point locating
Fiber event identification
Acceptance testing
Fiber link supervision
Fiber identification
DTS0100
Figure 1: Handheld Optical Fiber Ranger
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
23-Sept-04
1
Standard Product Specifications
OZ-FR-110
Model
OZ-FR-120
Wavelength
-13
-15
1310±20nm
1550±20nm
Fiber Under Test
1310±20nm
9/125 um singlemode fiber
Optical Connector
FC/PC
SC
Detection
InGaAs
InGaAs
Reflection Event
80 km
100 km
20 km
Non-Reflection Event
40 km
50 km
10 km
Max. Detection Range
Reflection Event Dead Zone
50 m
5m
Non-reflection Event Dead Zone (3dB)
200 m
20 m
Distance Accuracy (Reflective Event Detection)
±(2 m+ 3 x 10-5 x Distance) (Fiber refractive index error not included)
Dimensions (L x W x H)
196 x 100 x 40 mm (7.72 x 3.94 x 1.57 in.) not including bumper size
Weight
600 g (1.32 lbs.)
Temperature
Operating: 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage: -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Humidity
0 to 95% (non-condensing)
Memory
Up to 550 measurements
Power Consumption
Available Number of Tests for Fully Charged Battery: 10,000
Power Supply
OZ-FR-110: AC adapter or a 7.2 V NiMH Battery; OZ-FR-120: 4 AA Alkaline Batteries
Notes:
Measurements are made at 23 ± 2°C.
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
OPTICAL POWER METER WITH SMART DETECTOR HEAD
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-speed response (over 1000 readouts/s)
Wavelengths: 440 to 900 nm for visible (VIS) and 800 to 1700 nm for infrared (IR)
NIST traceable
Built-in attenuator for 20 or 30 dB attenuation; automatically detects when the
attenuator is engaged
Selectable sampling rate (from 7Hz to 1800Hz)
Optional POM-110 hand-held display unit for controlling one or two detector heads
Analog voltage output (optional)
Interchangeable optical receptacles
Mounting holes on sides and bottom
Low power consumption (<60 mA at 5 V)
Windows software drivers (Active-X Controls) for Visual Basic(1) and LabVIEW (2)
Built-in RS-232 and I²C(3) interfaces
USB version offered
Selectable RS-232 baud rate (from 9600 to 115,200 bps)
Wide dynamic range
Can be used for free space applications
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic fiber optical alignment and collimation systems
Multi-channel optical power measurements
General optical power measurements such as IL measurement
Multi-channel test set
Network installation and maintenance
Smart Detector Head Optical Power
Meter And Interchangeable Receptacles
Smart Detector Head
Driven By Hand-Held Unit
Product Description
The Smart Detector Head incorporates the features of a full-function optical power meter
(except display) in a miniature housing. This makes it ideal for applications that require
multiple detectors in a small space. By using a simple RS232 interface, the device can be
used alone or in parallel with other devices to measure or monitor optical power.
Smart Detector Head Driven By PC
The Smart Detector Head has a fast response speed, wide dynamic range, and an
optional analog output, making it well suited to a variety of applications. Using very
simple commands, the Smart Detector Head can easily be adapted to custom
requirements, such as optical alignment and collimation systems.
The Smart Detector Head can provide readings in any convenient format including
watts, dBm, dB, or relative (P/Pref). More than one Smart Detector Head can be
connected to a computer, with the number of units being limited only by the number of
available serial ports. Multiple units can also be configured using I2C(3) interface. When
used with a PC, a power supply provides power to the Smart Detector Head via an
adaptor cable, which also connects the PC to the Smart Detector Head.
Smart Detector Head With Special
Options Attachment
The Smart Detector Head has a manually activated built-in selectable attenuator that
can be inserted into the light path without disturbing the rest of the setup. The Smart
Detector Head automatically senses the presence of the attenuator and corrects the
light measurements accordingly.
The Smart Detector Head can report the date of calibration, along with the serial number
of the unit. Configuration information, including wavelength, reference power, and the
units of measurement, is retained in internal, non-volatile memory when the unit is
turned off.
The Smart Detector Head can accommodate a variety of standard, interchangeable
screw-in receptacles.
DTS0057
RS-232 To GPIB Interface
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
17-Feb-2005
1
Ordering Information for Custom Parts:
SDH-W-Z
Smart Detector Head:
W = Wavelength:
IR = 800 to 1700 nm
VIS = 440 to 900 nm
Optical connector receptacle:
Z = Other options: -ND=20 = Standard version with 20 dB attenuator
-ND=30 = High power version with 30 dB attenuator
-A-ND=20 = Standard version with 20 dB
attenuator and analog voltage output
-A-ND=30 = High power version with 30 dB
attenuator and analog voltage output
-NF = without attenuator filter
SDHR-X
X = Receptacle code:
2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5 mm diameter ferrules
3 = Standard flat, super, or ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Q: Is the hand-held display unit POM-110 necessary for
operating the Smart Detector Heads?
A: No. The Smart Detector Heads can be driven by a PC.
Q: What software comes with the Smart Detector Head?
A: Windows: interface software Active-X Control for Visual
Basic and LabVIEW driver.
Q: I need to format the measurement data into a report. How
can I do this?
A: Remote control of the Smart Detector Head via a computer
allows direct output of the readings to a text file. The data
can then be imported into a spreadsheet program to draft
the report.
Q: Is analog output a standard feature?
A: No. It is an option.
Application Notes
The Smart Detector Head provides optical power measurements
with high resolution, high speed, and wide dynamic range. The
SDH features high optical power measurement, programmable
sampling rate, optional analog voltage output, and low power
consumption. Several units can be used simultaneously to create
a multi-channel measurement system.
A PC can be used as a virtual instrument, with the Visual Basic
and LabVIEW drivers, to make the SDH a reliable, flexible, and
effective device for automatic fiber optical alignment and
collimation, fiber optic assembling and testing, quality control and
measurement, network installation, component and system
troubleshooting, and general optical power measurement
applications.
Automatic fiber optical alignment
In the manufacture of fiber optic components, it is often necessary
to attach an optical fiber to a semiconductor device such as a
laser diode, a semiconductor optical amplifier, an optical switch,
or any of the other numerous types of opto-electronic devices.
Coupling the light into the optical fiber is a very real problem in
these applications. When the alignment tolerances are very tight,
typically in the sub µm regime, auto alignment systems are
required to achieve maximum coupling efficiency, and a power
meter is needed to measure the optical power level.
OZ Optics’ Smart Detector Head can communicate with a
computer control system through an RS-232 or I²C interface.
Optionally, a USB interface may be used. The high-speed
sampling rate, of up to 1800 Hz, high resolution of 0.01 dB, high
dynamic range of 85 dB, and analog voltage signal output make
the SDH a good choice for rapid and accurate alignment.
High-power measurement
Except for preamplifiers, which are designed to generate a few
mW at most, all optical amplifiers generate power levels that
exceed the measurement range of conventional power meters.
Today, the highest powers from EDFA exceed 1 W. When the
output power is a key parameter, the question is: How can such
large power levels be measured with good accuracy and good
reliability?
6
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
Optical Power Regulators
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controls Output Power to ±0.1dB
35dB dynamic range
Millisecond Response Speed
Single and Multi-channel Versions
Singlemode and PM Fiber Versions
OEM, Rack Mountable, and Stand Alone Versions
Applications:
•
•
Power Stabilization in DWDM Networks
Signal Conditioning in Test Equipment
Stand Alone Optical Power Regulator
Product Description:
OZ Optics has successfully combined its expertise in variable attenuators
with its optical power monitor technology to develop an optical power
regulator. This product allows one to maintain the output optical power
from a fiber optic system at a constant level, countering changes caused
by PDL, reduced amplifier gain, or other sources.
Pr
eli
mi
na
ry
The optical power regulator uses the output from an optical power
monitor as feedback to control an attenuator. An analog feedback circuit
uses the power monitor signal to control the attenuator behavior. Simple
controls allow the user to enable or disable the feedback circuit, monitor
the signal intensity, and control the output power through the fiber. The
system can maintain output power levels constant to better than ±0.1 dB,
with millisecond response speed.
Optical power regulators are used wherever one has an unstable output
from and optical fiber and one needs a more stable signal. They are ideal
for power stabilization in DWDM networks, where changes in power can
produce transmission errors. The complete unit is available either as a
miniature module that can be integrated into other devices, a stand alone
module for testing, or as a rack mountable unit for optical networks.
Contact OZ Optics for further information.
Standard Product Specifications:
Minimum Insertion Loss
Attenuation Range
Input power range
Wavelength Dependent Response
Polarization Dependence
1
1dB Typically
50dB
-30dBm to +25dBm
±0.25dB (over the wavelength range of 1510-1610nm)1
±0.1dB
Results given for an optical power regulator for 1550nm. Responses for regulators for other wavelengths will vary.
DTS0058
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
03/21/03
1
Questionnaire
1. Do you need a stand alone unit, a rackmountable unit, or a miniature OEM unit?
2. What is the operating wavelength?
3. What type of fiber are you using (singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining (PM)?
What are the core and cladding sizes?
4. What type of connectors are you using?
5. Is there a minimum return loss specification?
Ordering Information:
OPR-A-W-a/b-F-XY-LB
Optical Power Regulator
A model Type: 100 = Stand Alone Unit
200 = Rack Mountable Unit
300 = OEM unit
LB = Backreflection level. 50dB for
singlemode and polarization
maintaining fibers,
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers:
Example: 1300/1550 for standard telecom
wavelength range
X = Connector code :
3S= Super NTT-FC/PC
3U= Ultra NTT- FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC-PC
8= AT&T-ST
SC= SC
SCA = Angled SC
See standard tables data sheet for other
standard fiber sizes
a/b = Fiber Core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber.
See standard tables data sheet for other
standard fiber sizes
F = Fiber Type:
S=Singlemode
P=Polarization Maintaining
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts
A customer needs a stand alone optical power regulator to control the power from his 980nm pump laser in a fiber amplifier unit. The
customer is using singlemode fiber for that wavelength, which has a 6 micron core and a 125 micron cladding. He requires a unit with
FC/APC connectors on both ends. The OZ Optics part number is as follows: OPR-100-980-6/125-S-3A3A-50
Application Notes
Figure 1 show the basic concept behind the optical power regulator. Light from the source is sent through an electrically controlled
variable optical attenuator. An optical power monitor is connected to the attenuator output. The monitor taps a small amount of light from
the fiber and measures the signal intensity. This signal is fed into the feedback circuitry to control the attenuator. The user sets the
desired output power from an external control knob. The feedback circuit can be enabled or disabled though an external switch. An
analog output voltage allows external monitoring.
Figure 1: Operating Principle of the Optical Power Regulator
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
OPTICAL TIME-DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER
Product Description
OZ-OTDR is a compact, cost-effective portable Optical Timedomain Reflectometer (OTDR), designed for full-range fiber fault
detection. It delivers the same features as a desktop model.
Designed specifically with fieldwork in mind it is ideal for optical
fiber installation/maintenance, field construction, and other on-site
fault-locations analysis. Its outputs are formatted to ease planning
and documentation efforts and to minimize time spent on-site.
The OTDR encompasses two parts: a plug-in module (OZ-MMO)
which performs all OTDR functions, and a Mainframe Interface
(OZ-MFI) console which provides power, data interfaces, an LCD
display, a touch-screen input, and a built-in thermal printer.
On the OZ-MMO, a short laser pulse is injected into the fiber
under test and an avalanche photodiode (APD) picks up any
scattered and reflected optical signals. This process is repeated
again and again and an integration process is also invoked to
suppress the noise. The OZ-MFI Console (OZ-MFI-001) is a
miniature 80486-based computer that is powered by four
rechargeable Lithium Ion batteries or AC. The application program
(AP) execution sequence is done automatically using the touchscreen commands, and the digitized waveform is displayed in 3
seconds.
Figure 1: Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer
The AP consists of two windows. The Event Handling window
(default) allows for parameter setting, measurement data storage
and event analysis processing. The Event Mapping window
provides mapping of a measured trace to a predefined landmark
table, and subsequently the actual fault location, instead of pure
distance, can be shown.
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
On-line monitoring
Fiber length measurements
Fiber break point location
Acceptance testing
Fiber attenuation measurements
Splicing loss detection
Figure 2: Typical Operating Displays
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fault event analysis software
Real-time display
Touch LCD, high resolution screen
Mapping function with actual position display
Rugged, handheld and easy to use
RS-232 output port for a PC interface
Powered by either rechargeable Lithium Ion battery or AC
Emulation program for data analysis PC
DTS0099
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
23-Sept-04
1
Standard Product Specifications: OZ-MFI-001
Processor
Am486DX5 133MHz
Memory
16 MB DRAM
Storage
1. Compact Flash Card 32 Mbytes
2. 3.5" Floppy disk
Display
10.4" TFT VGA (VRAM 1MB /256 Color)
Pointing Device
Touch screen
Printer
Built-in
Dimensions (L x W x H)
320 x 240 x 60 mm
Weight
3.6 kg
Battery Life
3 hours
Power supply
Lithium Ion Battery (10.8 VDC) & AC charge adaptor (100~240 V. 50~60 Hz)
Standard Product Specifications: OZ-MMO Modules
Model
OZ-MMO-320
OZ-MMO-321
Wavelength
1310/1550 ± 20 nm
1550/1625 ± 20 nm
Fiber Under Test
9/125 µm singlemode fiber
Optical Connector
FC/PC
Pulse Width (ns)
10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000, 10000, 20000, Auto
Effective
35/33
33/31
SNR=1
38/36
36/34
Dynamic Range (dB)
Event Dead Zone
5m
Attenuation Dead Zone
40 m
Sampling Resolution
0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 m
Max. Sampling Points
128,000
Distance Accuracy
±(2 m + 3 x 10 -5 x distance + marker resolution) (Fiber refractive index error not included)
Linearity
± 0.05 dB/dB or 0.1 dB (whichever is greater)
Return Loss Accuracy
± 4 dB
Max. Display Range
240 km (150 mile)
Notes:
Measurements are made at 23 ± 2°C.
All brands and product names are trademarks of their respective holders.
Order Information
OZ-FPL-320
OZ-MFI-001 x 1+ OZ-MMO-320 x 1+ all accessories x 1
OZ-FPL-321
OZ-MFI-001 x 1+ OZ-MMO-321 x 1+ all accessories x 1
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
RY
NA EET
I
IM H
EL TA S
R
P DA
POLARIZATION DEPENDENT LOSS EMULATOR
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fixed or manually controllable Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL)
Low insertion loss
Broad wavelength range
Wide range of connectors available
Rugged and compact design
Low cost
Applications:
• PDL Compensation
• Reference PDL source
• Test Equipment PDL calibration
Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator
Product Description:
OZ Optics produces a Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) Emulator. The emulator produces a specific amount of polarization dependent loss by
transmitting the light through a tiltable optical window. The orthogonal polarizations will have different transmission and reflection properties
through the window, according to Fresnel's laws of reflection. This produces the PDL effect. Emulators are available with either a fixed PDL
(between 0.05 and 1dB) or a variable PDL(between 0.05 and 0.5dB).
The PDL emulator is used to simulate the PDL behavior of a passive component within an optical link. This includes devices like variable optical
attenuators, optical modulators, array waveguides, fiber Bragg gratings, optical switches or fused couplers. One can thus examine the effects of
PDL in a system, and work out a PDL budget for an optical link. OZ Optics also produces a polarization dependent loss meter, and polarized
stable sources, and polarization controllers, to further help study the effect of polarization in optical systems. Please refer to the
related data sheets for detailed information.
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
13439
PDLE-11-1550-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-0.5
13377
PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S
1550nm, manually variable 0.5dB Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator with
1m long, singlemode fiber with 3 mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC
connectors.
Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles for
wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm
2836
FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1550-S-1
Fiber Optic Stable Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mW
output, for 9/125 core/cladding singlemode fiber with super FC/PC receptacle.
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A research center wants to introduce varying amounts of PDL into a WDM fiber optic network link and evaluate the induced bit error rate. They
need to order the following parts:
Bar Code
13439
13377
DTS0065
Part Number
PDLE-11-1550-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-0.5
PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S
Description
1550nm, manually variable 0.5dB Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator with
1m long, singlemode fiber with 3 mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC
connectors
Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacle for
wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
04/02
1
Standard Product Specifications1:
Part number
PDLE-11-1550-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-0.5
Wavelength range
2
3
4
1510 nm to 1590 nm (for uniform PDL)
Fiber Type
9/125µm single mode fiber with 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC Jacket
Connector Type
Ultra Polished Physical Contact NTT-FC connector
PDL Dynamic Range3
0.05 dB to 0.5 dB
Insertion Loss
< 2 dB
Optical Return Loss
> 50 dB
Operating temperature
0 to 40 °C
Storage temperature
-10 to +60 °C with < 80% none-condensing relative humidity
Max input Power
1
2
4
200 mW
Reference condition: 23°C measured with 1mw, 1550 nm fiber optic stable source after 30 minutes warm-up period
Broader wavelength range can be provided upon request
Fixed PDL value between 0.05 and 1dB can be ordered
Higher power handling can be provided upon request
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we
will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation,
so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Do you want a fixed PDL emulator or a variable one?
What is the PDL level you require?
What is your operating wavelength range?
What type of connectors are you using?
How long should the fibers be?
What is the fiber core/cladding diameters and fiber jacket OD?
Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator:
PDLE-1A-W-a/b-S-XY-JD-L-V
A = 0 for fixed PDL value
PDL values in dB, between 0.05dB to
1dB for fixed type
0.5, for variable type with range
from 0.05dB to 0.5dB
V=
1 for manually variable PDL value
W = Wavelength in nm:
980,1064, 1310,1480,1550,1625
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns.
6/125 for 980, 1064nm wavelengths
9/125 for 1310, 1480, 1550 or 1625nm
wavelengths
L = Fiber length in meters
JD = Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
X,Y = Input & Output Connector Codes
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
8= AT&T-ST
MU= MU type connector
LC= LC type connector
X=Unterminated
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts:
A test equipment manufacturer needs a 0.25dB fixed PDL Emulator for 1550nm to use as a reference. As they intend to splice the device into
their system, they want 2 meter long leads, no connectors, and 0.9mm cable.
Part number is as follows: PDLE-10-1550-9/125-S-XX-1-2-0.25
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: Is the variable emulator calibrated?
A: The current manual design has a scale but is not calibrated. Calibrated versions will be available shortly.
Q: Does the insertion loss listed in the specifications include the PDL?
A: Yes, it does.
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZATION DEPENDENT LOSS METER
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fast PDL measurement (< 1sec)
Insensitive to external power drift
Very low variation in internal loss (<0.003dB)
Wide wavelength range operability
Swept wavelength capability
High resolution
Statistical measurement analysis
Replaceable detector receptacles
Built in graphical interface with color touch screen display
Optional high power versions
Low cost
Large PDL dynamic range
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
Optical passive component qualification and testing
Characterization of PDL dependency versus wavelength
Fiber Bragg Grating qualification
Polarization Dependent Gain (PDG) measurement of EDFA
Quality Control
Polarization Dependent Loss Meter With
Source And Device Under Test
Product Description:
OZ Optics produces a Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) meter that integrates a sophisticated optoelectronic design with a user friendly
interface. The meter is designed to be insensitive to external optical power drift and generates very low insertion loss fluctuations during a
measurement cycle. OZ Optics' PDL meter can be used to measure any pigtailed optical passive components acurately and repeatably,
including fiber array wave guides, variable optical attenuators, isolators, couplers, switches and other optical devices.
The meter offers the capability of quickly characterizing PDL versus wavelength over a specified wavelength range. This is useful for testing a
variety of optical components such as fiber Bragg Gratings. The meter is capable of acquiring and statistically analyzing multiple PDL
measurements during a user-adjustable period of time.
The meter includes a built-in computer using the WindowsTM CE operating system and a color touch screen. The built-in graphical display makes
data analysis easy. The unit can be remotely operated via the serial interface port (RS232, RS485) or via a parallel printer port. An
optional GPIB to RS232 converter is also available.
OZ Optics provides fixed and variable polarization dependent loss emulators. These emulators produce a precise level of polarization
dependent loss, from 0.05 to 1dB. These devices can be used as references for calibration if required. OZ Optics also offers polarized fiber optic
sources, singlemode patchcords and polarization maintaining patchcords to complete your test setup. See the related data sheets for details.
TM
Windows is a trade mark of Microsoft Corporation
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
Bar Code
13377
Part Number
PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S
Description
Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles, adapted for
wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm
Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mW output, for 9/125
core/cladding singlemode fiber using Super FC/PC receptacle.
Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1310 nm wavelength, 1 mW output, for 9/125
core/cladding singlemode fiber using super FC/PC receptacle.
Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 9/125um singlemode jumper 1300/1550nm fiber, 3mm
OD PVC jacketed, 1 meter long
2836
FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1550-S-1
2835
FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1310-S-1
8136
SMJ-3U3U-1300/1550-9/125-3-1
13439
PDLE-11-1550-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-0.5
1550nm, 0.05 to 0.5dB manually variable Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator, with 1m
long singlemode fibers, with 3mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC connectors.
4572
4571
2737
2736
GPIB-RS232
GPIB-CABLE-2
POWER CORD - EUROPE
POWER CORD - UK
RS232 to GPIB Converter
GPIB Cable, 2m Long
Power cord for Europe
Power cord for UK plug
DTS0066
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
04/02
1
Standard Product Specifications1:
Part number
PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S
Measurement Method
Random method as described in FOTP-157 (TIA/EIA-455-157)
Wavelength range
1250 nm to 1650 nm
Fiber Type
Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber
PDL Dynamic Range
0.015 to 30 dB
Accuracy2
±0.005dB + 5% of PDL
Repeatability
±0.003dB + 2% of PDL
Insertion Loss
< 4 dB
Optical Return Loss
< -50 dB
Max input power3
1 mW
Scan time
<1s
Operating temperature
10 to 40 °C
Storage temperature
-10 to 60 °C
Dimensions (H-W-D)
18 cm x 27 cm x 30 cm
External Controls
RS-232, RS-485 DB-9 type connector, or Parallel Printer Port
Weight
5 kg
Input voltage
4
100 to 240 V AC / 50 to 60 Hz
Display
Color touch screen
Notes:
1 For 1550nm and 1310nm +/-40nm and at reference condition: 23°C ambient temperature after 30 minutes warm-up period
2 Measured at 1550nm and 1310nm with 0.5 mW pigtailed Fabry-Perot source up to 20dB. Lower accuracy will be obtained above 20dB
3 Higher input power available upon request.
4 Standard product comes with a North American power cord. Other power cords are available as accessories
Ordering Example For Standard Parts:
A North American Optical Passive component R&D facility wants to measure the PDL dependency versus wavelength of Fiber Bragg Gratings
across the C-band. We assume they are using their own tunable optical source. They need to order these following parts:
Bar Code
13377
Part Number
PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S
8136
SMJ-3U3U-1300/1550-9/125-3-1
Description
Polarization Dependent Loss Meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles for wavelengths from
1250nm to 1650nm
Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 9/125um singlemode jumper 1300/1550nm fiber, 3mm OD
PVC jacketed, 1 meter long
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
What is the output power of your source?
What is the PDL range suitable for your application?
Do you plan to test PDL dependency versus wavelength?
What type of connector do you need?
What is the dynamic range you require?
Polarization Dependent Loss Meter:
PDL-100-33X-1250/1650-9/125-S
X1 = Receptacle Code for detector:
3= Standard, Super, Ultra NTTFC/PC Receptacle
3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
8= AT&T-ST
2.5U= Universal Receptacle
MU= MU type connector
LC= LC type connector
Note:1Detector receptacle is replaceable.
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZATION EXTINCTION RATIO MEASUREMENT TEST SET FOR
V-GROOVE ASSEMBLIES AND PM PATCHCORDS
Features:
• Measures up to 40dB extinction ratios
• Complete kit for extinction ratio measurement
• Simple operation
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
Fiber optic component manufacturing
Automated alignment
Quality control and measurement
Product development
Component or system troubleshooting
Polarization Extinction Ratio Measurement Test Set
Product Description:
OZ Optics has bundled its polarized sources, polarization extinction ratio meters and master reference patchcords into one complete test set for
rapid testing of the polarization maintaining properties of optical components. We offer systems for testing devices terminated with connectors, and
now systems for testing the polarization properties of V-Groove arrays.
For standard components, the extinction ratio measurement system includes a polarized source with a rotatable polarizer, a polarization extinction
ratio meter, a quick connect adaptor for the extinction ratio meter, and a reference polarization maintaining patchcord.
For V-Groove arrays, OZ Optics offers an OEM version of the polarization measurement system. A manual operated type and semi-automated type.
The test set includes the polarized source with rotatable polarizer, an OEM version of the extinction ratio meter with external optics, a V-Groove
mount with a three axis position system, with one axis motorized for semi-automated type, a reference V-Groove array with a single PM fiber, and
an application software package for semi-automated type. The user only has to supply a Windows based computer to operate the system as a
semi-automated test bed.
Although extinction ratio measurement test sets are supplied as complete units, one may later need to purchase additional accessories, such as
receptacles or reference patchcords for other connector types. These products are readily available. For further information, please refer to the
following data sheets:
Sources and Accessories
Meters and Accessories
Reference Patchcords
Polarized Fiber Optic Source
Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter
Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter,
Polarization Maintaining Patchcord,
V-Groove Assemblies
Polarizartion Extinction Ratio Measurement Test Set For V-Groove Assemblies
DTS0068
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
01/17/03
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized
products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need
additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE)
charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will
be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What wavelength are you using?
What is the minimum acceptable polarization extinction ratio for the source?
What should be the minimum extinction ratio rating of the polarization extinction ratio meter?
What type of connector are you using on the source side?
What type of connector are you using on the detector side?
Do you need a custom mount?
Do you need a manual system or semi-automated system?
Polarization Extinction Ratio Measurement System:
X = Source Connector Code:
3 = Standard Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors.
PER-KIT-XY-W-1(-ER=ZZ)¹
¹ ZZ: Extinction Ratio: None if 30dB is required.
If an ER > 30dB is required, enter ER=35 or
ER=40 respectively for ER=35dB or ER=40dB.
W = Wavelength Range (in nm)
Example: (1550 for 1550nm, 1310 for 1310nm,
980 for 980nm)
MAN: = Add to part number for manual type
V-Groove measurement system
Y = Meter Connector Code:
3 = Standard Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
VGA = V-Groove array
Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors.
ER-Measurement Test System for V-Groove
(Manual Type)
Application Notes:
PM V-Groove Array ER Measurements
OZ Optics’ ER Meters for PM V-Groove arrays provide fast and accurate extinction ratio measurements of V-Groove assemblies manufactured
with PM fiber. The semi-automated system is computer controlled for hassle free control and measurements. The system consists of a polarized
light source, 3 axis measurement micro-stage with one axis motorized, an extinction ratio display set and PC software to control the system. The
stage and meter display are connected to a PC using RS-232 cables. The system is capable of measuring extinction ratios up to 40dB with an
accuracy of 1.5°.
Operating The PM V-Groove Array ER Measurement Test Set
The system works by first setting the software configurations for the appropriate V-Groove size and spacing. The V-Groove chip is then attached to
the mounting stage and the opposite end of the fiber is attached to the polarized source. After adjusting the stage to roughly align the fiber to the
meter, the software is started to take the ER measurement and automatically move the array to the next fiber position. Manual recording of the
measured ER and angle is required at this point; optional software is available to log the measurements for later use. At the software prompt, the
user must change the fiber on the polarized source so the next measurement can be taken.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZATION EXTINCTION RATIO METER
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Measures up to 40dB extinction ratios (over specific wavelength
ranges)
Built in RS232 Communications Interface
Wide wavelength range: 450 to 900 nm for visible; 850 to 1650
nm for IR
0.01dB resolution in ER and 0.3° resolution in angle
Accuracy in ER is 1dB, in angle is 0.5°
Measures up to 2 Watts CW input power
Rugged and compact design
Logging mode for continuous measurement
Interchangeable connector adaptors
CE Compliant
LOW COST!
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
Fiber optic component manufacturing
Automated alignment
Quality control and measurement
Product development
Component or system troubleshooting
Fiber Optic Polarization
Extinction Ratio Meter
Product Description:
OZ Optics’ Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter allows one to quickly
measure the output extinction ratio of light from a fiber. A rotating
polarizer measures the extinction ratio and the orientation of the
transmission axis with respect to the key on the connector. As an
option, neutral density filters can be added to the Extinction Ratio
Meter, to extend the maximum power range. These filters can be easily
inserted and removed, without disturbing your setup. These filters allow
power levels up to 2 Watts to be measured.
The meter operates in several modes. In real time mode, the meter
gives the extinction ratio and alignment. In logging mode, the meter
gives the worst case extinction ratio over a given time span. This mode
is ideal for QA measurements.
In addition the meter can provide a relative power readout, proportional
to the input power in dB. This readout is updated at up to 650 times per
second. The computer interface allows the unit to be used with
computer control units, for alignment purposes. The combination of
polarization and relative power functions allows the unit to be used for
complete auto-alignment of polarization maintaining components.
DTS0067
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
2-Sept-04
1
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
What is your application?
Will you be using the device at a specific wavelength?
What is the maximum extinction ratio that you will need to measure?
Do you require external control from a computer?
What type of computer interface do you require?
What is the maximum power level that you will be using?
What type of connector will you be using?
X = Connector Code: 3 = Standard Flat, Super or
Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
2.5U = Universal adaptor for
2.5 mm diameter ferrules
1.25U = Universal adaptor for
1.25 mm diameter ferrules
Consult factory for special connector and ferrule
adaptors.
Description
Part Number
Extinction Ratio Meter:
ER-100-W
Connector Adaptors:
ER-2X-W
Attenuators:
ER-ND-P-W
P = Attenuation Level: 10dB, 20dB, 30dB or 35dB
Note: For attenuations over 20dB, specify the
wavelength in nm
W = Wavelength Range (in nm) IR for 850-1650 nm
VIS for 450-900 nm
Note: If an ER of 40dB is required then specify either
980/1060 or 1290/1650 for the wavelength, and add
“-ER=40” to the part number. ER>40 dB is only
achieved on IR models over 980 to 1060 nm, and
1290 to 1650 nm wavelength ranges.
PMJ-XY-W-a/b-1-1-1-ER=30-G
Reference Patchcords:
X,Y = Connector Code: 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC connector
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC connector
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
MU = MU
Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors.
W = Wavelength (in nm):
Example: (1550 for 1550 nm, 1300 for 1300 nm, 980 for 980 nm)
a/b = Fiber core and cladding sizes, in microns:
(6/125 for 980 nm PM fiber, 7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber, 8/125 for
1550 nm PM fiber)
Ordering Example for Custom Parts:
A Canadian manufacturer of high power WDM for EDFA applications wants to do incoming extinction ratio qualification, at 980 nm, of
any purchased optical components prior to using them in his systems. They need to order these following parts:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
n/a
HIPFOSS-02-3A-980-10-BL-ER=40
980 nm, 10 mW Highly Stable Polarized Fiber Optic Source with an angled FC receptacle,
rotatable polarizer, achieving over 40dB extinction ratio. BL= blocking style attenuator
13485
ER-100-980/1060-ER=40
980 nm, Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER = 40dB. Receptacle is not included.
13488
ER-23A-980/1060-ER=40
980 nm, Angled FC Removable Receptacle for ER Meter. ER = 40dB
8704
ER-ND-20-IR
n/a
PMJ-3A3A-980-6/125-1-1-1-ER=30-G
20 dB attenuator for ER Meter for wavelengths from 850 nm to 1650 nm
Master patchcord, angled FC/PC to angled FC/PC, 6/125 um PM 980 nm fiber, 0.9 mm OD
jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and locked to the slow axis, ER=30dB minimum
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZATION MAINTAINING AND POLARIZING
SPLITTERS/COMBINERS
FEATURES:
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
High Extinction Ratios
Broad Wavelength Range
High Power Handling up to 2 Watt
Small, Rugged Packages
Low Insertion Losses
Large Volume Manufacturing Capacity
Low Cost!
APPLICATIONS
·
·
·
·
Miniature In-Line Style
Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation
EDFA Amplifiers
Coherent Telecommunication Systems
Fiber Optic Sensors
SPECIFICATIONS
Splitting Ratio:
Insertion Loss:
Return Losses:
Cross Talk:
Wavelengths:
Extinction Ratios:
50/50 to 95/5 for polarization maintaining splitters
Typically 0.6dB
-40, -50 and -60dB versions
Typically less than -40dB
400 - 1625nm
>20dB, 25dB and 30dB versions for polarizing splitters
Power Rating:
Operating Temp:
Up to 2W CW at 1550nm
-20°C to +60°C
Miniature T-Branch Style
R
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
OZ Optics’ beam splitters are used to divide and couple light
into two or more fibers. Light from one or two input fibers is
first collimated, then sent through a beamsplitting surface to
divide it in two. The resultant output beams are then focused
back into the output fibers. By utilizing OZ Optics' patented
tilt alignment technique, both one-by-two and two-by-two
splitters can be constructed with both low insertion losses
and low backreflection levels. Furthermore, splitters can be
built with different types of fiber on the input and output sides.
For example, a polarizing splitter could be built using a normal singlemode fiber as an input, and two polarization preserving fibers as outputs.
Polarizing beam splitters take an input beam of light and
divide it into two orthogonal polarizations. The output is typically polarized to greater than 20 dB extinction ratio from the
splitter outputs. A polarizing beam splitter can also be used
in the reverse direction to combine two polarized beams into
a single output fiber.
Broadband polarizing splitters are also available, operating at
both 1300nm and 1550nm, with only a 0.3dB variation in the
DTS0069
1
T
2
Standard Pigtail Style
insertion losses over the wavelength range. Versions are
also available for 400 to 700nm, and for 700 to 1100nm wavelengths.
Non-polarizing splitters will split an input beam of light at a
fixed splitting ratio independent of the input polarization state,
and without modifying the light's polarization. These splitters
are polarization insensitive over a wavelength range of
±30nm from the specified central wavelength. One-by-two
and two-by-two polarization maintaining splitters are made in
this fashion. All input and output ports will maintain polarization to greater than 20dB with this technique. Splitters that
maintain 30dB extinction ratios and lower than 40dB cross
talk are available on request.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
March-01
1
APPLICATIONS
Because of the inherent flexibility of the OZ Optics splitter design, an almost limitless set of configurations are possible. The
following set of examples show only a few of the possible applications.
1. Polarizing splitter / polarization combiner: A 1×2
splitter is required to split the light from a 1300nm singlemode fiber into two orthogonal polarizations, and then
transmit the two signals along two PM fibers. This splitter could also be used in the reverse direction to combine
the light from two PM fibers into one singlemode fiber.
The two PM fibers are aligned such that for either output
port the light is transmitted along the slow axis of the
fiber. The output extinction ratios from the PM fibers must
be at least 30dB, while the typical backreflection will be
25dB. The singlemode input fiber is terminated with a
male FC connector, while the two output fibers are unterminated. All three fibers are cabled using 3mm O.D.
kevlar cabling, and are one meter long. OZ Optics' part
number:FOBS-12P-111-9/125-SPP-1300-PBS-25-3XX-3-1-ER=30
2. Polarization preserving splitter: A two-by-two 50/50
splitter is required to combine the light from two 1550nm
PM fibers and split the combined light into two other PM
fibers. The input and output fibers must all maintain
polarization to at least 20 dB, and the backreflection level
should be around -60dB. All four fibers are one meter
long, in 1mm O.D. tubing, and unterminated. OZ part
number: FOBS-22P-1111-10/125-PPPP-1550-50/50-60-XXXX-1-1.
3. Polarization Analyzer: The output from a 1300nm singlemode fiber is connected to the input of a connector
receptacle style one-by-two splitter. The analyzer consists of a polarizing splitter, an input collimator, and two
focusing lenses. The output from each port of the splitter
is then connected to a multimode fiber, and the resultant
output powers monitored. In this manner one can study
the output polarization of light from the fiber. For 1300nm
fibers, terminated with ST connectors, the part number
for the analyzer with corresponding receptacles is: FOBS12-888-SMM-1300-PBS .
An alternative setup for an analyzer is available with photodiodes attached directly to the output ports rather than
using focusing optics and multimode fibers. Such a system can reduce costs and improve coupling efficiency.
OZ Optics' part number: FOBS-12-8XX-SDD-1300-PBS .
2
4. Backreflection Monitor: A customer wishes to monitor fluorescence from a sample by analyzing the signal
being backreflected along a fiber. The input signal is
488nm light transmitted along a singlemode fiber. The
input goes into port T of a receptacle style beam splitter,
and goes out through port 1 into a second singlemode
fiber. Half of the light is coupled into a multimode fiber at
port 2 in order to monitor the source power. Port R is
then aligned to couple as much of the backreflected signal from port 1 as possible into a singlemode fiber, while
simultaneously rejecting any light reflected from port 2.
Ports T, R, and 1 have FC receptacles, while port 2 has
an AT&T--ST connector. OZ Optics part number: FOBS22-3338-SSSM-488-50/50
5. Collimated source to fiber splitter with variable
splitting ratio: A customer wants to couple light from a
polarized 488/514nm Ar-Ion laser with 1 - 32 TPI female
receptacle into two PM fibers. Both fibers have FC connectors. By using a broadband polarizing splitter to
divide the light from the laser, one can rotate the splitter
to adjust the splitting ratio between the two fibers to any
desired ratio. Achromat lenses are then used to couple
the light with equal efficiency for the 488nm and 514nm
Ar-Ion laser lines.
OZ Optics part number:ULBS-133-PP-488/514-PBS3.5AC-1. A similar system is available for non-collimated
sources, such as laser diodes. For these items a lens is
used to initially collimate the source. Add BL to the part #
if blocking attenuator is required for each output end.
6. Laser diode to fiber coupler with monitoring photodiode: A 90/10 beam splitter is used to split the signal from an
830nm laser diode. Ninety percent of the light is coupled into a 2 meter long, 3.0mm O.D. cabled PM fiber, terminated with
an FC connector. The remaining ten percent is reflected to a monitoring photodiode. The typical backreflection level is 25dB.
In this manner, one can independently monitor the output power emitted by the laser diode before it enters the fiber.
OZ Optics part number: ULBS-12P-5/125-PD-830-90/10-25-3X-3-2.
3
One unique property of OZ Optics two-by-two splitters is their directionality. Normally OZ Optics splitters are designed to be bi-directional. The coupling efficiencies from ports 1 and 2 into port R are similar to those from port T into ports 1 and 2. In some cases
however, it is desirable to couple light from only one port into port R. An example would be a backreflection monitoring system. Light
is coupled from port T into ports 1 and 2. Port 1 is used as a sensor, while port 2 is used to monitor the source power. The splitter
can be factory adjusted so that only light from port 1 is reflected back into port R, not port 2.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
One by Two Pigtail Style Splitter
FOBS-12P-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L
Package Size:
P for standard pigtail style
T for miniature T shape style
N for miniature Inline style
Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm singlemode fiber.
See tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes
Fiber Type:
Wavelength:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Splitting ratio:
50/50 to 95/5
Use PBS for polarizing splitters
Backreflection level:40, 50, or 60dB.
60dB version available for 1300nm and 1550nm
only
Fiber length, in meters
Fiber Jacket 0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate
jacket
Type:
1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other jacket sizes
Connector Code:
3 = NTT-FC/PC
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
LC = LC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors
Two by Two Pigtail Style Splitter
FOBS-22P-111-a/b-ABCD-W-S/R-LB-XYZT-JD-L
Package Size:
P for standard pigtail style
T for miniature T shape style
N for miniature Inline style
Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm singlemode fiber.
See tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes
Fiber Type:
Wavelength:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550nm)
Splitting ratio:
50/50 to 95/5
Use PBS for polarizing splitters
Backreflection level:40, 50, or 60dB.
60dB version available for 1300nm and 1550nm
only
Fiber length, in meters
Fiber Jacket 0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate
jacket
Type:
1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other jacket sizes
Connector Code:
3 = NTT-FC/PC
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
LC = LC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors
NOTE 1: For extinction ratios higher than 30dB, add the term “-ER=30” to the end of the part number for 1300nm and
1550nm 1x2 splitter only. For other wavelengths, 2x2 splitters, and 1300nm - 1550nm broadband splitters, add “ER=25” to the end of the part number for extinction ratios higher than 25dB.
NOTE 2: When ordering fiber splitters, please indicate how you wish to align the polarization axis of each PM fiber.
The OZ Optics standard is to align all PM fibers such that output light is transmitted along the slow axis of the fiber.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZATION MAINTAINING FIBER PATCHCORDS AND CONNECTORS
Features:
• High extinction ratios of 20dB to 30dB
• Low insertion losses, typically <0.3dB
• Excellent repeatability of ±0.2dB
• Custom angles are available
• FC/PC, SC, ST, LC, or MU terminations available
• Custom ferrule terminations available
• FC/PC terminations are offered with either a rotatable polarization
axis, or prealigned fixed
• Compatible with industry standard connectors
• Designed to meet Telcordia specifications
0.9mm Jacketed PM Patchcords
Applications:
• High speed (10Gbs/40Gbs) Telecommunications
• Interferometric Sensors
• Integrated Optics
• Fiber Amplifiers
• Coherent Telecommunications
Product Description:
Polarization Maintaining (PM) patchcords are based on a high precision butt-style
connection technique. The PM axis orientation is maintained by using male
connectors with a positioning key and a bulkhead female receptacle with a tightly
toleranced keyway, ensuring good repeatability in extinction ratios and insertion
losses.
3mm Jacketed PM Patchcords
The polarization axis of a fiber is aligned with the connector key by rotating either
the connector frame or the fiber itself until the polarization axis is in line with keyway
of the connector. Once the fiber is correctly aligned, the alignment can be fixed with
a drop of glue or epoxy. OZ Optics minimizes backlash and rotational errors in the
PM axis alignment by using specially designed PM ferrules and connector housings.
Patchcords are normally offered prealigned and referenced with the slow axis
aligned to the connector key for optimum coupling efficiency and extinction ratios.
Non-angled FC PM connectors are also available unaligned and unlocked
(rotatable) for lab use. Unless otherwise specified, prealigned patchcords are
oriented such that the slow axis of the fiber is aligned with the key of the connector
and locked, as shown in figure 1. These patchcords maintain polarization to better
than 20dB. Higher extinction ratios are available upon request.
In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber
structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords.
However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. This
includes patchcords with 80 micron cladding sizes. We do carry some alternative
fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If
necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
PM Fiber Patchcords with FC/PC Compatible
Connectors and Different Cable Sizes
OZ Optics uses a 2.00mm housing key for its standard FC/PC PM connector design.
This is known also as a type “R” keywidth. Also available are FC/PC connectors with
a 2.14mm housing keys (Type “N”). Sleeve through adaptors are available to
connect same size keys or to convert from a 2.00mm key connector to a 2.14mm
key connector.
In addition to patchcords and sleeve through adaptors, OZ Optics provides male PM
connectors and ferrules for fiber termination, and bulkhead receptacles to attach
fibers to devices. We have ferrules for different fiber sizes, including 80 micron
cladding sizes. OZ Optics can satisfy all your polarization maintaining fiber needs.
DTS0071
Figure 1: PM Axis Alignment aligned to the slow axis
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
08/27/02
1
NOTCH
KEY
LOCKING
NUT
NOTCH
PIN
13.4
19
2-Ø2.3
Ø2.498 ± 0.001
Ø8.5
M8P0.75
1.5
KEYWAY
7.4
12.5
15
TIGHT
TOLERANCE
TIGHT
TOLERANCE
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.
Figure 3. FC Sleeve Thru Connector
Dimensions
Figure 2. PM FC Connector Construction
29
29
3.9
25
Ø10.0
3.9
0.25mm
or 0.4mm
coated fiber
0.9 mm OD
Hytrel Tubing,
(for strain relief)
Ø10.0
0.9 mm OD Jacketed
or Loose Buffered Fiber
JD = 1
JD = 0.25 or 0.4
42
41
3.9
3.9
3mm PVC or
Armor Cable
Ø10.0
Ø10.0
3mm OD Stainless
Steel Armor Cable
Ø7
Ø8
JD = 3AS
JD = 3 or JD = 3A
41
41
3.9
3.9
5mm Reinforced Ø10.0
Armor Cable
Ø10.0
5mm OD Stainless
Steel Armor Cable
Ø7
Ø8
JD = 5AS
JD = 5A
Figure 4. PM FC Connector Dimensions For Various Cable Sizes
Figure 5. Narrow Key Versus Wide Key Connectors
3.7°
Three holes120° apart
on a 17.3mm bolt circle
M8P0.75 Thread
0.8
Ø2.4
3.0
7.7
M8P0.75 Thread
K: 2.03/2.07mm for BC#19 , HPLC-NTT/FC-PM
2.15/2.20mm for BC#21, HPLC-NTT/FC-SM
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm
Figure 6. Bulkhead FC/PC Receptacle
Ø2.4
K
0.8
K
Three holes120° apart
on a 17.3mm bolt circle
3.7
8.4
K: 2.03/2.07mm for BC#1812 , HPLC-NTT/FC-PM-SL3.7
2.15/2.20mm for BC#5200, HPLC-NTT/FC-SM-SL3.7
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm
Figure 7. Bulkhead Angled FC Receptacle
2
Standard Product Specifications:
Design Wavelength
1550nm
1300nm
980nm
850nm
633nm
488nm
Operating Wavelength Range
1460-1625
1290-1550
980-1300
810-980
620-820
480-630
Cutoff Wavelength
<1450
<1280
<970
<800
<620
<470
Fiber Type
PANDA structure standard. Other fiber types available on request
Fiber Core/Cladding Size (microns)
8/125
7/125
6/125
5/125
4/125
3.5/125
Insertion Loss1,3
0.5dB
0.5dB
0.7dB
1dB
1.5dB
2dB
<0.2dB
<0.3dB
<0.4dB
<0.5dB
<1dB
<1.5dB
Maximum
Typical
Backreflection
2,3
Minimum Extinction Ratios (dB)4
-14 Typical with flat finish, -40 with Super PC finish, -50 with Ultra PC finish, and –60 for angle
point contact (APC), and angle flat contact (AFC) finishes.
20, 25,30
Polarization Angle Tolerance5,6
20, 25, 30
20, 25
20, 25
20
18
±3 degrees (standard grade), ±1.5 degrees (high grade)
Temperature Range
-20°C to +70°C Operating
-40°C to +85°C Storage
Length Tolerance
±0.1m or 10% of length, whichever is larger
(Tighter tolerances possible on request)
1
As measured using FC connectors, with Super PC Finish. For APC Connectors add 0.2dB.
As measured for 1300nm and 1550nm wavelengths. Return losses at other wavelengths are estimated only.
3
As measured when mating to a matching connector.
4
Defined as the extinction ratio of the patchcord itself. Does not include the effect of connecting two fibers together.
5
Normally defined as the angle of the optimum polarization as referenced against the connector key. For 488nm, the angle is defined as the
angle between the fiber stress rods and the connector key instead.
6
For FC style connectors only. Angle tolerances are somewhat looser for other connector types.
2
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
Patchcords:
Table 1: Standard 488nm Patchcords
Bar
Code
Part Number
10247
QPMJ-3S3S-488-3.5/125-3-3-1
10645
QPMJ-3S3S-488-3.5/125-3A-2-1
10249
QPMJ-3S3A-488-3.5/125-3-3-1
10250
QPMJ-3S3AF-488-3.5/125-3-3-1
2100
QPMJ-3A3A-488-3.5/125-3-2-1
13499
QPMJ-3A3A-488-3.5/125-3-3-1
13243
QPMJ-3A3A-488-3.5/125-3-5-1
9770
QPMJ-3AF3A-488-3.5/125-3A-3-1
10941
QPMJ-3AF3AF-488-3.5/125-3-3-1
7714
QPMJ-3AF3AF-488-3.5/125-3A-2-1
Description
3 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on
each end with super FC/PC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
2 meter long, 3mm OD armor jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated
on each end with super FC/PC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
3 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on one
end with a super FC/PC connector, on the other with an angled FC/APC connector. Both are prealigned and locked on the slow axis.
3 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on one
end with a super FC/PC connector, on the other with an angle flat FC/AFC connector. Both are prealigned and locked on the slow axis.
2 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on
each end with angled FC/APC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
3 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on
each end with angled FC/APC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
5 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on
each end with angled FC/APC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
3 meter long, 3mm OD armor jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated
on one end with an angle flat FC/AFC connector, on the other with an angled FC/APC connector.
Both are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
3 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on
each end with angle flat FC/AFC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
2 meter long, 3mm OD armor jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated
on each end with angle flat FC/AFC connectors, that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis.
3
Polarization Maintaining Patchcords:
PMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A-(OPT)
P = PM fiber type
QP for pure fused silica core PM fibers
(488nm only). P for standard doped core
PM fibers
X,Y =
OPT =
Connector Code (Side A, SideB)
3S = Super FC/PC (<-40dB RL)
3U = Ultra FC/PC (<-50dB RL)
3A = Angle FC/PC (<-60dB RL)
8 = ST
SC= Super SC (<-40dB RL)
SCU = Ultra SC (<-50dB RL)
SCA = Angle SC (<-60dB RL)
LC = LC
LCA = Angle LC
MU = MU
X = No Connector
See Table 6 of the standard tables
data sheet for other connectors
A = Alignment for PM terminations
0 = unaligned and rotatable
1 = Slow axis of the PM fiber
aligned with respect to the key and
locked.
L = Overall assembly length in meters
JD = Jacket Diameter
0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating
0.40 = 400 micron acrylate coating
1 = 900 micron OD Hytrel loose
tube buffered fiber
3 = 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar
3A = 3mm OD armored
3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel
armored
5A = 5mm OD armored
5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel
armored
W = Wavelength, in nanometers
(488, 633, 850, 980, 1300, or 1550)
a/b = fiber core/cladding parameters
3.5/125 for 488nm PM fiber
4/125 for 633nm PM fiber
5/125 for 850nm PM fiber
6/125 for 980nm PM fiber
7/125 for 1360nm PM fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PM fiber
PM FC Connectors (consists of housing and
ferrule):
X = Connector Code
3 = FC, flat endface, black boot
3S = FC, radiused endface, black boot
3U = FC, radiused endface, blue boot
3A = FC, conical tip flat endface, Green Boot
Add -ER=25 for minimum Extinction
Ratio of 25dB
Add -ER=30 for minimum Extinction
Ratio of 30dB
Add -WK for 2.14mm wide keys
PMPC-2X-b-JD-(WK)
1
JD = Jacket Diameter
1 = 1mm OD jackets or smaller
3 = 3mm OD loose tube kevlar
3A = 3mm OD armored
3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored
5A = 5mm OD armored
5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored
b = Ferrule Hole Size in microns2
Available hole sizes: 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 124,
125, 126, 127, 128
Notes:
1 Add -WK to the end of the part number for a 2.14mm wide key.
2 Hole Size Tolerance: +1/-0 microns.
PM FC Ferrules:
PMF-b-(JD)-(APC)
F = Ferrule Finish
F for flat endface finish
S for radiused endface finish
APC = Conical Tip for APC connectors
APC for Conical Tip
Leave blank for standard tips.
b = Ferrule Hole Size in microns1
Available hole sizes: 80, 81, 82, 83, 84,
124, 125, 126, 127, 128
JD = Jacket type design
Add “-LF-3.0” for flanges designed for 3mm
loose tube Kevlar cable
Leave blank for all other cable types
Notes:
1 Hole Size Tolerance: +1/-0 microns.
14
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZATION MAINTAINING FUSED FIBER COUPLERS / SPLITTERS
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
Optical amplifiers
Fiber lasers
Power monitoring
Fiber gyroscopes
Coherent communications
Fused Splitter With 900 Micron Jacket
Key Features
•
•
•
•
•
Low loss
Broad bandwidth
Good uniformity
Small package
High directivity
Fused couplers are used to split optical signals between two (or
more) fibers or to combine optical signals from two (or more) fibers
into one fiber. They are constructed by fusing and tapering the
fibers together. This method creates a simple, rugged, compact
method of splitting or combining optical signals. Typical excess
losses are as low as 0.2 dB, while split ratio tolerances range from
±5% to ±0.5% at design wavelengths depending upon the splitting
ratio. These devices are bidirectional and offer low backreflection
and insertion losses.
OZ Optics’ fused PM Splitters exhibit a broad operating wavelength
range of up to ±20 nm for 1550 nm region devices. For operation
within the standard bandwidth of a splitter, it is best to order a
standard center wavelength for lowest price and quickest delivery.
Fused PM splitters are also available on smaller core fibers for
1064 nm, 980 nm and other wavelengths. (Nonstandard center
wavelengths may require minimum order quantities or set up
charges. Please contact OZ Optics for assistance).
A wide variety of options are available for fused PM splitters.
Standard configurations are 1x2, 2x2, 1x3 (monolithic) and 1x4
(compact cascaded). A monolithic structure means that all fibers are
fused together, while a cascaded device combines several 2x2
splitters to create a greater split count. NOTE – OZ Optics may
substitute a 2x2 in place of an ordered 1x2 based on availability. If a
1x2 is required, please inform your sales contact when placing your
request for quote or order. OZ Optics can design and construct
larger split counts or different split ratios upon request.
OZ Optics has the capability to connectorize the fibers of fused
splitters with all standard connectors such as FC, SC, ST, LC etc.
and finishes (Super PC, Ultra PC, Angled PC [APC] etc.). As a
component integrator, OZ Optics can construct additional
components directly onto the coupler fibers. Examples include
tunable filters, variable attenuators, or collimators. By building these
devices directly onto the coupler fibers, OZ Optics saves the
customer the added cost and insertion loss of intermediate
connectors and adapters, or the time and cost of fusion splicing.
Directly built devices are also the best way to maintain the highest
possible Polarization Extinction Ratios.
Fused Splitter With 3 mm Cable
Figure 1: Dimensions Of Fused Splitter
With 250 and 900 Micron Jacketed Fibers
Figure 2: Dimensions Of Fused Splitter
With 3 mm Cabled Fibers
Figure 3: PM Splitter Fiber Geometry
As with any device, there are drawbacks to using PM fused splitters
DTS0092
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
25-Oct-04
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed and manufactured components to its valued customers. As with most
manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in pricing compared to our standard
parts. In particular, we may need additional detailed specifications or a drawing from the customer and extra time to prepare a
comprehensive quotation. Lead times may also be longer for delivery. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) or setup charges,
lot charges and/or a minimum order quantity may be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation so your
decision will be as well-informed as possible. Please contact OZ immediately if any part of your quote needs explanation. We strongly
recommend you purchase our standard parts.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
What is your center wavelength and operating bandwidth?
What is the desired port configuration (i.e., 2x2, 1x3)
What split ratio is required? Are other ratios acceptable for initial trial?
What, if any, connectors are required for each port?
What fiber length is required?
Are there package size restrictions (important for 1x4 splitters)
Do you need additional components mounted to the input or output fiber ends?
What are your extinction ratio requirements on the through and tap ports?
Description
Part Number
FUSED-12-W-a/b-S/R-XYZ-JD-L-PM
Two-by-Two Fused Splitter/Coupler FUSED-22-W-a/b-S/R-TXYZ-JD-L-PM
One-by-Two Fused Splitter/Coupler
W=
Wavelength in nm
(Standard 1310, 1480 and 1550 nm)
L=
Fiber length in meters on all ports
(standard is 1 meter)
a/b =
Fiber core/cladding (7/125 for 1310 nm,
8/125 for 1480 & 1550 nm)
JD =
Jacket Diameter in mm
(1 is standard for 900um jacketing)
S/R =
Split Ratio in %
(50/50, 90/10 and 95/5 are standard)
TXYZ =
Input and Output Male Connectors
(T,X are inputs,Y,Z are outputs)
X = No connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC/PC
LCA = Angled LC
See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors.
Ordering Example For Custom Parts
A customer wants a 1x2 fused coupler for 1480nm, with a 95/5 split ratio, to use as a tap to monitor the signal intensity through his
system. He requires angled FC/APC connectors on the input port and the main output port, while on the 5% port he does not want a
connector. He wants 0.5 meter long leads on all three ports, with 900 micron cabling.
Part Number
Description
FUSED-12-1480-8/125-95/5-3A3AX-1-0.5-PM
Fused PM splitter with 0.5 meter long 900 micron OD jacketed 1480 nm 8/125 PM fiber pigtails and
1x2 95/5 split ratio, with Angled NTT-FC/PC connectors on the input and through ports, and no
connector on the tap port.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZATION ROTATORS/CONTROLLERS/ANALYZERS
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User friendly lab package or compact package for inside
systems
Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining (PM)
fiber versions available
Removable/replaceable optics (interchangeable)
Wide range of available wavelengths
High Polarization Extinction Ratio
Convert any polarization state to any other polarization
state
Compatible with standard detector housings
Standard Receptacle Package - 1 Element
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
Laser to fiber coupling
Polarization dependent component or PM fiber testing
Fiber amplifiers
Coherent communications
Polarization ER measurements
PM fiber axis conversion
Product Description
OZ Optics supplies a complete line of polarization rotators,
controllers and analyzers to manipulate and control the state of
polarization of an input beam of light and couple the adjusted light
into an output fiber or detector. These systems typically consist of
an input with fiber pigtail or connector receptacle, from 1 to
3 polarization optic components and an output coupler with fiber
pigtail, or connector receptacle. The FPR product line uses bulk
waveplates and polarizing glass to accomplish the polarization
control.
Small Receptacle Package - 1 Element
Each polarization optic stage can be removed without loss of
coupling. These stages may be replaced or interchanged as the
application requires. Separate stages with polarization optics
mounted in a rotary platform may be purchased to allow using
only one fiber optic assembly for multiple applications.
Standard Pigtailed Package - 3 Element
Small Pigtailed Package - 2 Element
DTS0072
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
14-Jan-2005
1
Ordering Information
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most
manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our
standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than
normal. In some cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, or minimum order will be necessary. These points will
be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our
standard products.
Questionnaire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
What is the operating wavelength for your system?
What type of fiber are you using on the input and output?
What combination of polarizers, halfwave plate, and quarterwave plates do you need?
Which of the following statements apply?
a. I need a miniature device. A readout of the angle is not required.
b. I need to record the alignment of the optical elements. Size is not required.
Do you need a device with receptacles, or a unit with the fibers?
Is return loss an issue with your application?
What connectors are you using on the fiber ends?
What is the intensity of your signal?
What is the input signal polarization, and the desired output polarization?
Receptacle Style Fiber to
Fiber Polarization Rotator:
Size:
FPR-0A-XY-W-I-O-R
1 = Standard housing
2 = Miniature housing
Polarization Optics Installed
1 = Plate polarizer
2 = Half wave plate
3 = Quarter wave plate
Input and Output Receptacle Codes:
3 = Super, Ultra, or Standard FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC†
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC†
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheets for other
receptacles
Output Fiber type: M = Multimode
Input Fiber type:
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization
maintaining
† Only available in standard housing.
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
Pigtail Style Fiber to Fiber
Polarization Rotator:
FPR-1A-11-W-a/b-I-O-R-LB-XY-JD-L
Size:
1 = Standard housing
2 = Miniature housing
Fiber Length, in meters, on each side of the
device Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the
input and 7 meters at the output, replace “L”
with 1,7
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber
See Tables 1 - 5 of the Standard Tables data
sheet for other standard fiber sizes
Fiber Jacket Type:
1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheets
for other jacket types
(I) Input Fiber type:
M = Multimode
(O) Output Fiber type: S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
Polarization Optics Installed
1 = Plate Polarizer
1G = Glan-Thompson polarizer
2 = Half wave plate
3 = Quarter wave plate
Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB
60dB for 1300 and 1550 nm only
Input and Output Connector Codes:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for
other connectors
Add “-ER=25”, “-ER=30” to the part number for 25dB and 30dB extinction ratios. Use 1 & 2 & 3 for multiple polarization optics.
Replacement Polarization Optics
with Rotary Platform:
Replacement Polarization Optics
without Rotary Platform:
Size:
1 = Standard rotary platform
2 = Small rotary platform
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
ROT-0A-W-R
ROT-W-R
Polarization Optics Installed
1 = Plate polarizer
2 = Half wave plate
3 = Quarter wave plate
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZED FIBER OPTIC SOURCE
Features:
• High polarization extinction ratio (up to 40 dB)
• Stable output
• Wide range of available wavelengths
• Rugged and compact design
• Wide range of connector receptacles available
• Optional high power versions
• Optional adjustable output power
Applications:
• Extinction ratio measurements
• Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements
• Product manufacturing and quality control
Product Description:
Receptacle Style Polarized Fiber Optic Source With
Rotatable Polarizer
OZ Optics produces Polarized Fiber Optic Sources (PFOSS) in a variety of wavelengths. Sources are available in three versions. A receptacle
version is available with the polarization axis aligned with the keyway on the receptacle. A second receptacle style version is available with a rotatable
polarizer, allowing one to adjust the polarization axis to any desired angle. Finally, a pigtail style version has a polarization maintaining fiber attached,
with the output polarization aligned with the slow axis of the fiber (see the Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source data sheet for details).
As an option, OZ Optics can include a blocking style optical attenuator to manually change the output. Unlike electrical systems, this method of
power control does not affect the spectral properties of the laser diode output. This ensures more repeatable results.
While the PFOSS design is quite stable for standard measurements, sometimes reflections or temperature changes can affect the output power and
wavelength for applications where stability is critical. OZ Optics recommends using angled connectors and receptacles for optimum stability. Highly
Stable Polarized Fiber Optic Laser Sources (HIPFOSS), using Peltier coolers and isolators are also available. See the Highly Stable Polarized
Source data sheet for details.
Figure 1: Receptacle Style Polarized Fiber Optic Source With Rotatable Polarizer
DTS0073
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
04/02
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A European fiber optic manufacturer wants to test the quality of their polarization maintaining jumpers at 1550nm and 1310nm. They need to order
the following parts:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
13507
PFOSS-02-3-1310-1-ER=40
1310 nm, 1 mW Polarized Fiber Optic Source with a Super/Ultra FC/PC
receptacle and rotatable polarizer achieving up to 40 dB extinction ratio
8695
PFOSS-02-3-1550-1-ER=40
1550 nm, 1 mW Polarized Fiber Optics Source with a Super/Ultra FC/PC
receptacle and rotatable polarizer achieving up to 40 dB extinction ratio
11998
ER-100-1290/1650-ER=40
Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER= 40dB for 1290 nm to 1650
nm and ER = 30dB for 850 nm to 1290 nm
13440
ER-23-1230/1650-ER-40
Super/Ultra FC removable receptacle for ER meter for wavelengths from 1280
nm to 1650 nm. ER=40.
13390
PMJ-3U3U-1550-8/125-1-1-1-ER=30-G
Master Patchcord, Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 8/125um PM 1550nm fiber,
0.9mm OD jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and locked to the slow
axis ER=30dB minimum
2737
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord (order one cord for each source, and for the ER meter
(Total = 3 pieces)
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation,
so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
What wavelength do you need?
What connector type are you using?
How much optical power do you need launched into your fiber?
What should be the minimum polarization extinction ratio of the source?
Do you want a fixed or rotatable polarizer?
Receptacle Style PFOSS:
PFOSS-0A-X-W-P (-ER=YY)
A = Source type: 1 for fixed polarization
2 for Rotable Polarization
YY = Extinction ratio. Add this only for
ER>30dB. Specify 35 or 40dB.
If not specified, the extinction ratio is
greater than or equal to 30dB.
ER=35dB or 40dB is only available for
980nm, 1064nm, 1290-1625nm.
X = Connector code :
3= Standard, Super or Ultra
NTT-FC/PC receptacle
3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
8=AT&T-ST
MU=MU type connector
LC=LC type connector
1.25U=Universal Receptacle for 1.25mm OD
connector ferrules (LC, MU)
2.5U=Universal Receptacle for
2.5mm OD connector ferrules (ST, FC, SC)
P = Output power, in mW
1mW is standard
W = Wavelength in nm: 635, 650, 685,
780, 830, 850, 980, 1064,
1310,1480,1550,1625
Notes:
1. For Highly Stable Polarized Sources (HIPFOSS) which include an isolator and Peltier cooler circuit please refer to the
Highly Stable Polarized Source data sheet
2. Add -BL to the part number to have blocking style attenuator added to the PFOSS
3. Add -ISOL to the part number for an isolator. For wavelengths less than 1290nm, order a HIPFOSS instead
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A European manufacturer of fiber optic circulators wants to test the extinction ratio of their polarization maintaining jumpers at 980nm prior to
pigtailing them to their integrated waveguides. They need to order the following parts:
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
N/A
PFOSS-02-3A-980-2- ER=40
980 nm, 2 mW Polarized Fiber Optic Source with an angled FC receptacle,
rotatable polarizer, achieving over 40dB extinction ratio.
N/A
ER-100-980-ER=40
980 nm, Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER = 40dB
N/A
ER-23A-980-ER=40
980nm, Angled FC Removable Receptacle for ER Meter. ER = 40dB
N/A
PMJ-3A3A-980-6/125-1-1-1-ER=30-G
Master patchcord, Angle FC/PC to Angle FC/PC, 6/125um PM 980nm
fiber, 0.9 mm OD jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and
locked to the slow axis ER=30dB minimum
2737
POWER CORD - EUROPE
European power cord. Order one for the source and one for the meter
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
POLARIZERS – FIBER OPTIC
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rugged & compact housing
SM, MM, PM and fiber combinations available
Miniature sizes available
Wide range of available wavelengths
High extinction ratio
Low loss
Low back reflection
Low cost
Pigtail Style Polarizer
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fiber amplifiers
System polarization extinction ratio conditioning
Measuring polarization extinction ratio
Sensors
Integrated optics
Interferometric sensors
Product Description
Fiber Optic Polarizers are designed to polarize the output from a
light source or fiber and launch it into an output fiber. These
polarizers typically consist of input and output collimators with a
plate polarizer in between. Broadband polarizers are used, so the
power extinction ratio is maintained for up to several hundreds of
nanometers. The same polarizer, for example, may be used for
1300 nm to 1600 nm. The power extinction ratio is the ratio
between maximum and minimum output power as the input
polarization state is changed. This is different from the output
polarization extinction ratio, which is a measure of the ratio
between the power in the two axes of polarization maintaining
fiber. This value is dependent upon the extinction ratio of the
polarizer, the alignment of the output fiber axes to the polarizer
and the extinction ratio of the output fiber. When an output
extinction ratio is specified, it is the polarization extinction ratio.
This value is only applicable when the output fiber is polarization
maintaining fiber. The power extinction ratio will always equal
exceed the polarization extinction ratio.
Miniature (5.5 mm OD) Pigtail Style Polarizer
Low Cost Miniature (4 mm OD) Polarizer
OZ Optics offers fiber optic polarizers in three sizes. The 20 mm
diameter standard size can be used for prototyping and bench top
work. The 5.5 mm diameter miniature size is for OEM applications
and the smallest size (4 mm diameter) is for low cost systems
where reduced output extinction ratio is acceptable.
DTS0018
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Ordering Information
Pigtail Style:
FOP-A1-11-W-a/b-I-O-LB-XY-JD-L
Polarizer size:
1 for Standard 20 mm size
2 for miniature 5.5 mm OD size
3 for low cost 4 mm OD size
Wavelength:
Specify in nanometers
(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm)
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber
See Tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes
Input Fiber:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
Output Fiber:
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the
device.
Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input
and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7
Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
See Table 7 for other jacket sizes
Connector Code:
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
See Table 6 for other connectors
Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB
60dB version available for 1300 and 1550 nm
wavelengths only
NOTE: For extinction ratios greater than 25dB or 30dB, add the term “-ER=25” or “-ER=30” to the end of the part number.
Ordering Example For Custom Parts
A customer has a tunable laser for 1520-1570 nm, pigtailed with singlemode fiber with a Super PC finish FC connector on it. She wants
to polarize the signal as much as possible, and transmit it through a polarization maintaining fiber, achieving over 30dB extinction ratios.
The output fiber also needs to have a Super PC finish FC connector on the end. Return losses and insertion losses are not critical.
Bar Code
XXXX
Part Number
FOP-11-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-P40-3S3S-3-1-ER=30
Description
Fiber optic polarizer for 1520 nm to 1570 nm, with 60dB return loss, 30dB extinction ratio, and
with 1 meter long, 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cabled Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber on
the input, 8/125 PM fiber on the output, with Super FC/PC connectors on both ends.
Application Notes
Upgrading System Output Extinction Ratio
When several PM fiber pigtailed components are connected,
there is the possibility that the accumulated extinction ratio will
degrade. Each time two PM fibers are joined, any offset of their
stress axes can cause the extinction ratio to get a little lower. For
example, two 30dB fibers offset by 3 degrees can have a net
extinction ratio of only 25dB. Add a couple more interfaces with
similar angles and the value gets even worse. In order to have the
final output extinction ratio be high, one can insert a pigtailed
polarizer as the least component. This can drastically improve the
output extinction ratio of the system with only a minor impact on
system loss. For example, upgrading from a 15dB ER signal to a
25dB ER signal would only incur 0.125dB loss (plus device loss).
A small price to pay for a 10dB ER gain.
Basic equation is Log (1 - (inv log original ER - inv log new ER))
Ex 15dB upgraded to 25dB is 0.125dB loss (plus device loss)
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Q. Why is output power so low?
A. Check orientation and/or state of input polarization. If input
fiber is PM, check to make sure light is launched along
correct axis.
Q. Why is output extinction ratio low?
A. Check you are using it in correct direction. Polarizer
alignment is optimized to the output fiber for best output
extinction ratio. The input fiber is oriented for transmission.
These two placements are very similar, but may be slightly
different.
Q. Why is output power fluctuation?
A. Check stability of input fiber and polarization states. If there
are large backreflections coming from further down the fiber
optic system, an isolator may be required to protect the
source or defeat an etalon effect.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
REFLECTORS – FIBER OPTIC
(FIXED OR VARIABLE)
Fiber optic reflectors are used to reflect the light emerging
from a fiber back in the reverse direction. They are used
to build fiber interferometers, or with fiber fused splitters to
measure backreflection within fiber optic components.
They can also be used to measure the sensitivity of
sources to backreflection from other devices, by providing
reference reflection levels. This is very useful for deriving
backreflection specifications for transmitters.
Fiber optic reflectors consist of a fiber optic collimator and
a mirror. The fiber output is first collimated, then it strikes
the mirror and is reflected back into the collimator. The
angle between the collimator and the mirror is adjusted
using OZ Optics Optics' patented tilt adjustment technique,
until as much light as possible is reflected back into the
fiber. Using this technique, reflectors with typical losses of
only 0.6 dB can be constructed. A variable reflector is
available that includes a blocking screw, to obtain variable
reflection levels. This is achieved by partially blocking the
collimated beam between the lens and the mirror.
Both connector receptacle style and pigtail style reflectors
are available. Connector receptacle style reflectors come
with a female connector receptacle to allow the fibers to be
easily changed.
DTS0020
Pigtail style reflectors come with a fiber of your choice
permanently attached to the collimating lens. This type of
reflector is recommended for optimum coupling efficiency
and stability. The other end of the fiber can be terminated
with your choice of connector.
OZ Optics also sells fibers with coated ends. Gold
coatings are used to provide excellent broadband
reflection for infrared wavelengths.
Other coating
materials are available for other wavelengths. The ends
can have either 100% reflecting, or partial reflecting/partial
transmitting coatings. Contact OZ Optics for further
information.
Reflectors are available for wavelengths from 400nm to
1600nm. Reflectors that operate at both 1300 and
1550nm are available, with only a slight difference in
insertion losses at both wavelengths.
Broadband
reflectors using achromatic lenses to collimate light at
different wavelengths are available. Partially reflecting
mirrors are also available, to partly transmit the light. The
transmitted light can be coupled into an output fiber as an
option, thus forming an in-line reflector. Contact OZ Optics
for further details. Laser diodes or lasers with long
coherence lengths can cause etalon effects in fiber optic
reflectors.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
22-Feb-05
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Part Number
FORF-1X-W-F
FORF-XY-W-F-R
FORF-11P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L
FORF-21P-W-a/b-F-LB-R-XY-JD-L
FORF-31P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L
Where:
Description
Connector receptacle style fiber optic total reflector.
Connector receptacle style partial reflector with output fiber focuser.
Pigtail style fiber optic total reflector.
Pigtail style partial reflector with output fiber focuser. Consult Factory for partial
reflectors without output fiber.
Gold tipped fiber total reflector.
W is the operating wavelength in nm. (If the reflector is to work over a range of wavelengths, then give both the
shortest and longest wavelength to be coupled into the fiber.);
X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style reflectors. For pigtail style reflectors, it refers to the male
connector on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 3S for Super FC, 3A for angled FC, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC
connectors, etc.);
a/b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns;
F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber);
R is the percent reflectance for a partially reflecting mirror;
JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3.0 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable,
and 5A for 5mm armored cable);
L is the fiber length in meters.
LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB, 50dB, or 60dB) from reflective surfaces other than the
mirror.
Note: Add the term "-BL" to the end of the part number to add a blocking screw to achieve variable reflection.
Example: A customer requires a pigtail style fiber reflector for 1300nm, with a blocking screw for variable reflection. The fiber
is 9/125 singlemode fiber, one meter long, cabled, and terminated with an angled FC connector. OZ Optics part number:
FORF-11P-1300-9/125-S-60-3A-3-1-BL.
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
RGB (RED/GREEN/BLUE) COMBINER AND DELIVERY SYSTEMS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modular design for easy installation and maintenance
Two, three, and four wavelength versions
Singlemode, multimode and polarization maintaining fiber versions.
High power versions
A variety of wavelengths available
Low noise, stable output.
High power handling
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
White light displays
Confocal microscopy
Laser spectroscopy
Fluorescence microscopy
Color Holography
Pre
lim
ina
ry
RGB Delivery System
Product Description:
A common application today is the combination of visible laser light of different
wavelengths into a single fiber. Such systems are used in a variety of applications
where one wants to produce full color images. By combining red, green and blue
light and varying the intensities of the signals, one can reproduce practically any color
desired.
In order to achieve this, wavelength division multiplexers (WDMs) are used to
combine light of different wavelengths into a single fiber. The light from each fiber is
first collimated. The collimated beams are then combined using a dichroic filter, with
typically the longer wavelength transmitted from port T, the shorter wavelength
reflected from port R. The combined beams are then focused into the output fiber at
Port 1. OZ Optics uses this technique to build WDMs for combining visible
wavelengths. Our RGB multiplexers combine light at red, green and blue
wavelengths into singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. OZ Optics also offers
source to fiber wavelength division multiplexers, where the sources are mounted
directly onto the device. This improves the overall system efficiency, and reduces
costs.
Complementing our line of RGB WDM’s are our OZ-1000 and OZ-2000 Turnkey
OEM sources. They are temperature stabilized fiber coupled, laser diode sources.
The compact housings contain both the laser diode and the temperature control, and
are powered by a single 5 volt DC supply. The sources have an operating temperature range of 15 - 45°C, and hold the temperature variation of the laser diode to
within 0.1°C. This maintains the wavelength variation to better than 0.1nm and also
reduces the tendency of the laser diode to mode hop.
The output power from each source can be adjusted using a 0 to 5 volt control
voltage. Standard sources can be modulated at low frequencies (a few kHz), and
devices can be configured at the factory for modulation capability up to 100 kHz, if
requested. This is ideal for generating full color displays. Special versions are
available from OZ Optics to cover even higher modulation frequencies, up to 50 MHz.
Contact OZ Optics with your requirements.
Used together, the OZ sources and RGB multiplexors provide a complete method to
deliver full color output from a singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. The light
from the output fiber can be collimated using an optional achromatic collimator to
give near ideal Gaussian beams ranging from 0.6mm to 10mm in diameter.
Alternatively the achromatic focusers can be supplied to focus the light to spots only
a few microns in diameter.
OZ Sources for UV Blue, Green, Red and IR
RGB Wavelength Division Multiplexor
a system. Integrated systems provide the greatest
throughput and final output power possible. This is
because it eliminates the fiber-to-fiber connections
normaly present when connecting sources and
combiners together. Such connections introduce as
much as 1.5dB additional losses at 405nm wavelengths,
because the fiber core sizes are so small (as small as 3
microns at 405nm). At this size even a one micron offset
will cause significant losses. Thus an integrated system
can deliver 25% more power than connected components.
Sources and combiners can be provided either as individual components or as
complete integrated systems. See the figure on page 2 showing the layout for such
DTS0105
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
10-Jun-2005
1
For those who wish to use their own laser sources, OZ Optics also
provides a full line of laser to fiber couplers and laser diode to fiber
couplers. Systems can be custom built to provide optimum coupling
to your source.
We work extensively with various laser manufactures, designing optics and adaptors to fit their lasers.
OZ Optics also offers a complete line of fiber optic collimators and
focusers, to take the output from a fiber and deliver it precisely to
where it is required. We stock a broad array of achromat lenses,
perfect for RGB applications. Further details on these products can be
found in our catalog and on our website under Laser To Fiber Delivery
Systems. Contact a sales representative for additional details.
For more detailed information on both wavelength division multiplexers
and sources, please refer to our detailed product data sheets
Wavelength Division Multiplexers, and Turnkey, Ultra Stable, OEM
Laser Diode Sources - OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 Series.
Units are in inches
Figure 1: Pigtail Style OZ-1000 Dimensions
Figure 2: Standard Wave Division Multiplexor Dimensions
Figure 3: Integrated RGB System, With Optional Collimator
2
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In
particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in
your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
What wavelengths are you interested in?
What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM?
What power levels are being used in your system?
What coupling efficiency do you require?
Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source?
What return losses are acceptable in your system?
What connector type are you using?
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
How do you intend to use this product?
How long should the fibers be?
Do you wish OZ Optics to provide the sources?
Do you need a collimated output beam?
If a collimated beam is required, what is the desired beam
diameter?
13) If a focused spot is required, what is the desired spot size and
working distance?
Note concerning part numbers: Depending on the configuration of the desired design, the fiber types, lengths, and connectors may be
different on each channel. Therefore it is important to correctly identify each port in the proper order. When specifying wavelengths, list them
from shortest to longest. When identifying fiber types, start from the shortest wavelength to the longest wavelength, and identify the
combined port last. This rule is also used when specifying the connector types and fiber lengths.
Description
Wavelength Division Multiplexer:
N=
Part Number
WDM-1NP-111-Wi/Wo-a/b-ABC-LB-XYZ-JD-L
Number of wavelengths to combine
(2, 3, 4, etc.)
Wi/Wo =
Operating Wavelengths in
nanometers
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables
for other sizes
ABC,
Fiber types: on each port
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
L = Fiber length, in meters
JD =
Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
X,Y,Z =
Connector type on each end
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
LCA=Angled LC
MU=MU
X=No Connector
LB =Backreflection level:
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM
fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm
wavelength ranges only)
35dB for multimode fibers
5
Description:
Pigtail Style Source
Part Number
OZ-N000-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-P
N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same
front panel
2000 for electrical connection on rear panel &
optical connection on front panel
W = Wavelength 1: 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750,
780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625.
P = Output power available from the fiber end,
in mW 3
L = Fiber length (in meters)
a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm):
(see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet)
F = Fiber type:
M = Multimode Fiber
S = Singlemode Fiber
P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber
LB = Backreflection level 2:
35 = 35dB return loss (MM only)
40 = 40dB return loss (SM & PM)
60 = 60dB return loss
(SM & PM - 1300/1550nm only)
Description:
Receptacle Style Source
X = Connector type: 3 = FC/PC
3S = Super FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/APC
5 = SMA905
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC or ultra SC
SCA = Angled SC
Part Number
OZ-N000-X-a/b-W-F-P
N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same
front panel
2000 for electrical connection on rear panel &
optical connection on front panel
X = Connector Receptacle:
2.5U = 2.5mm universal receptacle
(for FC, ST, or SC).
3S = Super FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/APC
5 = SMA905
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
JD = Jacket Diameter:
1 = 900µm jacketed fiber
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar jacketed fiber
3A = 3mm OD black armored cable
3AS = 3mm OD Stainless Steel
armored cable
5A = 5mm OD black armored cable
5AS = 5mm OD Stainless Steel
armored cable
P = Output power 3:
Output power available from the receptacle, in mW
F = Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber
S = Singlemode Fiber
P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber
W = Wavelength 1: 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685,
750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310,
1480, 1550, 1625
a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm):
(see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data
sheet)
1 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers’
tolerances. (Typical tolerances vary from ±5nm to as high as ±30nm).
2 The backreflection specification refers to the reflected signal strength relative to the output power seen by the laser diode from internal
reflections. It does not include external sources of reflection, including those from the connector at the end of the fiber. To minimize external
reflections, OZ Optics recommends using angle polished FC/APC or SC/APC connectors. Backreflection values are limited by the wavelength
and fiber type selected. Other backreflection levels may be possible. Please contact OZ for further information.
3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diodes available, not all output powers are available at every wavelength
for every fiber type. For wavelengths below 750nm, we recommend pigtail style to eliminate connection loss at the receptacle interface.
Options: Add "-ISOL" if an optical isolator is required (Please note that this option is only available for the 1300 to 1625nm wavelength range).
Add "-BL" if OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the output power.
6
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
SILICON V-GROOVE CHIPS
Features:
• Up to 48 channel V-Groove arrays
• High accuracy V-Grooves using etched silicon
• High capacity using automated batch processing
• Compatible with 125/250 micron diameter singlemode, multimode and
polarization maintaining fibers
• 0.5 micron channel spacing accuracy
• Designed to meet Telcordia requirements
Applications:
• Pigtailing of integrated optical devices
• Connection to planar waveguide devices
• Attachment to an array of active devices
• Connection of MEMS devices and miniaturized fiber optic components
• Construction of DWDM and multi-channel devices
Silicon V-Groove Chips
Product Description:
OZ Optics Silicon V-Groove chips assist in developing next generation
photonic devices. The array components allow precise alignment of either
ribbonized or individual fibers in a linear array. Utilizing OZ Optics silicon
V-Grooves with a Pyrex lid allows UV or heat curing of the fibers into the array
and attachment to another device. The side wall design incorporated in the
rear of the V-Groove chip enhances the overall assembly’s strength and
rigidity, and reduces breakages.
OZ Optics now offers metalized silicon V-Groove chips. These chips allow
direct soldering of metalized fibers into V-Groove assemblies, providing a high
strength bond that doesn't use epoxies. Contact OZ for more information.
8 Channel V-Groove Chip
10.40±0.03mm
(VL)
Width ± 0.03mm
(VW)
W ±0.05mm
0.195±0.005mm
54.74°
5.3mm
0.28mm
0.138±0.005mm
All Etched Positional Chip Tolerances are ±0.0005mm
1.000±0.01mm
(VT)
V-Groove Detail
(N x 0.250) ±0.0005mm
Edge Distance ±0.025mm
(ED)
Pyrex Lid
0.250±0.0005mm
(S)
Silicon V-Groove
250um Coating
125um Fiber Cladding
Assembled V-Groove, Showing Fiber Layout
Figure 1: Detail Drawing For 1-12 Fiber V-Groove Chips
DTS0077
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
06/02
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
A customer needs to build an 8 fiber V-Groove assembly using an 8 fiber ribbon. The following parts will be required:
Bar Code
11774
9686
Part Number
VGC-8-250-10.4-3.8-1-SW
VGC-LID-5.3-3.8-1
Description
8 channel silicon V-Groove chip with 250 micron fiber spacing
1,2,4 or 8 channel Pyrex V-Groove lid
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
How many fiber positions does your application require?
What spacing between fibers does your application require?
If you are going to use ribbon, is it standard 8 or 12 fiber count?
If you are using individual fibers, what is the coating diameter?
Do you need a lid for final assembly?
Gold Plated V-Groove Chip
V-Groove Chips:
VGC-N-S-VL-VW-VT-SW
N = Number of V-Grooves
V-Groove Lids:
VGC-LID-VL-VW-VT
VL = Length (mm)
S = V-Groove spacing (microns)
VL = Length (mm)
VW = Width (mm)
VW = Width (mm)
VT = Thickness (mm)
VT = Thickness (mm)
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A customer needs to purchase a custom V-Groove chip and matching Pyrex lid. The required specifications are that the V-Groove chip have
10 V-Grooves with 325 micron spacing, be 7mm wide, 15mm long and 1mm thick, the V-Groove length is to be standard (5.3mm).
Part Number
VGC-10-325-15-7-1-SW
VGC-LID-5.3-7
Description
10 Channel silicon V-Groove Chip with 325 µm fiber spacing
Custom Pyrex V-Groove Lid
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: What are the standard materials used?
A: Silicon for the V-Groove, Pyrex for the lid.
Q: Is the fiber core above or below the surface of the silicon V-Groove chip?
A: Nominally the center of the core is seated approximately 30 microns below the surface of the chip.
Q: What types of adhesives can be used to adhere the fibers into the V-Grooves?
A: UV cured or thermally cured epoxies have been successfully used to mount the fibers into the V-Grooves. The matching Pyrex lids are
necessary when using UV cured adhesives.
Q: Are two V-Groove chips used to sandwich the fibers in place?
A: No, the OZ Optics V-Groove chips are designed to be used with a flat lid, which provides a stable 3 point contact for positioning the fiber.
Q: Can individual fibers be assembled into the V-Groove chips?
A: Yes, the design allow for either individual or ribbonized fibers to be used. This also allows for mixing of different fiber types in the
assembled chip.
Q: Are the V-Groove channel spacing tolerances cumulative?
A: No, the absolute tolerance from any one V-Groove to the reference V-Groove on a chip is ± 0.5 micron.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
SMART PATCHCORDSTM AND WIRELESS FIBERTM FOR POWER AND
WAVELENGTH MONITORING
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
Local or remote monitoring via RS232, USB, or wireless communication
Inexpensive, miniature package
Low insertion losses, return losses. High power handling
Versions for wavelengths from 600 nm to 1700 nm available
Polarization Maintaining (PM) and specialty fiber versions available
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Network and channel monitoring in FTTH networks
Channel balancing for Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) systems
Dynamic optical amplifier gain monitoring
Power monitoring
Optical power control devices
Polarization stabilization
Polarization mode dispersion compensation
Real time in-line test and measurement
Fiber optic sensors
ry
ina
lim
e
Pr
Smart Patchcord with Analog Output Module
Product Description:
Smart patchcords utilize a new technology to monitor the properties of optical signals
traveling through fibers. This includes power monitoring, wavelength sensing, and
polarization measurement. The technology allows sensors to be integrated into
networks and test equipment to provide real-time remote monitoring without
interrupting the optical signal. Applications include channel monitoring in optical
networks, polarization stabilization, and environmental sensing.
Using a novel technique to tap signals for measurements, the monitors are very
compact, and resemble a patchcord in construction.Competing monitoring systems
typically use fused couplers to tap a fixed amount of light into another fiber and on to
a measuring module. This method is bulky and must be done using discrete
components. In contrast, our technique directs a controlled amount of light from the
fiber core to the surface where it can be directly monitored. This is all done without
bending, shaping, or otherwise harming the fiber. As a result sensors can be directly
incorporated into optical assemblies, without affecting functionality. The
manufacturing process allows full automation, sharply reducing costs.
Sensors can be made into standard singlemode fiber, polarization maintaining (PM)
fibers, or specialty fibers, for any design wavelength. The monitor electronics can be
configured to give either an analog electrical output or a digital output via an RS-232
or USB port. Multiple sensor modules can be integrated into a single patchcord,
allowing different properties to be measured simultaneously. The sensors are
directional in nature, measuring light traveling in one direction through the fiber, but
not in the reverse direction. This directionality is ideal for monitoring signals in one
direction independently of signals traveling along the other direction. Bi-directional
versions can be provided on request. We welcome custom applications and new
ideas. Contact OZ Optics for additional information.
Wireless Fiber With Smart Phone
The latest member of the Smart Patchcord family is the Wireless Fiber™. This is a
Smart Patchcord with a built-in miniature radio transceiver. This allows the Smart
Patchcord to communicate with a host computer, which can be a laptop, PDA, or even
a smart cell phone. This makes it possible in many instances for a technician to
identify a problem fiber before he even enters a building, resulting in a tremendous
reduction in troubleshooting time. Several versions of the wireless link are offered,
with ranges from 10 meters to over 1 kilometer.
When a smart cell phone is used, measurements can be instantly sent to a central
location for logging, or for comparison with previous measurements to monitor
degradation of a link. By allowing easy monitoring of optical signal power levels
without disrupting the signal, unnecessary maintenance and down time can be
virtually eliminated.
DTS0096
Wireless Fiber With Laptop Computer
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
20-May-05
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In
particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 25 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained
in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
What is your operating wavelength range?
Are you using standard singlemode, polarization maintaining, or a speciality fiber? What type?
What is the expected optical power through the fiber?
Do you need a single channel, or multiple channel device?
Do you need to measure optical power, spectral intensity, or polarization?
What sort of measurement resolution or accuracy do you need?
What dynamic range do you need?
Do you need the ends of the fiber connectorized? What type of connector do you need?
How long should each end of the fiber be?
Do you need the fiber cabled? What cable size do you need?
What kind of communication link do you need?
If you need a wirelesss link, what communication range do you need?
Description
Part Number
OCM-1N-W-a/b-F-XY-JD-L-M-E
Smart Patchcord
N = Number of fibers (1 channel is standard)
W = Wavelength in nm:
1550 for 1450 to 1650 nn operating range
1300 for 1280 to 1440 nm operating range
(For single channel monitoring, specify
the exact wavelength)
Contact OZ Optics for other wavelengths
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns:
9/125 for 1300 or 1550 nm SMF
7/125 for 1300 nm PMF
8/125 for 1550 nm PMF.
See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Optics
Standard Tables for other fiber sizes
F = Fiber type: S = Singlemode
P = Polarization maintaining
E = Electrical Output
A = analog output
RS232 = digital output
U = USB
W = wireless (radio)
M = Measurement module
D = Optical Power (Detector)
P = Polarization
C = Single Channel Monitor
L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the
device.
JD = Fiber jacket type:
0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable
XY = Input and output connector codes
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
SCU = Ultra SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC
E = E2000/PC
EA = Angled E2000/APC
X = No Connector (See table 6 of the
Standard Tables for other connector
types)
Ordering Examples For Custom Parts:
A network station needs to actively monitor the signal strength of the 1545 nm channel in a course optical WDM network. The monitoring
unit will be spliced into the network, and an analog current proportional to the optical signal strength is sufficient to keep track of the signal.
Part Number
Description
OCM-11-1545-9/125-S-XX-1-1-C-A
Single channel smart patchcord for monitoring 1545 nm wavelength signals only in an optical
system. The fiber on either side of the monitor is 1 meter long, 1 mm jacketed, with no connectors
on either end. The module generates an analog signal proportional to the intensity of the 1545 nm
light.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
TAPERED AND LENSED FIBERS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Improved coupling to and from waveguides, laser diodes
and photodiodes
Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining Fibers
AR coated endfaces available
Can be made based on either spot size or taper shape
Metalized fiber versions available
Hermetically sealable versions available
Other custom configurations available
Tapered / Lensed Fiber
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Active component pigtailing
DWDM devices
Waveguide packaging
MEMS device connections
Miniaturized fiber optic components
Coupling to circular or elliptical beam outputs
Product Description:
Tapered and lensed fibers offer a convenient way to improve
coupling between optical fibers and waveguide devices, laser
diodes or photo diodes. By laser shaping the fiber end, the light
can be transformed to improve mode matching and coupling
efficiency with the waveguide device, laser diode chip or
photodiode chip. The manufacturing process allows for improved
coupling to either circular or oval input spots (this must be
specified in advance).
OZ Optics tapered and lensed fibers are manufactured by laser
shaping the endface to create the optimal light output/input for
specific applications. This method provides the best coupling
efficiencies and mode matching abilities in a taper. An alternative
technique is to instead polish the end face of the fiber to a specific
radius and taper angle, forming a lens. Oval spots can also be
formed using the polishing technique, normally by shaping the
fiber to form a chisel shape.
The characteristics of fiber tapers depend greatly upon the
application. For laser diode and waveguide coupling applications,
beam quality is paramount. The focused spot characteristics must
match the waveguide characteristics as closely as possible to
ensure good coupling. In contrast, fiber to photodiode coupling
does not require a high quality beam. One only has to ensure that
the focused spot size is smaller than the photodetector. Thus
tapered fibers for photodiodes are offered at lower cost.
Singlemode, Multimode or Panda Type Polarization Maintaining
(PM) fibers can be tapered. For multimode fibers, only polished
versions, with a polish radius and taper angle can be produced.
While they can improve coupling efficiencies when used with laser
diodes or VCSELs, they do not focus to an actual spot like
singlemode and PM fiber versions do.
PM fibers offer a means to control the polarization of optical
signals throughout the system, thus controlling Polarization
Dependent Losses (PDL) and Polarization Mode Dispersion
(PMD). This control is crucial in developing high speed 10 Gb/s,
and next generation 40 Gb/s and faster systems. In general, OZ
Optics uses PM fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when
building polarization maintaining components and patchcords.
However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber
structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so
please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary,
we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
Custom configurations can be designed if required. Tapered fibers
can be incorporated into other OZ Optics assemblies including
Hermetic Patchcords and V-Groove assemblies, thus aiding in the
development of photonic devices that meet Telcordia requirements.
Contact OZ Optics for more information.
Stripped Fiber
Ø125 micron
Radius of Curvature
“R”
Taper Angle
“θ”
Spot Diameter
"SD"
Working Distance
"WD"
Fiber with Acrylate Coating
Ø250 micron or Ø400 micron
Figure 1: Laser Shaped Lensed Fiber (End Detail)
DTS0080
Strip Length
"SL"
Figure 2: Polished Lensed Fiber (End Detail)
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
29-Nov-04
1
Description
Tapered Lensed Fiber:
Part Number
TFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-SL-SD-WD-L(-AR)(-PD)1
AR = AR Coating for tapered end
Add -AR if anti-reflective coating
is required
F = Fiber Type
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
L = Overall Length, in meters
X = Connector Code
3S = Super FC
3U = Ultra FC
3A = Angled FC
8 = ST
SC = Super SC
SCU = Ultra SC
SCA = Angled SC
MU = Super MU
LC = Super LC
LCA = Angled LC
X = No Connector
WD = Working Distance, in microns
3-50 microns available
SD = Spot Diameter, in microns (1/e 2)
2.0-7.5 microns available
SL = Strip Length, in millimeters
JD = Jacket Diameter
0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating 2
0.40 = 400 micron OD acrylate coating 2
1 = 900um Hytrel loose tube
buffered fiber
W = Wavelength, in nanometers
1300/1550 for Corning SMF-28
Singlemode fiber
a/b = Fiber core/cladding
9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber
6/125 for 980nm PANDA type PM fiber
7/125 for 1300nm PANDA type PM fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA type PM fiber
Notes:
1
2
Add -PD for low cost tapers for photodiode packaging
Singlemode fiber normally has a 250 micron coating. PM fiber has 400 or 250 micron coating.
Description
Polished Lensed Fiber:
Part Number
TFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-SL-R-θ -L-POL(-AR)(-PD)1
F = Fiber Type
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
X = Connector Code
3S = Super FC
3U = Ultra FC
3A = Angled FC
8 = ST
SC = Super SC
SCU = Ultra SC
SCA = Angled SC
MU = Super MU
LC = Super LC
LCA = Angled LC
X = No Connector
W = Wavelength, in nanometers
1300/1550 for Corning SMF-28
Singlemode fiber
AR = AR Coating for tapered end
Add -AR if anti-reflective coating
is required
L = Overall Length, in meters
θ = Taper angle in degrees
R = Radius of tip, in microns
SL = Strip Length, in millimeters
JD = Jacket Diameter
0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating2
0.40 = 400 micron OD acrylate coating2
1 = 900um Hytrel loose tube
buffered fiber
a/b = Fiber core/cladding
9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber
6/125 for 980nm PANDA type PM fiber
7/125 for 1300nm PANDA type PM fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA type PM fiber
Notes:
1
2
Add -PD for low cost tapers for photodiode packaging
Singlemode fiber normally has a 250 micron coating. PM fiber has 400 or 250 micron coating.
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
TURNKEY, ULTRA STABLE, OEM LASER DIODE SOURCE
OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 SERIES
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Output power to >100mW
Output power stability to <0.025dB
Wavelength variation to within <0.1nm
Temperature controlled to 0.1°C
Wavelengths from 400nm to 1625nm available
Power control via external analog voltage
External modulation up to 50MHz available
15 - 45°C operating temperature range
Safety interlock
Over-temperature lockout
Singlemode, multimode, or polarization preserving fiber
Available with fiber pigtail or connector receptacle
Optional collimator or focuser on the pigtail output
Guaranteed lifetime -18 months or 5000 hours
Receptacle Style OZ-2000
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Insertion loss measurement and attenuation measurement
High power or remote fiber delivery system
Optical component manufacturing and testing
Materials evaluation and testing
Semiconductor surface testing
Life science illumination
Laser scanning microscopy
Red/Green/Blue (RGB) illumination systems.
Product Description:
Pigtail Style OZ-2000
The OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 are temperature stabilized fiber coupled, laser diode delivery
systems. The compact housings contain both the laser diode and the temperature
control, and are powered by a single 5 volt DC supply. Both designs have an operating
temperature range of 15 - 45°C, and hold the temperature variation of the laser diode to
within 0.1°C. This maintains the wavelength variation to better than 0.1nm and also
reduces the tendency of the laser diode to mode hop. The electrical interface on the OZ1000 is located on the front face of the unit with the optical interface, while on the OZ2000 it is on the rear of the unit
The units are equipped with an adjustable output power feature. The output power can
be adjusted by simply changing the DC voltage on the Power Control Input. The voltage
range is 0 - 5 volts, with 0 volts corresponding to maximum power, and 5 volts minimum
power.
Receptacle And Pigtail Style
OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 Family
The standard parts can be modulated at low frequencies (a few KHz), and devices can
be configured at the factory for modulation capability up to 100 KHz, if requested. Special
versions are available from OZ Optics to cover even higher modulation frequencies, up
to 50 MHz. Contact OZ Optics with your requirements.
A manual blocking-style attenuator can be added as an option to adjust the power. This
reduces the tendency of the laser diode to change wavelength when varying power by
allowing the user to keep the laser diode current constant.
An interlock feature is also standard. This enables the user to shut the unit down if a
safety issue or other error condition arises. This feature can also be used as a TTL on/off
control.
The standard OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 operates with the laser at a fixed temperature. OZ
Optics can also provide units with a variable laser temperature, which can be used to
tune the wavelength of the laser over a typical range of 2 nm. Contact OZ Optics for
further information, or view the datasheet titled Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source.
DTS0081
RGB Delivery System using OZ-2000 Sources
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
With RGB Combiner
02-Dec-2004
1
Questionnaire
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
What wavelength do you need?
7. Do you need a collimated output beam?
How much output power do you need?
8. If a collimated beam is required, what is the desired beam diameter?
Do you want a built-in fiber, or a receptacle to attach your own fiber? 9. If a focused spot is required, what is the desired spot size and
What size and type of fiber do you require?
working distance?
How long a fiber do you need?
10. Do you want a built-in isolator?
What kind of fiber connectors are you using?
Description:
Pigtail Style Source
Part Number
OZ-N000-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-P
N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same
front panel
2000 for electrical connection on rear panel &
optical connection on front panel
W = Wavelength 1: 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750,
780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625.
P = Output power available from the fiber end,
in mW 3
L = Fiber length (in meters)
a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm):
(see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet)
F = Fiber type:
M = Multimode Fiber
S = Singlemode Fiber
P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber
LB = Backreflection level 2:
35 = 35dB return loss (MM only)
40 = 40dB return loss (SM & PM)
60 = 60dB return loss
(SM & PM - 1300/1550nm only)
Description:
Receptacle Style Source
X = Connector type: 3 = FC/PC
3S = Super FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/APC
5 = SMA905
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC or ultra SC
SCA = Angled SC
Part Number
OZ-N000-X-a/b-W-F-P
N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same
front panel
2000 for electrical connection on rear panel &
optical connection on front panel
X = Connector Receptacle:
2.5U = 2.5mm universal receptacle
(for FC, ST, or SC).
3S = Super FC/PC
3A = Angled FC/APC
5 = SMA905
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
JD = Jacket Diameter:
1 = 900µm jacketed fiber
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar jacketed fiber
3A = 3mm OD black armored cable
3AS = 3mm OD Stainless Steel
armored cable
5A = 5mm OD black armored cable
5AS = 5mm OD Stainless Steel
armored cable
P = Output power 3:
Output power available from the receptacle
F = Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber
S = Singlemode Fiber
P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber
W = Wavelength 1: 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685,
750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310,
1480, 1550, 1625
a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm):
(see tables 1 to 5 in the standard tables data
sheet)
1 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers’
tolerances. (Typical tolerances vary from ±5nm to as high as ±30nm).
2 The backreflection specification refers to the reflected signal strength relative to the output power seen by the laser diode from internal
reflections. It does not include external sources of reflection, including those from the connector at the end of the fiber. To minimize external
reflections, OZ Optics recommends using angle polished FC/APC or SC/APC connectors. Backreflection values are limited by the wavelength
and fiber type selected. Other backreflection levels may be possible. Please contact OZ for further information.
3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diodes available, not all output powers are available at every wavelength
for every fiber type. For wavelengths below 750nm, we recommend pigtail style to eliminate connection loss at the receptacle interface.
Options: Add "-ISOL" if an optical isolator is required (Please note that this option is only available for the 1300 to 1625nm wavelength range).
Add "-BL" if OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the output power.
5
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
U-BRACKET ASSEMBLY – FIBER OPTIC
Fiber optic U-bracket assemblies are designed to
transmit light from an optical fiber, across an air
gap, and back into a second fiber with low losses.
The U-bracket is prealigned at the factory for
minimum insertion losses, making it very easy to
use. A variety of bulk optical devices, including
polarizers, isolators, filters, and waveplates, can be
simply inserted into the U-bracket, allowing the user
to quickly and easily test or prototype systems
incorporating fiber and bulk optics.
The U-Bracket assembly consists of three parts: an
input fiber collimator, the U-bracket itself, and an
output fiber focuser. Utilizing OZ Optics' patented
tilt adjustment technique, losses of only 0.6 dB are
achieved across a 60mm gap for pigtailed
singlemode fibers, with backreflection levels of
-25dB, -40dB or -60 dB available. Connector style
assemblies are also available for a variety of
DTS0022
connectors, including NTT-FC, AT&T-ST, bare fiber
adapters, etc. Typical insertion losses are 1.0 dB
across a 60mm gap for connectorized versions,
with backreflection levels typically -20 dB.
U-Brackets are available in different sizes, with
different gap spacings according to the customer's
needs. Many different custom designs can be
made for your application. For instance, source to
fiber versions are available, where light from either
a laser, a laser diode, or an LED is transmitted
across the air gap and into the output fiber. Another
option is to have a photo detector attached to the
output end of the U-bracket, to measure the
transmitted light. Another device available is a
black box with a removable filter holder, to quickly
insert and remove a filter from the optical path.
Contact OZ for further information.
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Part Number
Description
UB-0A-XY-W-I-O-D
U-Bracket assembly with female connector receptacles.
UB-1A-11-W-a/b-I-O-D-LB-XY-JD-L
Pigtail style U-Bracket assembly with low backreflection.
UB-INSERT-01-0.5
0.5” OD Filter holder insert for small U-bracket UB-12, UB-02 style
assemblies.
UB-250-XY-W-F
Black box assembly with female receptacles, and a removable filter.
UB-150-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L
Pigtail style black box assembly with low backreflection, and a removable
filter.
Where: A is the size of the U-Bracket; 1 for large body (H=2.82", W=2.5", A=0.32", B=1.57", T=0.32"), 2 for
small body (H= 1.68", W=1.0", A=0.38", B=1.03", T=0.25" ). Custom size U-Bracket Assemblies are
available on request.
X,Y are the input and output connector receptacle types for connector style U-Brackets. For pigtail style UBrackets they refer to the male connectors on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST,
SC for SC connectors, X for unterminated fibers, etc.),
W is the operating wavelength in nm,
a,b are the fiber core and cladding sizes, respectively, in microns,
I,O,F are the input and output fiber types (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining
fibers),
D is the length of the U-Bracket body in inches. (Standard sizes include D=1.85", D=3.03” for large body
U-Brackets, D=1.15" or 1.80" for small body U-Brackets),
LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB, or 60dB for pigtail style systems),
JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored
cable, and 5A for 5mm armored cable.),
L is the fiber length in meters.
Example: A customer wants to use a pigtail style U-Bracket for 1300nm fiber, with 40dB backreflection. The input
side is polarization maintaining fiber, while the output side is singlemode fiber. Both fibers are one meter long, cabled
with 3.0mm Kevlar cable, and terminated with male NTT-FC connectors. The small body size U-bracket with the 1.15
inch body length is to be used. OZ Optics' part number: UB-12-11-1300-9/125-P-S-1.15-40-33-3.0-1.
FILTER HOLDER INSERT DIMENSIONS
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
UNIVERSAL CONNECTORS AND HYBRID PATCHCORDS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Allows Patchcords With Different Connector Types To Be Mated
Connectors With Different Ferrule Sizes Supported
Minimizes Losses Between Fibers With Different Core Sizes And
Numerical Apertures
Male To Female (Hybrid) Connector Versions
Rugged And Compact Design
Low Insertion Losses
Low Return Losses
Low Cost
Applications:
•
•
•
•
Butt Joint Style Universal Connectors
Patch panel interconnects
Fiber Distribution Hubs
Test And Measurement Stations
Optical Delivery Systems
Product Description:
Universal connectors are designed to allow one to mate two patchcords that have different
connectors on their ends. This is essential when working with components and equipment
from different suppliers, which in turn use different connectors.
Universal connectors come in three major variations. The simplest are butt joint style
universal connectors. These connectors have different female receptacles on either side. The
patchcords are simply plugged into either side, and the fiber ends butt together in the middle.
These connectors offer an inexpensive and reliable way to connect matching singlemode,
multimode, or polarization maintaining patchcords with differing fiber terminations. They can
connect patchcords with either matching PC finishes or matching APC finishes. These
adaptors are available in FC to SC, FC to ST, ST to SC, ST to SMA905 and ST to SMA 906
formats. We now also offer connectors with a universal ferrule adaptor design, for connectors
that have 2.5mm diameter ferrules, or 1.25mm diameter ferrules. These receptacles are best
suited for temporary measurements, and give added flexibility.
Hybrid patchcords are also offered. These connectors have a female receptacle on one side,
and a male connector on the other side. A small length of fiber lies within the device to
transmit the light. These connectors allow one to convert an output from male connector type
to another in as short a time as possible. Male-to-male hybrid patchcords are also available.
Lens style universal connectors are ideal for connecting fibers that have different optical
characteristics. They consist of a an input receptacle, a collimating lens, a focusing lens and
the output receptacle. Light from the input fiber is first collimated, then focused back into the
output fiber. The alignment is precisely controlled using OZ Optics’ patentened alignment
technique. Lens style universal connectors are normally prealigned for standard applications,
such as for standard 9/125 singlemode fibers for telecom applications. However they are tilt
adjustable, to enable one to compensate for any offsets between the fiber cores and the
connector housings. This is very useful when working with fibers that have concentricity
problems, or unusual shapes, such as D shaped polarization maintaing fibers.
Lens style universal connectors are also ideal for connecting fibers that have different optical
characteristics. An example would be connecting a singlemode fiber with a high numerical
aperture and small core size to one with a lower numerical aperture and large core size. By
selecting different focal length lenses for the input and output sides, the focused spot size
can be changed to best match the characteristics of the output fiber. The device will work in
both directions with low losses. Similarly one can design universal connectors to couple light
from low NA, large core multimode fibers into high NA small core multimode mode fibers.
Please note that universal connectors will not couple light efficiently from a multimode fiber
into a singlemode fiber. High losses are unavoidable in this situation, since multimode fibers
have both larger numerical apertures and larger core sizes.
DTS0082
Hybrid Patchcords
Lens Style Universal Connector
0.550
0.147
M8X0.75
THREAD
0.591
0.110
0.216
0.372
0.110
Ø0.173
0.087
0.591
0.372
Ø0.088 THRU
C’BORE Ø0.156
x 0.052 DEEP
2 PLCS
Figure 1:
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Typical Dimmensions For Butt
Joint Style Universal Connector
09-May-02
1
Description
Hybrid patchcord with a male connector input
and female receptacle output
a/b =
Part Number
AA-200-11-a/b- XY
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber,
See standard tables for other standard
fiber sizes
Description
X=
Y=
Input connector code:
Output female receptacle code
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
5 = SMA 905
6 = SMA 906
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
X=
Y=
Input connector code:
Output connector code
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
5 = SMA 905
6 = SMA 906
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
Part Number
Hybrid patchcord with a male connectors
AA-200-1X-a/b- Y
a/b =
Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber,
See standard tables for other standard
fiber sizes
Description
Lens style universal connector
Part Number
AA-300- XY -W-F
X, Y = Input and output receptacle or connector code:
3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC, Ultra NTTPC/PC or Angled NTT-FC/PC
5 = SMA 905
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
Description
Part Number
Butt joint style universal connectors
AA-200-XY
XY
F = Fiber type:
S = Singlemode Fiber
M = Multimode Fiber
W = Wavelength:
Specify in nanometers:
Example: 1300/1550 for
telecommunication wavelengths
Input and output connector codes:
3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC,
ULTRA NTT-FC/PC
5 = SMA 905
6 = SMA 906
8 = AT&T-ST
SC = SC
1.25U = 1.25mm Universal adaptor
2.5U = 2.5mm universal adaptor
.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
USB-BASED OPTICAL TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER
Product Description
OZ-UFO-320 and OZ-UFO-321 are compact, cost-effective,
plug-and-play Optical Time-domain Reflectometer (OTDR) units,
designed for full-range fiber fault detection. With fieldwork in
mind it is ideal for optical fiber installation, maintenance, field
construction, and other on-site fault-locations analysis.
The OTDR unit is designed to operate with a laptop or any other
computer running on Windows 98, 2000 or above. A USB cable
connects the computer and the OTDR unit. The application
program (AP) sends commands from the computer to the OTDR
unit and gets data back, both through the USB port. The USB port
and a rechargeable Lithium Ion battery power the unit.
Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Figure 1: USB-Based OTDR Module
Fiber link supervision
Fiber identification
Remote fiber test systems
Fiber length measurements
Fiber break point locating
Acceptance testing
Fiber attenuation measurements
Splicing loss detection
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Plug-and-play unit via USB port
Full function OTDR application program compatible with
Windows 98, Windows 2000, or above
Rugged, portable and easy to use
Automatic fiber length detection and fault event analysis
Mapping function with actual position display
Powered by USB port and rechargeable Lithium Ion battery
Figure 3: Typical Windows™ Display
DTS0098
Figure 2: USB-Based OTDR
Connected To Laptop Computer
Figure 4: Typical Event Map Display
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
23-Sept-04
1
Standard Product Specifications
Model
OZ-UFO-320
OZ-UFO-321
Wavelength
1310/1550 ± 20 nm
1550/1625 ± 20 nm
Fiber Under Test
9/125 µm singlemode fiber
Optical Connector
FC/PC
Pulse Width
10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000, 10000, 20000 ns, Auto
Effective
35/33
33/31
SNR=1
38/36
36/34
Dynamic Range (dB)
Event Dead Zone
5m
Attenuation Dead Zone
40 m
Sampling Resolution
0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 m
Max. Sampling Points
128,000
Distance Accuracy
±(2 m + 3 x10 -5 x distance + marker resolution) (Fiber refractive index error not included)
Linearity
± 0.05 dB/dB or 0.1 dB (whichever greater)
Return Loss Accuracy
± 4 dB
Max. Display Range
240 km (150 miles)
Dimensions
220 x 130 x 55 mm without bumper
Weight
950 g
Power consumption
Power Supply
Operating: 3.6 watt
Idle: 2 watt
Lithium Ion Battery & AC /DC Adapter ( 100 ~ 240V; 50 ~ 60Hz)
Notes:
Measurements are made at 23 ± 2°C.
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
VARIABLE ATTENUATORS – BLOCKING RECEPTACLE STYLE
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compact, rugged housing
High resolution
Wide wavelength range
Wide variety of connectors available
Polarization insensitive
Wide wavelength range
LOW COST!
Applications:
•
•
•
•
CATV, LAN and Telecommunications use
Receiver padding
Test and measurement
Optical power equalization
Product Description:
Variable attenuators consist of two baseplates with lenses. The two baseplates are aligned for optimum coupling efficiency using a patented alignment
technique. A threaded radial screw is used to block the collimated beam
between the two lenses. Rotating the screw changes its position within the
collimated beam, thus varying the power level coupled into the receiver fiber.
Because the attenuator works by directly blocking the beam, it is polarization
insensitive.
Receptacle Style Variable Attenuator
Because of limitations in receptacle tolerances, receptacle style attenuators
are not recommended for singlemode or polarization maintaining applications
requiring low losses and good repeatability. Instead, please refer to the data
sheet titled Pigtail Style Inline Variable Attenuators, Beam Blocking Style.
Figure 1.
DTS0074
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Ordering Information for Standard Parts:
Bar Code
187
Part Number
BB-200-33-633-M
8908
BB-200-33-700-M
9369
BB-200-33-1550-M
188
BB-200-55-633-M
11094
BB-200-55-820-M
11095
BB-200-55-1300-M
8033
BB-200-58-690-M
9277
BB-200-88-800-M
5821
BB-200-88-904-M
2169
BB-200-88-1300-M
Description
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 633nm for multimode applications
receptacles on both sides.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 700nm for multimode applications
receptacles on both sides.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1550nm for multimode applications
receptacles on both sides.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 633nm for multimode applications with
receptacle on both ends.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 820nm for multimode applications with
receptacles on both sides.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1300nm for multimode applications with
receptacle on both ends.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 690nm for multimode applications with
receptacle on input end and ST receptacle on output end.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 800nm for multimode applications
receptacles on both sides.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 904nm for multimode applications
receptacles on both sides.
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1300nm for multimode applications
receptacles on both sides.
with female FC
with female FC
with female FC
female SMA 905
female SMA 905
female SMA 905
female SMA 905
with female ST
with female ST
with female ST
Standard Product Specifications:
Insertion Loss:
Backreflection:
Attenuation Range:
Available Wavelengths:
Vibration:
Typically 2dB for multimode attenuators
15dB for receptacle style attenuators (BB-200 style),
2 to 80 dB with 0.01dB resolution up to 10dB, 0.1dB resolution up to 30 dB
400-1625nm
Less than ±0.05dB change between 10Hz-55Hz
Ordering Examples for Standard Parts:
A customer needs a variable attenuator with female ST receptacles for 1300nm wavelength for a multimode application. In this case OZ Part
number, barcode and description will be:
Bar Code
2169
Part Number
BB-200-88-1300-M
Description
Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1300nm for multimode applications
with female ST receptacles on both sides
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a _____ piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully
explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
What
What
What
What
is the application?
wavelengths do you plan on using?
power level do you need to handle?
size multimode fiber do you plan on using?
Receptacle style attenuator:
Female Receptacle Code: 3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super,
and Ultra NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT&T-ST
5 = SMA 905
SC = SC
BB-200-XY-W-M
Fiber type:
S=Singlemode
M=Multimode
P=Polarization Maintaining
Wavelength: Specify in nanometers
(Example: 633 for 633nm)
2
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATOR – REFLECTIVE STYLE
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Neutral density filter or high power versions are available
Rugged and compact
Wide wavelength range
Singlemode, and multimode fiber versions
Low PDL and wavelength dependence
Mode independent attenuation in multimode applications with
neutral density filter version
Wide attenuation range
Low backreflection
Low Cost
•
•
•
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical power equalization and power control for WDMs and
multi-channel optically amplified networks
Telecommunications
CATV
LAN
Test and measurement
Receiver padding.
Reflective Style Variable Fiber Optic Attenuator
Product Description:
OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable reflective style variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators can be used for C, L and S wavelength bands, with minimal changes in insertion loss. Reflector style housings are ideal for applications
where the input and output fibers must be attached to the same side of the attenuator. Mounting holes provide easy attachment to PC boards and
patch panels.
The reflector style attenuators contain either a variable neutral density filter or a blocking plate depending on the attenuator version selected. The
blocking style is ideal for high power (over 50mW) applications, while the neutral density filter provides more uniform attenuation in multimode applications. The attenuation is controlled by a turn screw on the side of the attenuator, which controls the position of the filter or plate.
Figure 1. Mechanical Dimensions (inches)
DTS0075
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
1. A customer needs a reflective style attenuator with neutral density filter for 1300/1550nm with 40dB backreflection or better. He wants the
fibers to be standard 9/125 micron, 3mm OD cabled, single mode fiber. The fibers should be 1 meter long and terminated with Super
polished FC connectors, on both ends. Our standard part number will be:
Bar Code
3346
Part Number
BB-600-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-ND
Description
Reflector style variable attenuator at 1300/1550nm with 1m long, 3mm OD
jacketed single mode fiber with FC/Super PC connectors on both ends,
40dB return loss. ND: Neutral density
2. A customer needs a high power version reflective style attenuator for 1550nm with 50dB backreflection or better. He wants the fibers to be
standard 9/125 micron, 3mm OD cabled, single mode fiber. The fibers should be 1 meter long and terminated with Ultra polished SC
connectors, on both ends. Our standard part number will be:
Bar Code
12394
Part Number
BB-600-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-50-SCUSCU-3-1-HP
Description
Reflector style variable attenuator at 1300/1550nm with 1m
long, 3mm OD jacketed single mode fiber with SC/Ultra PC
connectors on both ends, 50dB return loss. HP: High power,
up to 2 watts.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we
will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation,
so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
What wavelengths are you operating at?
How much power will be transmitted through the attenuator?
What type of fiber do you wish to use?
What is fiber length and jacket OD?
What is the worst acceptable return loss?
Do you need a variable or fixed attenuation?
What connectors do you need at each end of fiber?
What environmental requirements do you need to meet?
Are there any special performance requirements that you need to meet?
Reflector Style Attenuator:
BB-600-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-V
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers:
Example: 1300/1550 for 1300 to
1550nm wavelength range
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber,
See the OZ Standard Tables data
sheet for other standard fiber sizes.
F = Fiber type:
M=Multimode
S=Singlemode
P=Polarization Maintaining (PM)
LB = Backreflection level:
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode fibers,
35dB for MM fibers
Note 1:
For low insertion loss add "-LL" to the end of the part number.
LL = 0.8dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL = 1dB for other
attenuators.
Ordering Example For Custom Parts:
Example 1: A customer wants to order a reflective style, beam blocker version, single mode attenuator
at 1300nm, with 2m and 900 micron cabled fiber on both sides with FC super PC polished connectors
and 40dB back reflection with low loss. The part number should be:
BB-600-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-40-3S3S-1-2-HP-LL
Example 2: A customer wants to order reflective style, neutral density version attenuator at 850nm with
62.5/125µ multimode fiber, 3m at input, 2m at output, 3mm OD cabled with SC/PC connector on input
end, Super FC connector on output end, 35dB back reflection. The part number should be:
BB-600-11-850-62.5/125-M-35-SC3S-3-3,2-ND
V = Version
ND = Neutral Density Version
HP = Beam Blocking Style
L = Fiber length in meters, on each side of
the device. If they are different, specify
the input and output lengths separated
by a comma.
Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber
at the input and 7 meters at the output,
replace the L with 1,7. Total fiber length
is input fiber length plus output fiber
length
JD = Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
X,Y = Connector code:
X = No connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC/PC
LCA = Angled LC/PC
See the OZ Standard Tables data
sheet for other connectors.
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATORS
NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTER VERSION – PIGTAIL STYLE
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rugged and compact size
Wide wavelength range
Singlemode, polarization maintaining and multimode fiber versions
Low Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL)
Low wavelength dependence
Mode insensitive attenuation
Low backreflection
Designed to meet Telcordia requirements
Low cost
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optical power equalization and power control for WDMs and
multi-channel optically amplified networks
Telecommunications
CATV
LAN
Test and measurement
Receiver padding
Optical sensors
Neutral Density Style Variable Attenuator
Product Description:
OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable, pigtail
style variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators are designed to
meet Telcordia requirements. These attenuators can be used for 1300nm and
1550nm, as well as for C (1520-1570nm), L (1570-1620nm) and S (1470-1520nm)
bands, with minimal changes in the insertion loss. Mounting holes provide easy
attachment to PC boards and patch panels. The mounting hole patterns and
attenuator sizes can be modified to meet our customer requirements on OEM orders.
The attenuators consist of two baseplates. Each baseplate contains a fiber followed
by a collimating lens. The attenuator is prealigned for optimum coupling efficiency
using a patented tilt alignment technique. A variable neutral density filter is used to
provide more uniform attenuation in multimode applications than the blocking screw
technique. The attenuation is controlled by a turn screw on the side of the
attenuator, which controls the position of the filter.
Figure 1: Neutral Density Style Attenuator
Dimensions (inches)
Variable attenuators based on the neutral density filter are ideal for multimode fiber applications where one may be concerned about model noise.
The term multimode means there is more than one path for light to travel inside a single fiber. These paths are known as modes. It does not mean
the unit consists of multiple fibers in a bundle. When coherent laser light is coupled into multimode fiber, the output shows speckles. Bending the fiber
causes the speckle pattern to change. If the losses in a system depend on which modes are excited, then changing the modes excited in the fiber
changes the output power. This is known as modal noise. If the source being used is an LED, then one does not see speckles, and modal noise is
not an issue. However, for laser sources, modal noise is an issue. When blocking style attenuators are used with multimode fiber, some modes are
blocked, while others are transmitted. This can produce 1dB or greater modal noise fluctuations with coherent sources. A variable attenuator using
a neutral density filter is not as strongly affected by modal noise. However, neutral density filter attenuators offer lower attenuation range (around
40dB) and can only handle about 50mW of power.
While generally used for multimode applications, OZ Optics can also produce singlemode and polarization maintaining versions. In general, OZ Optics
uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However
OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
DTS0064
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
19-Feb-05
1
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized
products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need
additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE)
charges, lot charges, and a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision
will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Customs Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
What is your operating wavelength?
What type of fiber do you wish to use?
What is the worst acceptable return loss?
What connectors, if any, do you need?
What should the fiber length and jacket diameter be?
How much power will be transmitted through the attenuator?
Would a beam blocking attenuator be better suited for your purposes?
Do you need a variable or fixed attenuation?
What environmental requirements do you need to meet?
Are there any special performance requirements that you need to meet?
Neutral Density Style Attenuator:
BB-500-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-ND
W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers:
Example: 1300/1550 for 1300 and
1550nm wavelength ranges
a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber.
50/125, 62.5/125 are standard
multimode sizes. See the OZ
Standard Tables data sheet for other
standard fiber sizes
F = Fiber type:
S = Singlemode
M = Multimode
P = Polarization Maintaining (PM)
LB = Backreflection level:
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode and
PM fibers, 35dB for multimode fibers
Note 1: For low loss attenuators add "LL" to the end of the part number.
LL = 0.6dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL = 1dB for rest of the attenuators.
Note 2: Add “-ER=25” or “-ER=30” for extinction ratios of 25 or 30dB respectively. If not specified,
the extinction ratio for PM versions will be > 20dB.
L = Fiber length in meters, on each side of
the device. Example: To order 1 meter of
the fiber at the input and 7 meters at the
output, replace the L with 1, 7
JD = Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket
3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC
cable. See the OZ Standard Tables
data sheet for other jacket sizes
X,Y = Input & output connector codes:
X = No connector
3S = Super NTT-FC/PC
3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC
8 = AT & T-ST
SC = SC
SCA = Angled SC
LC = LC/PC
See the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for
other connectors
Ordering Examples for Custom Parts:
Example 1: A customer wants to order a multimode attenuator with a neutral density filter at 1300nm, with 2m long and 900 microns cabled,
50/125 micron fiber with FC/Super PC polished connectors on both ends and 35dB back reflection with low loss. The fiber is to be a total
length of 4 meters, 900 microns cabled, and with the attenuators in the middle (ie. 2 meters on each end)
The part number should be:
BB-500-11-1300/1550-50/125-M-35-3S3S-1-2-ND-LL
Example 2: A customer wants to order a pigtailed variable attenuator at 850nm in a rectangular housing with 62.5/125 multimode fiber, 3m
long at input, 2m long at output, 3mm OD cabled with neutral density filter, with no connectors and 35dB back reflection.
The part number should be: BB-500-11-850-62.5/125-M-35-XX-3-3,2-ND
3
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
V-GROOVE ASSEMBLIES
Features:
• Up to 48 fiber V-Groove arrays
• Singlemode, multimode or polarization maintaining fibers
• Ribbon or individual fibers
• Assemblies with bare fiber or 900µm jacketing, and with or without
connectors
• 900µm jacketed breakouts available, up to 2 meters in length
• Custom configurations possible for OEM applications
• Designed to meet Telcordia specifications
Applications:
• Arrayed Waveguide (AWG) devices
• Planar Lightwave Chips (PLC)
• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexers (DWDM)
• MEMS devices
• Miniaturized or integrated fiber optic components
8 Channel PM Fiber
Pigtailed V-Groove Array
Product Description:
OZ Optics V-Groove array assemblies assist in developing next generation photonic devices.
The arrays are manufactured using precision silicon wafer V-Groove technology in conjunction
with a Pyrex lid, enabling sub-micron alignment accuracy with UV cure attachment capabilities.
OZ Optics V-Groove array assemblies are available with singlemode, multimode or PANDA
type Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers. Customization can even include different types of
fibers assembled into a single array. PM fibers offer a means to control the polarization of
optical signals throughout the system thus minimizing Polarization Dependant Losses (PDL)
and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) effects. This control is crucial in developing high
speed 10 Gb/s, next generation 40 Gb/s, and faster systems.
In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure
when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However, OZ Optics can
construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in
stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to
use customer supplied fibers to build devices.
32 Channel V-Groove Assembly
Standard PANDA style PM arrays are manufactured with the polarization axis (stress rods)
aligned vertical to the V-Groove base within 1°. High grade assemblies with one to eight
channels can be provided with the stress rods aligned to within 0.5°. Arrays can also be
provided with the fibers aligned parallel to the base, alternating axes or at custom angles.
When supplied with a breakout and connectors, the alignment of the connector is also to the
slow axis, within 3° for standard connectors or available to within 1.5° for high grade
connectors.
V-Groove array assemblies can be manufactured with a hermetic feedthrough attached. This
enables the development of multichannel photonic devices capable of meeting Telcordia
requirements. Fiber breakouts can also be added, to convert ribbonized fibers into separated
fibers, capable of being connectorized.
Hermetic V-Groove Assembly
DTS0083
PM Fiber V-Groove Assembly Endface
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
Single Channel V-Groove Assembly
V-Groove Assembly With 900 Micron
OD Breakout And Connectors
09/03/02
1
General Specifications:
Polish angle:
Insertion loss:
Fiber spacing:
V-Groove spacing accuracy:
Fiber types:
Breakout:
Connectors available
0°, 8° ± 0.3° Custom angles available up to 15°
<0.5 dB per fiber
250µm fiber to fiber
500µm gap between each 8 fiber ribbon (for 16 fiber count and higher)
Other spacings available upon request
±0.5 micron absolute (See application notes)
Singlemode SMF-28 ribbon fiber (9/125)
Multimode ribbon fiber (50/125 or 62.5/125)
Polarization maintaining (PANDA Type) fiber (individual)
Others custom fibers available (individual)
Box dimensions 18mm x 50mm
Breakout length up to 2 meters
Breakout tube is white (singlemode or multimode) or blue (PM) 900
micron Hytrel
SC, FC, ST, LC and MU Terminations
PM Fiber Pigtailed V-Groove Assembly Specifications:
1
Polarization extinction ratio
PM fiber orientation
Angle alignment accuracy of
stress rods
One to eight channels: >20dB 1. Twelve or more channels: >17dB
Standard alignment is with the stress rods vertical.
Other alignment angles are available. Each fiber can be individually
aligned and monitored to ensure good extinction ratios
± 1° ( Standard Grade) or ± 0.5° (Premium Grade, one to eight channels
only)
Note1: 25dB versions can be made for one or two channels
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers,
customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular,
we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring
engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your
quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
How many fibers do you need?
What fiber spacing is needed for your application? (250µm standard)
Do you need the endface polished at an angle?(8° angle standard)
What type of fiber do you need (singlemode, multimode, PANDA type polarization maintaining)
Do you need connectors for the assembly?
VGA-N-S-A-D-VL-VW-VT-F-W-a/b-X-JD-L-B
N = Number of V-Grooves
1,2,4,8,12,16,24,32,or 48
S = V-Groove Spacing (in microns)
127, 250, 400 or 500
250 is standard
A = Angle of Polish
0, 8 degrees standard
D = Direction of angle
A,B,C,D (see Figure 2)
X for flat polish (0°)
VL = Length (in millimeters)
10.3 is standard
VW = Width (in millimeters) See standard
specifications for standard chip dimensions
VT = Thickness (in millimeters)
2.03 is standard
F = Fiber Type
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
M = Multimode
W = Wavelength of operation
a/b = Fiber Core/Cladding Diameter
9/125 for Corning SMF-28 SM fiber
6/125 for Corning Flexcore 1060 SM fiber
7/125 for 1300nm PANDA PM fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA PM fiber
B = Breakout length (in meters)
2 meter maximum, 0.5 meter is typical
L = Overall Length (in meters)
Standard length is 1-2 meters
JD = Jacket Diameter
0.25 = bare fiber, 250µm coated
and ribbon fiber
0.40 = PM fiber with 400µm
coating (500µm spacing only)
1 = 900µm jacketed (Hytrel)
X = Connector Code
Note: Standard Assemblies have
the same connectors on all fibers
3S = Super FC/PC (<-40dB RL)
3U = Ultra FC/PC (<-50dB RL)
3A = Angled FC/PC (<-60dB RL)
8 = ST
SC = SC (<-40dB RL)
SCU = Ultra SC (<-50dB RL)
SCA = Angled SC (<-60dB RL)
LC = LC
LCA = Angled LC
MU = MU
X = No Connector
5
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
VISIBLE FIBER OPTIC FAULT LOCATOR
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High visibility (up to 6 km with a 1mW, 635nm source)
Higher output up to 30 mW, 635 nm power versions available
Continuous light or pulse modulation
Power supply options include alkaline batteries or AC/DC adaptor
Carrying pouch with belt clip for pocket size version
1.25mm and 2.5 mm ID universal connector receptacles available
Pocket size, pen size and bench top versions available
Low battery indicator for pocket size version
Low cost,compact, rugged, and lightweight
532 nm green fault locator available
Optional built-in attenuator for controlling power output
User selectable auto turn off mode
Pocket Size
Visible
Fiber Optic Fault
Locator
(AA Battery Version)
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
Singlemode and multimode fiber testing
Fiber identifier applications
Locating breaks and bends in fibers and connectors
Identifying fibers and tracing optical signals by using modulated signals
Optimizing splices
Pocket Size
Visible
Fiber Optic
Fault Locator
(9V Battery
Version)
Product Description:
The Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator launches 635 nm visible laser diode light into
the fiber. When light encounters a break or sharp bend, it scatters, and the
scattered light can be observed emerging from the cable. Fault locators can locate
breaks in short patchcords, which an OTDR cannot detect due to their operating
dead zone. A fault locator is also much less expensive than an OTDR. However,
they are not recommended for use with dark-colored or armored cables.
Fault locators are available in three sizes: bench top, pocket size and pen size.
The pocket size fault locators can be operated in either continuous wave (CW)
mode or in pulse modulation mode. Pulse modulation aids in locating faults under
high ambient light conditions and improves battery life. 2 Hz
modulation is easy to detect by the naked eye, while 270 Hz and 2 kHz pulse
modulation modes are used for fiber identification by detectors. The pocket size fault
locator comes with a carrying pouch and belt clip. Pen size fault locators are CW
only. High power versions are available as bench top units. These are CW only.
Another use for fault locators is to check connector quality. Often a connector may
appear to be perfect, even when viewed with a microscope, but inside the
connector ferrule itself, poor gluing or dirt may create a microbend in the fiber. This
microbend will produce excess insertion losses or return losses, and may result in
premature failure of the connector. If one launches visible light through the fiber, so
that it emerges from the connector in question, one can readily see the distortion as
a series of rings superimposed on a normal output (See Figure 1). Bending or
twisting the fiber may affect the overall intensity pattern, but not the ring pattern
itself.
One of the key advantages of OZ Optics' pocket size and bench top model fault
locators is that they use singlemode fiber for 633nm, which has a four micron
diameter core instead of a nine micron diameter core. This reduces any potential
misalignment errors between the connector on the fault locator and the connector
on the fiber. It also ensures that the light launched into the cable being tested
matches the fundamental mode as much as possible. The light coming out of the
other end will tend to look circular and Gaussian, rather than showing several
modes. This makes it easier to identify microbends in connectors.
DTS0084
Pen Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator
Bench Top High Power Visible Fiber Optic
Fault Locator (up to 10mW)
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
18-Feb-05
1
Ordering Examples For Standard Parts:
1. A customer needs a visible fiber optic fault locator with 1 mW output power, 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle, modulation function, and AC/DC
adaptor for North America.
Bar Code
Part Number
Description
3970
FODL-22.5U-635-1
Pocket-size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator with 635 nm wavelength, 1 mW output, and 2.5
mm ID universal receptacle.
8402
AC-9VDC-NA
Universal 110/220 VAC to 9VDC power supply adaptor for North America.
2. A customer needs a visible fiber optic fault locator with 0.5 mW output power, and 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle. Modulation function is
not needed.
Bar Code
12625
Part Number
FODL-02.5U-635-0.5
Description
Pen Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator with635 nm wavelength, 0.5 mW output, and 2.5 mm
ID universal receptacle.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we
will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation,
so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1.
2.
3.
What is the maximum output power level that you require?
Do you prefer pen size, pocket size or a bench top model?
What type of receptacle is required on the fault locator?
Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator:
A = Size: 0 = Pen size
2 = Pocket size (9 volt battery version)
3 = Bench Top Mode
4 = Pocket size (AA battery version)
X = Receptacle Code¹:
3S = Standard, Super and Ultra
NTT-FC/PC receptacle
3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC²
SC = SC²
SCA = Angled SC²
8 = AT&T-ST²
2.5U = Universal receptacle for
2.5mm diameter ferrules ( FC, ST, SC, etc.)
1.25U = Universal receptacle for
1.25mm diameter ferrules ( LC, MU, etc.)
FODL-AX-W-P
P = Output Power Level (in mW,
coupled into a 9/125µm fiber):
Up to 0.4mW for Class I devices
0.8-1mW for Class II (standard)³.
Caution: Eye protection must be
worn while using fault locators with
powers above 1mW
W = Wavelength, in nm:
532 = 532 nm
635 = 635 nm
Notes:
¹ See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other receptacles.
² Not available in pen size model
³ Contact OZ Optics for non-standard power values.
Figure 1: Using a Fault Locator To Find Connector Microbends
4
219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: [email protected]
WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXERS
Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PM fiber versions
Miniature inline Versions
Visible wavelength (Red/Green/Blue) versions
High power handling
Low Insertion Losses
Low return loss
Wide wavelength range
High power handling
Coarse and dense WDM versions
LOW COST!
Miniature Inline Wavelength Division Multiplexor
Applications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Drop/Add Filters for Telecommunications
Fiber Lasers
Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers
Confocal Microscopy
Laser Spectroscopy
Imaging systems
980nm Pumping
Product Description:
Wavelength division multiplexers (WDMs) are used to combine light of
different wavelengths into a single fiber. The light from each fiber is first
collimated. The collimated beams are then combined using a dichroic filter, with
typically the longer wavelength transmitted from port T, the shorter wavelength
reflected from port R. The combined beams are then focused into the output fiber at
Port 1.
Standard Wavelength Division Multiplexer
OZ Optics manufacturers wave division multiplexors for both telecom and nontelecom applications. Of special interest are our WDMs for combining visible
wavelengths. Our RGB multiplexors combine light at red, green and blue
wavelengths into singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. This makes them ideal
for applications such as confocal microscopy, white light imaging, full colour
holograpy and others. One advantage of OZ Optics WDM's is that different fiber
types can be used on the input and output ends of the device. This is especially
useful in fiber amplifier applications, when the Erbium doped fibers have a different
core diameter and numerical aperture. WDM's with 1dB typical insertion losses have
been made this way. OZ Optics also offers source to fiber wavelength division multiplexers, where the sources are mounted directly onto the device. This improves the
overall system efficiency, and reduces costs.
Our miniature size WDMs are ideal for telecommunication applications such as
drop/add filters for either coarse WDM (CWDM) or dense DWM applications. They
are also used for combining 980 to 1080nm pump light with 1550nm signals in erbium
doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs).
RGB Wavelength Division Multiplexor
Laser diode power combiners come in a small, rugged package and are available
either with female receptacles to accept different connectors or pigtail style, with the
fiber directly attached. Pigtail style combiners are recommended for optimum
stability, minimum insertion losses, and low backreflection. Receptacle style systems
are best suited for applications where the output coupler is used with a multimode
fiber. If a receptacle style combiner is used with a singlemode fiber, then the user may
experience low coupling efficiency.
OZ Optics also manufactures polarization maintaining WDM's. The device typically
maintains polarization to better than 20dB for 1300 and 1550nm applications. Higher
extinction ratios are available on request.
OZ Optics specializes in manufacturing custom designed WDM's. Contact OZ Optics
for further information.
DTS0089
Laser Diode Power Combiner
OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.
02-Dec-2004
1
Standard Product Specifications:
Parameter
Units
Condition
Value
WDM Type
WDM-12P
WDM-13P
WDM-12N
CWDM-12N
DWDM-12N
Description
Standard Pigtail Style
Miniature Inline Style
Laser Diode Combiner
Available Wavelengths
nm
Return Losses
Insertion Losses (Typical)
dB
2
dB
Insertion Losses (Maximum)2
dB
Insertion Losses
(60dB Return Loss Option)
dB
Polarization Extinction Ratio
dB
Power Handling
Operating Temperature
mW
°C
WDM-11P
400-1650
400-1650
400-1650
400-1200 nm
1200-1650 nm
40
40, 50, or 60
40
40, 50, or 60
40
40, 50, or 60
400-1200 nm
1200-1650 nm
400-1200 nm
1200-1650 nm
1.0
0.8
1.2
1.0
1.0
0.8
1.2
1.0
1280-1650 nm
0.7 max
0.7 max
Not applicable
400-600 nm
18
15
18
20
20, 25, or 30
5004
18
20 or 25
2004
-20 to +60
20
20
2004
600-1150 nm
1250-1550 nm
SM or PM fiber, 1550nm
1
3
Not applicable
3
Not applicable
3
1
Applies to WDM-12N parts only. For CWDM and DWDM parts, available wavelenths range from 180 to 1650nm.
For components whose wavelengths are separated by more than 20nm and less than 200nm
3
For laser diode power combiners, actual insertion losses depend on the laser diodes selected for the application.
4
Higher power versions (up to 5 Watts into singlemode fiber, higher into multimode fiber), are available on request.
2
1.93 [49]
1.38 [35]
0.91 [23]
Port R
Port T
Port 1
Units are in inches
Ø 0.22 [5.5]
Ø 0.12 [3.1]
Ø 0.19 [4.75]
Units are in inches [mm]
Figure 1: Miniature Inline WDM Dimensions
Figure 2: Standard Wave Division Multiplexor Dimensions
2-56 x 0.10 DEEP
TAPPED
MOUNTING HOLES
2PLCS
Ø1.31
Ø0.56 1.44
2-56 x 0.10 DEEP
TAPPED
MOUNTING HOLES
2PLCS
0.53
1.88
2.60
Ø1.31
Units are in inches
0.53 Ø1.31
1.84
1.66
0.72
DICHROIC
MIRROR
Figure 3:Laser Diode Power Combiner Dimensions
2
Ordering Information For Standard Parts:
Bar Code
10923
Part Number
WDM-12P-111-1300/1550-7/125-PPP-60-3U3U3U-3-1
12808
WDM-12P-111-1480/1550-8/125-PPP-60-3A3A3A-3-1
12809
WDM-12P-111-980/1550-8/125-PPP-40-3A3A3A-3-1
Description
Wavelength division multiplexer for 1300 & 1550nm with 1 meter long,
3mm OD jacketed 7/125 PM fiber pigtails, 60dB return loss and ultra
FC/PC connectors.
Wavelength division multiplexer for 1480 & 1550nm with 1 meter long,
3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 60dB return loss and angled
FC/PC connectors.
Wavelength division multiplexer for 980 & 1550nm with 1 meter long,
3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss and angled
FC/PC connectors.
Ordering Information For Custom Parts:
OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized
products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need
additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE)
charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision
will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products.
Questionnaire For Custom Parts:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
What wavelength range are you interested in?
What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM?
What power levels are being used in your system?
What coupling efficiency do you require?
Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source?
What return losses are acceptable in your system?
What connector type are you using?
How do you intend to use this product?
Note concerning part numbers: Depending on the configuration of the desired design, the fiber types, lengths, and connectors may be
different on each channel. Therefore it is important to correctly identify each port in the proper order. When specifying wavelengths, list them
from shortest to longest. When identifying fiber types, start from the shortest wavelength to the longest wavelength, and identify the combined
port last. This rule is also used when specifying the connector types and fiber lengths
Description
Wavelength Division Multiplexer:
Part Number
WDM-1NA-111-Wi/Wo-a/b-ABC-LB-XYZ-JD-L
N=
Number of wavelengths to combine
(2, 3, 4, ect)
A=
Package style
P for standard pigtail style
N for miniature inline style
Wi/Wo =
Operating Wavelengths in
nanometers
a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
See tables 1 to 5 ofthe Standard Tables
for other Sizes
ABC,
Fiber types: on each port
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
L = Fiber length, in meters
JD =
Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
X,Y,Z =
Connector type on each end
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
8=AT&T-ST
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
LCA=Angled LC
MU=MU
X=No Connector
LB =Backreflection level:
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM
fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm
wavelength ranges only)
35dB for multimode fibers
3
Pigtail Style Laser Diode Combiner:
WDM-11P-a/b-F-Wi/Wo-LB-X-JD-L
a/b= Fiber core/cladding size, in microns
9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28
singlemode fiber
8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber
See tables 1 to 5 ofthe Standard Tables
for other Sizes
F
Fiber types: on the output port
M = Multimode
S = Singlemode
P = Polarization Maintaining
L = Fiber length, in meters
JD =
Fiber jacket type:
1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket
3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced
PVC cable
X,Y,Z =
Connector type on each end
3S=Super NTT-FC/PC
3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC
3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC
SC=SC
SCA=Angled SC
LC=LC
X=No Connector
See table 6 of the standard tables
for other connector types
Wi/Wo = Operating Wavelengths in
nanometers
LB =Backreflection level:
40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM
fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm
wavelength ranges only)
35dB for multimode fibers
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs):
Q: What wavelength ranges are available?
A: OZ Optics offers a variety of WDMs working from 400nm to 1650nm.
Custom designs are available for combining and splitting most
combinations of wavelengths in this region.
Q: Can I use different fibers on each port?
A: Yes, OZ Optics WDM design offers the flexibility of having different fiber types on each of the ports.
Q: Can I use high power with these WDMs?
A: Yes, OZ Optics standard design can handle up to 200mW, for higher power applications a custom design can be done to handle up to 2W.
Q: What is the standard package size? Can I get a smaller package?
A: The standard packages for WDMs use a 0.8 or 1.6 inch cube design. These packages are ideal for low cost proto-type applications. For OEM
applications OZ Optics will work with you to design a package that meets your size requirements.
Q: Do you offer WDM’s that can combine more than two wavelengths?
A: Yes. Systems that combine 3 and 4 different wavelengths have also been made.
Application Notes:
Wavelength Division Multiplexers (WDM) are used to combine and split (multiplex and demultiplex) signals in different systems ranging from
telecommunications to imaging systems. The basic principle of WDM is based on thin film filters that transmit light in a certain spectral range and
reflect light in another spectral range. Figure 3 below demonstrates the basic principle of splitting and combining two different wavelengths.
Figure 3:
The WDM plate is designed to transmit λ, and reflect λ 2 thereby “multiplexing” the two inputs into the common port. Due to the inherent
bi-directional nature of the filter, this component will also work in the opposite direction in order to “de-multiplex” the two wavelengths.
4
Exceptionally-Low-Loss LiNbO3 Optical Devices & ICs
Technology Originally Developed for High-Performance Aerospace Systems
Electro-Optic
Electro-OpticModulators
Modulators&&Switches
Switches&&Polarization
PolarizationControllers
[email protected]
www.skPhotonics.com
Short -λ 10-20 Gb/s Modulators
• Low-Loss < 4 dB, (< 3 dB option, and < 2 dB custom)
• Bandwidth >12.5 GHz, (>20 GHz version)
• Phase & Intensity (& Ultra-High Extinction Ratio version)
(λ=1310, 1060, 980, 850, 800 nm, etc.)
Very-Low-Loss Phase Modulators
3.48” x 0.35” x 0.35” (88.4 x 8.9 x 8.9
• Low-Loss < 3 dB, (< 2 dB option)
• Low Vπ ~ 5 V @ 1GHz, (~ 4 V option, & < 3V custom)
• Bandwidth > 12.5 GHz, (>25 GHz version)
mm3)
‘Digital’ & ‘RF Analog’ Modulators
12-20 Gb/s (Z-cut & X-cut ) Modulators
• Z-cut: Pre-chirp: Low-Loss < 3 dB, (< 2 dB option)
• BW >12.5 GHz, (>18 GHz version); Vπ ~ 4 [email protected]
X-cut:
Xor Z-cut
zero-chirp
• X-cut: Zero-chirp: Low-Loss < 4 dB, (< 3 dB option)
• BW >12.5 GHz, (>18 GHz version); Vπ ~ 5 [email protected]
1x2
• Other versions:
• 1x2 Dual-Output
• Integrated PD
• Lower Vπ Version
• Ultra-High Extinction Ratio
• Extended Temperature Range
40 Gb/s (Z-cut & X-cut ) Modulators
• Z-cut: Pre-chirp
3.48” x 0.35” x 0.35” (88.4 x 8.9 x 8.9
• BW >30 GHz; Vπ ~ 5.5 V (Lower-Vπ version available)
• < 4.5 dB, (< 3 dB, <2 dB option) • Integrated PD
mm3)
• X-cut: Zero-chirp
• BW >30 GHz; Vπ ~ 5.5 V (Lower-Vπ version available)
• < 4.5 dB, (< 3 dB option)
• Integrated PD
Small-Form-Factor 10+ Gb/s Modulators
• Insertion-Loss < 4.5 dB, (< 3 dB or < 2 dB option)
• Bandwidth > 10 GHz, (> 16 GHz option)
• Lower Drive-Voltage version: Vπ ~ 4 V
2.56” x 0.35” x 0.195” (65 x 8.9 x 4.95 mm3)
• Z-cut: ( Pre-chirp: α = - 0.7 ): Vπ ~ 5 V @ 1GHz
• X-cut: ( Zero-chirp: α = 0.0 ): Vπ ~ 5 V @ 1GHz
4.0” x 0.35” x 0.24”
High-speed Polarization Controllers
(101.6 x 8.9 x 6.1 mm3)
Polarization Tracking, Scrambling, PMD/PDL Compensation
High-speed (ns) 1xN, NxN Switches
• Insertion Loss < 3 dB , (< 2 dB option)
• Response Time <<100 ns
• Multiple Integrated Device Stages: 3 , 4, 6, 8, etc.
•. Available for λ = 1550, 1310, 1060 nm, …. etc.
+ Custom Electro-optic IC Modules
Single-Polarization (SP) or Polarization-Independent (PI)
1x2 (2x2) Ultra-high-speed SP Switch/Modulator
>10GHz (>18GHz option), <<100ps, Vπ ~ 5V
8x8 switch
1x2 (2x2) PI switch, 10-100ns
32-channel (8-λ , 4x4)
Pol. independent λ-cross connect
1x2 (2x2) SP switch, 10-100ns
2005
8x8: Strictly Non-blocking;
Double Crosstalk-suppression
1x8 SP switch
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement